Black plate (3,1)
Foreword
S35-D-110201-2C8F8855-48D9-450E-9DBD-72BB250FC3EB
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
This manual was prepared to help you under-
stand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of
driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties cov-
ering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide explains details
about maintaining and servicing your ve-
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
law.
In addition to factory installed options, your
vehicle may also be equipped with additional
accessories installed by NISSAN or by your
NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is important
that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
warnings, cautions and instructions concerning
proper use of such accessories prior to operat-
ing the vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSAN
dealer for details concerning the particular
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
accessories with which your vehicle is
equipped.
Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best.
When you require any service or have any
questions, we will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to us.
READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELY
S35-D-110201-B218D0A8-57A0-41E1-A4DD-B79D22675806
Before driving your vehicle, read your Owner’s
Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with
controls and maintenance requirements, assist-
ing you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION
REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
. NEVER drive under the influence of
alcohol or drugs.
. ALWAYS observe posted speed lim-
its and never drive too fast for
conditions.
. ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving and avoid using vehicle
features or taking other actions that
could distract you.
. ALWAYS use your seat belts and
appropriate child restraint systems.
Pre-teen children should be seated
in the rear seat.
. ALWAYS provide information about
the proper use of vehicle safety
features to all occupants of the
vehicle.
. ALWAYS review this Owner’s Man-
ual for important safety information.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING
This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger
car because it has a higher center of
gravity. As with other vehicles with fea-
tures of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control or an accident. Be sure to read
“On-pavement and off-road driving pre-
cautions”, “Avoiding collision and roll-
over” and “Driving safety precautions” in
the “5. Starting and driving” section of
this manual.
 Black plate (4,1)

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHI-

CLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate
governmental regulations. In addition,
damage or performance problems result-
ing from modification may not be covered
under NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or
serious personal injury. To avoid or
reduce the risk, the procedures must
be followed precisely.

WHENS35-D-110201-41CBDCB4-5922-422C-A89A-4A85949C893D
READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all
options available on this model. Therefore,
you may find some information that does
not apply to your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications or design at any time without
notice.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
S35-D-110201-B6107263-0162-499E-BBDC-7A3AA04EA482
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage to
your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,
the procedures must be followed care-
fully.
SIC0697
If you see the symbol above, it means “Do not
do this” or “Do not let this happen”.
NOS1274
If you see a symbol similar to those above in an
illustration, it means the arrow points to the front
of the vehicle.
NOS1275
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those
above indicate movement or action.

NOS1276

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (5,1)

above call attention to an item in the illustration. Bluetooth® is a trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 and licensed to Visteon Cor-
WARNING poration.
S35-D-110201-5162FF38-51AA-4296-B991-BA8FEE3F93CA
XM Radio® requires subscrip-
tion, sold separately. Not avail-
WARNING able in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.
For more information, visit
www.xmradio.com.
Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-
ents, and certain vehicle components
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products
of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI-

SORY S35-D-110201-20F77A4E-7DE2-4265-993D-651056B34FCB
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-
teries, may contain perchlorate material.
The following advisory is provided: “Per-
chlorate Material - special handling may
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
*
C 2011 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or
by any means, electronic, mechanical, photo-
copying, recording or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co.,
Ltd.

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (6,1)

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE

PROGRAM
GUID-FAF59CA8-D831-4D51-9C86-8BABA427B71A
NISSAN CARES ...
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you the following information: For U.S. customers
would like to provide NISSAN directly with . Your name, address, and telephone number Nissan North America, Inc.
comments or questions, please contact the Consumer Affairs Department
. Vehicle identification number (attached to
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using P.O. Box 685003
the top of the instrument panel on the
our toll-free number: Franklin, TN 37068-5003
driver’s side)
For U.S. customers or via e-mail at:
. Date of purchase
1-800-NISSAN-1 nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
. Current odometer reading
(1-800-647-7261) For Canadian customers
For Canadian customers . Your NISSAN dealer’s name Nissan Canada Inc.
1-800-387-0122 . Your comments or questions 5290 Orbitor Drive
OR Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
information.centre@nissancanada.
com
if you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and
thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (1,1)

Table of Illustrated table of contents 0

Contents Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone
and voice recognition systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical and consumer information 9

Index 10

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (7,1)

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint Instrument panel .......................................................................

... 0-6
System (SRS) ............................................................................
... 0-2 Meters and gauges ..................................................................
... 0-8
Exterior front ...............................................................................
... 0-3 Engine compartment ...............................................................
... 0-9
Exterior rear ................................................................................
... 0-4 QR25DE engine ................................................................
... 0-9
Passenger compartment .........................................................
... 0-5 Warning and indicator lights ..............................................
... 0-10

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (8,1)

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM (SRS)
S35-D-110201-0600BAC4-D762-43D4-AC45-17AA1784F842
— Child restraints (P.1-22)
11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
System (P.1-24)
12. Child restraint anchor points (for top tether strap
child restraint) (P.1-35)

SSI0348

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags (Page 1-39) supplemental air bags (P.1-39)
2. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air 6. Rear center seat belt (P.1-16)
bags (P.1-39) 7. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)
3. Seat belts (P.1-10) — Advanced air bag system (P.1-45)
4. Head restraints (P.1-6) 8. Front seats (P.1-3)
— Front-seat Active Head Restraints (P.1-9) 9. Seat belt pretensioner (P.1-51)
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover 10. Rear seats (P.1-6)
0-2 Illustrated table of contents

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (9,1)

EXTERIOR FRONT
S35-D-110201-EC0978FC-F07A-49EA-9574-1FE5707C4FA0
9. Recovery hook (P.6-14)
10. License plate installation (P.9-11)
11. Fog lights*
— Switch operation (P.2-38)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
12. Tires
— Wheel and tires (P.8-31, P.9-7)
— Flat tire (P.6-2)
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(P.2-14, P.5-3)
13. Doors
— Keys (P.3-2)
— Door locks (P.3-4)
— Intelligent Key system* (P.3-10)
— Remote keyless entry system* (P.3-7)
— Security system (P.2-28)
14. Child safety rear door lock (P.3-6)
*: if so equipped

JVC0165X

1. Front view camera* (P.4-14) — Blade replacement (P.8-17)

2. Hood (P.3-20) — Window washer fluid (P.8-12)
3. Headlight and turn signal lights 5. Roof rack (rail)* (P.2-48)
— Switch operation (P.2-34) 6. Moonroof* (P.2-51)
— Bulb replacement (P.8-25) 7. Outside mirrors (P.3-27)
4. Windshield wiper and washer — Side view camera* (P.4-14)
— Switch operation (P.2-31) 8. Power windows (P.2-49)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (10,1)

EXTERIOR REAR
S35-D-110201-A327354A-0E76-48C0-B44E-12F48CC4E9C8
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
9. Rear combination light
— Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
10. Fuel-filler door
— Operation (P.3-22)
— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)
*: if so equipped

SSI0762

1. Lift gate (P.3-21) 5. High-mounted stop light

— Intelligent Key system* (P.3-10) — Bulb replacement (P.8-27)
2. Rear view camera* (P.4-9) 6. Antenna (P.4-65)
3. Rear window wiper and washer — Satellite radio antenna* (P.4-31)
— Switch operation (P.2-32) 7. Sonar sensors*
— Window washer fluid (P.8-12) — Sonar system* (P.5-21)
4. Rear window defroster (P.2-33) 8. Back-up light

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (11,1)

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
S35-D-110201-D17BF6FB-2377-4353-8AA4-6003C390EDA9
10. Cargo area
— Storages (P.2-45)
— Luggage hooks (P.2-47)
— Cargo light (P.2-55)
— Spare tire (P.6-3)
11. Rear cup holders (P.2-42)
12. Console box (P.2-44)
— Power outlet* (P.2-41)
— iPod® or USB outlet connector* (P.4-45)
13. Front cup holders (P.2-42)
*: if so equipped

SSI0351

1. Cargo cover* (P.2-46) 6. Moonroof* (P.2-51)

2. Coat hooks (P.2-47) 7. Front map lights (P.2-53)
3. Ceiling light (P.2-54) 8. Sunglasses holder (P.2-43)
4. Door armrest 9. Inside rearview mirror (P.3-25)
— Power window switch (P.2-49) — Anti-glare adjustment* (P.3-26)
— Power door lock switch (P.3-5) — HomeLink® universal transceiver* (P.2-56)
5. Sun visors (P.3-25) — Compass* (P.2-8)

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (12,1)

INSTRUMENT PANEL
S35-D-110201-8C8F180E-0520-4D0C-9AA2-07D387D3F374
7. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-31)
8. Center ventilator (P.4-23)
9. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-38)
10. Audio system (P.4-30)/Navigation system**
— Clock (P.4-7, P.4-41, P.4-49)
— Rear view monitor* (P.4-9)
— Around viewTM monitor* (P.4-14)
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-39)
12. Outside remote mirror control switch (P.3-27)
13. Headlight aiming control* (P.2-37)
14. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch* (P.5-22)
15. Fuse box cover (P.8-20)
16. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
(P.2-41, P.5-29)
17. Hood release handle (P.3-20)
18. Tilting steering wheel lever (P.3-24)
19. Parking brake (P.5-18)
20. Ignition switch (P.5-10)
21. Heated seat switch* (P.2-39)
22. ’“Camera” Around viewTM monitor display switch*
(P.4-14)
23. Sport mode switch (P.5-16)
JVC0173X
24. Power outlet (P.2-41)
1. Side ventilator (P.4-23) 4. Steering wheel 25. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-24)
2. Headlight, fog light* and turn signal switch — Horn (P.2-39) 26. Selector lever (P.5-13)
(P.2-34) — Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-39) 27. Front passenger air bag status light (P.1-46)
3. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side)* — Electric power steering system (P.5-26) 28. Rear window and outside mirror* defroster switch
— Audio control* (P.4-64) 5. Meters and gauges (P.2-4) (P.2-33)
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System con- 6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side) 29. Glove box (P.2-44)
trol* (P.4-67) — Cruise control switches (P.5-19) *: if so equipped

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (13,1)

**: See a separate Navigation System Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (14,1)

METERS AND GAUGES

S35-D-110201-BA7643A9-5590-4C58-9A41-1AA8C68ABF1F

SIC4507

1. Tachometer (P.2-5) 7. switch (settings control and trip computer

2. Vehicle information display (P.2-20) control) (P.2-20)
3. Speedometer (P.2-4) 8. Fuel gauge (P.2-6)
4. Warning/indicator lights (P.2-11) *: if so equipped
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-6)
6. switch (twin trip odometer control and
brightness control) (P.2-5, P.2-7)

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (15,1)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
S35-D-110201-9403BD0A-8FC0-4429-95F9-7EE0FBDAD869

SDI2127

QR25DE ENGINE
S35-D-110201-F5728C95-8AB7-4D3F-9C26-000F8895595E
1. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-9) 7. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-9)
2. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-11) 8. Radiator filler cap (P.8-7)
3. Air cleaner (P.8-16) — Vehicle overheat (P.6-11)
4. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8) 9. Battery (P.8-13)
5. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-12) — Jump starting (P.6-9)
6. Engine drive belt location (P.8-15) 10. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-19)

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (16,1)

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

GUID-65B13399-03E2-4AC9-B527-1CEEE81B9182
Indicator
Warning Name Page
Name Page light
light
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning 2-17
2-12 indicator light (AWD models)*
light (AWD models)*
Front passenger air bag status
2-17
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) light
2-12
warning light High beam indicator light 2-17
Malfunction Indicator Light
2-17
(MIL)
Brake warning light 2-13
Overdrive off indicator light 2-18

Charge warning light 2-13 Security indicator light 2-18

Electric power steering warning
2-13 Small light indicator lights 2-18
light
Engine oil pressure warning SPORT mode indicator light 2-18
2-14
light
Turn signal/hazard indicator
Low fuel warning light 2-14 2-18
lights
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) 2-18
Low tire pressure warning light 2-14
off indicator light
Master warning light 2-15 *: if so equipped

Seat belt warning light 2-16

Supplemental air bag warning
2-16
light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) 2-16
warning light

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (17,1)

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system
Seats ............................................................................................
... 1-2 Rear-facing child restraint installation
Front seats ............................................................................
... 1-3 using LATCH ...................................................................
... 1-26
Rear seats .............................................................................
... 1-6 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the
Head restraints ....................................................................
... 1-6 seat belts ..........................................................................
... 1-28
Seat belts .................................................................................
... 1-10 Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH ...................................................................
... 1-30
Precautions on seat belt usage ....................................
... 1-10
Forward-facing child restraint installation using the
Pregnant women ..............................................................
... 1-13
seat belts ..........................................................................
... 1-32
Injured persons .................................................................
... 1-13
Installing top tether strap .............................................
... 1-35
Three-point type seat belt ..............................................
... 1-13
Booster seats ..................................................................
... 1-36
Seat belt extenders ..........................................................
... 1-19
Supplemental Restraint System ........................................
... 1-39
Seat belt maintenance ....................................................
... 1-19
Precautions on Supplemental Restraint System ..... ... 1-39
Child safety ..............................................................................
... 1-20
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
Infants ..................................................................................
... 1-21 (front seats) .....................................................................
... 1-45
Small children ....................................................................
... 1-21 Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
Larger children ..................................................................
... 1-21 bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
Child restraints ........................................................................
... 1-22 rollover supplemental air bag systems ..................... ... 1-49
Precautions on child restraints .....................................
... 1-22 Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) ............. ... 1-51
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Supplemental air bag warning labels ....................... ... 1-52
System (LATCH) ..............................................................
... 1-24 Supplemental air bag warning light ............................. 1-52
Repair and replacement procedure .......................... ... 1-53

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


SEATS
S35-D-110201-E7A0F37F-C118-45BC-AF57-B050BFBD9D51
WARNING
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle
when the seatback is reclined. This
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt
will not be against your body. In an
accident, you could be thrown into it
and receive neck or other serious
injuries. You could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious
internal injuries.
. For the most effective protection
when the vehicle is in motion, the
seat should be upright. Always sit
1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (18,1)
. The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when
the passenger sits well back and
straight up in the seat. If the seat-
back is reclined, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and being injured
is increased.
CAUTION
SSS0133
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or da-
well back in the seat with both feet mages.
on the floor and adjust the seat
properly. See “Precautions on seat
belt usage” later in this section.
. After adjustment, gently rock in the
seat to make sure it is securely
locked.
. Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
dents.

FRONTS35-D-110201-0B2F8171-4FBB-4017-8E6D-A2ADBA98B68B
SEATS
Front manual seat adjustment
S35-D-110201-39869990-85F6-41BF-8D6F-13366F5484E7
Forward and backward:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Pull the lever *
1 up and hold it while you slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the lever to lock the seat in
position.
Reclining: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
To recline the seatback, pull the lever * 2 up and
lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull
the lever up and lean your body forward. Release
the lever to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SSS0792
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage”
later in this section.) Also, the seatback can be
reclined to allow occupants to rest when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission in the P
(Park) position with the parking brake fully
applied.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Black plate (19,1)
SSS0793
Seat lifter (if so equipped):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to
adjust the seat height until the desired position
is achieved.
Front power seat adjustment
S35-D-110201-E3D911AF-69FD-43AC-9099-E36EA61A5234
Operating tips:GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
. The seat motor has an auto-reset overload
protection circuit. If the motor stops during
operation, wait for a while, then reactivate
the switch.
. Do not operate the power seat for a long
period of time when the engine is off. This
will discharge the battery.
1-3
 Black plate (20,1)

SSS1051 SSS1052

Forward and backward:

GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
vehicle is stopped and the transmission in the P Seat lifter (if so equipped):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Moving the switch * 1 forward or backward will (Park) position with the parking brake fully Pull up or push down the adjusting switch to
slide the seat forward or backward to the applied. adjust the height of the seat.
desired position.
Reclining: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Move the recline switch * 2 backward until the
desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
forward again, move the switch * 2 forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. (See “Precautions on seat belt usage”
later in this section.) Also, the seatback can be
reclined to allow occupants to rest when the

1-4 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


section.)
SSS1053 SSS0796
Lumbar support (if so equipped): Folding front passenger’s seat (if so
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The lumbar support feature provides lower back equipped)
S35-D-110201-C19042A4-37EC-4F5E-A2F3-CC2DCE9D4829
support to the driver. The front passenger’s seatback can be folded
Push the front or back end of the switch to down. Some long objects may be loaded in the
adjust the seat lumbar area. vehicle when the rear seats are also folded
down. (See “Rear seats” later in this section for
folding rear seats.)
To fold the front passenger’s seatback, pull the
reclining lever all the way *
1 .
When returning the front passenger’s seatback
to a seating position, lift it up to an upright
position. Pull the reclining lever and lean the
seatback to a proper seating position. (See
“Front manual seat adjustment” earlier in this
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (21,1)
WARNING
. If you fold the front passenger’s
seatback down to carry longer ob-
jects, be sure this cargo is properly
secured and not near an air bag. In a
crash, an inflating air bag might
force that object toward a person.
This could cause severe injury or
even death. Secure objects away
from the area in which an air bag
would inflate. See “Precautions on
Supplemental Restraint System” la-
ter in this section.
. Never allow anyone to ride in the
cargo area or on the front passen-
ger’s seat when it is in the fold-
down position. Use of these areas
by passengers could result in ser-
ious injury in an accident or sudden
stop.
1-5

To fold down the seatback of each rear seat, pull
the adjusting knob *A .
To return the seatback to the seating position, lift
up each seatback and push it to the upright
position until it is latched.
WARNING
. Do not use the rear seat belts when
the buckles are stowed in the seat
pockets. Failure to do so may re-
duce the effectiveness of the entire
SSS0797 restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an
REAR SEATS accident.
S35-D-110201-F1069FCA-D94F-46E4-9FA4-8088C2EFB096
Folding S35-D-110201-F3098F1C-3843-46A3-9934-E20A6D0E0E98 . Do not fold down the rear seats
Before foldingGUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
the rear seats: when occupants are in the rear seat
area or any objects are on the rear
. Secure the seat belts on the seat belt hooks seats.
on the side wall. (See “Seat belt hooks” later
. Never allow anyone to ride in the
in this section.)
cargo area or on the rear seats
. Release the connector tongue of the rear
when they are in the fold-down
center seat belt from the buckle, and store
position. Use of these areas by
the connector and seat belt tongues into the
passengers without proper re-
retractor base on the ceiling. (See “Rear
straints could result in serious injury
center seat belt” later in this section.)
in an accident or sudden stop.
. If necessary, move the front seats forward to
provide enough clearance so that the rear . Properly secure all cargo with ropes
seats can be folded down completely. or straps to help prevent it from
1-6 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (22,1)
sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unse-
cured cargo could cause personal
injury.
. When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched
position. If they are not completely
secured, passengers may be injured
in an accident or sudden stop.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
S35-D-110201-8707514E-311A-4F34-AD80-2FBAE21FA9C7
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other
vehicle safety systems. They may pro-
vide additional protection against injury
in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the
head restraints properly, as specified in
this section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not
attach anything to the head restraint
stalks or remove the head restraint. Do
not use the seat if the head restraint
has been removed. If the head restraint
was removed, install and properly ad-
just the head restraint before an occu-
 Black plate (23,1)

pant uses the seating position. Failure

to follow these instructions can reduce
the effectiveness of the head restraints.
This may increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision.

SSS1019 SSS0992

The illustration shows the seating positions ComponentsGUID-DDD8B264-2306-4776-B3E1-9A8CEBB2AF8D

equipped with head restraints. The head re-
1. Head restraint
straints are adjustable.
2. Adjustment notches
Indicates the seating position is equipped
with a head restraint. 3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (24,1)

SSS0997 SSS0993 SSS0994

Adjustment To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
S35-D-110201-805BC978-8292-4E16-AEC0-DF1F8262FAB3
the head restraint down.
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of your ears.

1-8 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


SSS0995
Removal GUID-C561A9AF-CBB2-4542-89D6-BD973A7B3031
Use the following procedure to remove the
adjustable head restraints.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly in a secure
place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
5. Install and properly adjust the head restraint
before an occupant uses the seating posi-
tion.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SSS0996
Install GUID-6FFAC965-3169-4B2F-AEA8-863C33C198E2
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes
in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint
is facing the correct direction. The stalk with
the adjustment notches * 1 must be in-
stalled in the hole with the lock knob * 2 .
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Black plate (25,1)
SSS0508
Front-seat Active Head Restraints
GUID-807E7618-FD6F-421A-A613-6003E38F8273
The Active Head Restraint moves forward
utilizing the force that the seatback receives
from the occupant in a rear-end collision. The
movement of the head restraint helps support
the occupant’s head by reducing its backward
movement and helping absorb some of the
forces that may lead to whiplash-type injuries.
Active Head Restraints are effective for colli-
sions at low to medium speeds in which it is said
that whiplash injury occurs most.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original position.
1-9

Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as
described earlier in this section.
1-10 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (26,1)
SEAT BELTS
S35-D-110201-AC80E8BC-300A-4AA0-B891-3F74F65091FC
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGES35-D-110201-EF0341D0-1574-4F9D-8E0C-2681E0EC6E69
If you are wearing your seat belt properly
adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well
back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your
chances of being injured or killed in an accident
and/or the severity of injury may be greatly
reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and
all of your passengers to buckle up every time
you drive, even if your seating position includes a
supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be
worn at all times when a vehicle is being
driven.
 Black plate (27,1)

SSS0136 SSS0016

SSS0134 SSS0014

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


WARNING
. Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times. Children should be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat and,
if appropriate, in a child restraint.
. The seat belt should be properly
adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do
so may reduce the effectiveness of
the entire restraint system and in-
crease the chance or severity of
injury in an accident. Serious injury
or death can occur if the seat belt is
not worn properly.
. Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your
chest. Never put the belt behind
your back, under your arm or across
your neck. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder.
. Position the lap belt as low and
snug as possible AROUND THE
HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt
worn too high could increase the
risk of internal injuries in an acci-
dent.
1-12 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
. Be sure the seat belt tongue is
securely fastened to the proper
buckle.
. Do not wear the seat belt inside out
or twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
. Do not allow more than one person
to use the same seat belt.
. Never carry more people in the
vehicle than there are seat belts.
. If the seat belt warning light glows
continuously while the ignition is
turned ON with all doors closed and
all seat belts fastened, it may in-
dicate a malfunction in the system.
Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
. No changes should be made to the
seat belt system. For example, do
not modify the seat belt, add mate-
rial, or install devices that may
change the seat belt routing or
tension. Doing so may affect the
operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the
seat belt system may result in
serious personal injury.
Black plate (28,1)
. Once a seat belt with pretensioner
has activated, it cannot be reused
and must be replaced together with
the retractor. See a NISSAN dealer.
. Removal and installation of the
pretensioner system components
should be done by a NISSAN dealer.
. All seat belt assemblies, including
retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any colli-
sion by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN
recommends that all seat belt as-
semblies in use during a collision be
replaced unless the collision was
minor and the belts show no da-
mage and continue to operate prop-
erly. Seat belt assemblies not in use
during a collision should also be
inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is
noted.
. All child restraints and attaching
hardware should be inspected after
any collision. Always follow the
restraint manufacturer’s inspection
instructions and replacement re-
commendations. The child restraints
should be replaced if they are

damaged.
PREGNANT WOMEN
S35-D-110201-2A5432EA-9682-462A-BBA2-91F344E24C4C
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,
and always position the lap belt as low as
possible around the hips, not the waist. Place
the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across
your chest. Never put the lap/shoulder belt over
your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for
specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
S35-D-110201-6EA4B080-DF25-4064-9479-6435EFE1B055
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with
your doctor for specific recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
S35-D-110201-EE5B8B35-634E-4A7E-8C28-8020915E39DA
WARNING
. Every person who drives or rides in
this vehicle should use a seat belt at
all times.
. Do not ride in a moving vehicle
when the seatback is reclined. This
can be dangerous. The shoulder belt
will not be against your body. In an
accident, you could be thrown into it
and receive neck or other serious
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (29,1)
injuries. You could also slide under suitable tool (such as a knife or
the lap belt and receive serious scissors) to release the seat belt.
internal injuries.
. For the most effective protection Fastening the seat belts
S35-D-110201-DE724EE3-6830-4B45-BDB6-208527FD1AE3
when the vehicle is in motion, the 1. Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” earlier in this
seat should be upright. Always sit section.)
well back in the seat with both feet
on the floor and adjust the seat belt
properly.
. Do not allow children to play with
the seat belts. Most seating posi-
tions are equipped with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat
belts. If the seat belt becomes
wrapped around a child’s neck with
the ALR mode activated, the child
can be seriously injured or killed if
the seat belt retracts and becomes
tight. This can occur even if the
vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat
belt to release the child. For the
center of the rear seat, the connec-
tor tongue may also be released.
Release the connector tongue by
inserting a suitable tool (such as a
key) into the connector buckle A. If
the seat belt can not be unbuckled
or is already unbuckled, release the
child by cutting the seat belt with a
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

SSS0292
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
. The retractor is designed to lock
during a sudden stop or on impact.
A slow pulling motion permits the
belt to move and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
. If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the
retractor.
1-14 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SSS0290
3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to
allow the driver and passengers some freedom
Black plate (30,1)
of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat
belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or
during certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for
child restraint installation.
When ALR mode is activated the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional
information, see “Child restraints” later in this
section.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR
mode should not be activated. If it is
activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat
belt tension.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be
certain that seatbacks are completely
secured in the latched position. If they
are not completely secured, passengers
may be injured in an accident or sudden
stop.
 Black plate (31,1)

If the retractor does not lock during this check or

if you have any question about seat belt
operation, see a NISSAN dealer.

SSS0326 SSS0351A

Unfastening the seat belts

S35-D-110201-11A952B5-692A-47B8-966D-B4A69BA2A046
Shoulder beltGUID-D8387696-338B-4786-A52E-9891FB597B2C
height adjustment
To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the The shoulder belt anchor height should be
buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts. adjusted to the position best for you. (See
“Precautions on seat belt usage” earlier in this
Checking seat belt operation
S35-D-110201-FDCB1C8F-6FB1-42E1-A49D-FC53E5629F4C section.)
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat
To adjust, pull the adjustment button * 1 , and
belt movement by two separate methods:
then move the shoulder belt anchor to the
. When the belt is pulled quickly from the desired position * 2 , so that the belt passes
retractor. over the center of the shoulder. The belt should
. When the vehicle slows down rapidly. be away from your face and neck, but not falling
Check the operation as follows: off of your shoulder. Release the adjustment
. Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into
quickly. The retractor should lock and position.
restrict further belt movement.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (32,1)

WARNING
. After adjustment, release the ad-
justment button and try to move the
shoulder belt anchor up and down
to make sure it is securely fixed in
position.
. The shoulder belt anchor height
should be adjusted to the position
best for you. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the
entire restraint system and increase
SSS0798 SSS0391
the chance or severity of injury in an
accident.
Seat belt hooks
S35-D-110201-89C01315-89B4-4608-B0A9-9E385C8C5405
Rear center seat belt
S35-D-110201-1849A6AA-6297-47D0-B281-8CF75EFC9D96
When the rear seat belts are not in use and The rear center seat belt has a connector tongue
when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear * 1 and a seat belt tongue * 2 . Both the
outer seat belts on the seat belt hooks. connector tongue and the seat belt tongue must
be securely latched for proper seat belt opera-
tion.

1-16 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (33,1)

SSS0241 SSS0703

The center seat belt buckle and the tongue are

WARNING identified by the CENTER mark. The center seat
belt tongue can be fastened only into the center
. Always fasten the connector tongue seat belt buckle.
and the seat belt in the order shown.
. Always make sure both the connec-
tor tongue and the seat belt tongue
are secured when using the seat
belt or installing a child restraint. Do
not use the seat belt or child
restraint with only the seat belt
tongue attached. This could result
SSS0799
in serious personal injury in case of
an accident or a sudden stop.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (34,1)

Stowing rear center seat belt:

GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407 in the correct position, serious per-
When folding down the rear seat, the rear center sonal injury may result in an acci-
seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position dent or sudden stop.
as follows:
1. Hold the connector tongue * 1 so that the
seat belt does not retract suddenly when the
tongue is released from the connector
buckle. Release the connector tongue by
inserting a suitable tool such as key *
A into
the connector buckle.
2. Insert the seat belt tongue into the retractor
base first *2 .

3. Then secure the connector tongue into the

retractor base *
3 .

WARNING
. Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
. When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the
seatbacks are completely secured in
the latched position and the rear
center seat belt connector is com-
pletely secured. SSS0800

. If the rear center seat belt connector

and the seatbacks are not secured
1-18 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


Attaching rearGUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
center seat belt:
Always be sure the rear center seat belt
connector tongue and connector buckle are
attached. Disconnect only when folding down
the rear seat.
To connect the buckle:
1. Pull out the connector tongue from the
retractor base *
1 .
2. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the
retractor base *
2 .
3. Pull the seat belt and secure the connector
buckle until it clicks *
3 .
The center seat belt connector tongue can be
attached only into the rear center seat belt
connector buckle.
To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seat
belts” earlier in this section.
WARNING
. Do not unfasten the rear center seat
belt connector except when folding
down the rear seat.
. When attaching the rear center seat
belt connector, be certain that the
seatbacks are completely secured in
the latched position and the rear
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
center seat belt connector is com-
pletely secured.
. If the rear center seat belt connector
and the seatbacks are not secured
in the correct position, serious per-
sonal injury may result in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
GUID-EE8D5105-6862-4626-B3E3-5740C9C87D87
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available that can be
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8
in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either
the driver or front passenger seating position.
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with
purchasing an extender if an extender is
required.
WARNING
. Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,
made by the same company which
made the original equipment seat
belts, should be used with NISSAN
seat belts.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Black plate (35,1)
. Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use
could result in serious personal
injury in the event of an accident.
. Never use seat belt extenders to
install child restraints. If the child
restraint is not secured properly, the
child could be seriously injured in a
collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
S35-D-110201-C896C95E-BD55-4C8D-B00A-8645F8B01CF9
. To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recom-
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
. Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt
1-19

CHILD SAFETY
GUID-3CD18BAA-767F-4097-9C72-8CB7C220AB43
assembly should be replaced.
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the
seat belts. Most seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a
child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-
vated, the child can be seriously injured
or killed if the seat belt retracts and
becomes tight. This can occur even if
the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat
belt to release the child. For the center
of the rear seat, the connector tongue
may also be released. Release the
connector tongue by inserting a suita-
ble tool (such as a key) into the
connector buckle A. If the seat belt
can not be unbuckled or is already
unbuckled, release the child by cutting
the seat belt with a suitable tool (such
as a knife or scissors) to release the
seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
1-20 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (36,1)
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
. Rear-facing child restraint
. Forward-facing child restraint
. Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-
facing child restraints. Forward-facing child
restraints are available for children who outgrow
rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1
year old. Booster seats are used to help position
a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no
longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special pro-
tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not
fit them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly
fitting seat belt could cause serious or
fatal injury. Always use appropriate

child restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require the use of approved child
restraints for infants and small children. See
“Child restraints” later in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle
by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and
Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle
seat belt. See “Child restraints” later in this
section for more information.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-
ger. See “Supplemental Restraint System”
later in this section.
INFANTS GUID-8B512B1F-1773-4C0A-92B9-DD6E7BC59681
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-
mends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (37,1)
that fits your vehicle and always follow the commercially available booster seat if the
manufacturer’s instructions for installation and shoulder belt fits close to the face or neck or if
use. the lap portion of the seat belt goes across the
SMALL CHILDREN abdomen. The booster seat should raise the
GUID-1389650A-F101-451E-83E7-5ED25B7AA16D
child so that the shoulder belt is properly
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at
positioned across the top, middle portion of
least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing
the shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips.
child restraint as long as possible up to the
A booster seat can only be used in seating
height or weight limit of the child restraint.
positions that have a three-point type seat belt.
Forward-facing child restraints are available for
The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and
children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints
have a label certifying that it complies with
and are at least 1 year old. Refer to the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
manufacturer’s instructions for minimum and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
maximum weight and height recommendations.
Once the child has grown so the shoulder belt
NISSAN recommends that small children be
is no longer on or near the face and neck, use
placed in child restraints that comply with
the shoulder belt without the booster seat.
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You
should choose a child restraint that fits your WARNING
vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use. Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the
LARGER CHILDREN
GUID-7E131263-864D-4FCD-962F-582BD50C1E9B
cargo area. The child could be seriously
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat
injured or killed in a sudden stop or
collision.
belts which are provided. The seat belt may not
fit properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and
80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to
obtain proper seat belt fit.
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

CHILD RESTRAINTS
S35-D-110201-8783AACE-BE38-452F-A948-0A1B4B4A3486
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE-
STRAINTS
S35-D-110201-6ADBF799-13ED-4B1F-AF7C-AE2700F03C69
WARNING
. Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use and in-
stallation of child restraints could
result in serious injury or death of a
child or other passengers in a
sudden stop or collision:
— The child restraint must be used
and installed properly. Always
SSS0099
follow all of the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for
installation and use.
— Infants and children should
never be held on anyone’s lap.
Even the strongest adult cannot
resist the forces of a collision.
— Do not put a seat belt around
both a child and another pas-
senger.
— NISSAN recommends that all
child restraints be installed in
the rear seat. Studies show that
SSS0100
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than
1-22 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (38,1)
in the front seat. If you must
install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, see
“Forward-facing child restraint
installation using the seat belts”
later in this section.
— Even with the NISSAN Advanced
Air Bag System, never install a
rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat. An inflating air bag
could seriously injure or kill a
child. A rear-facing child re-
straint must only be used in the
rear seat.
— Be sure to purchase a child
restraint that will fit the child
and vehicle. Some child re-
straints may not fit properly in
your vehicle.
— Child restraint anchor points are
designed to withstand loads
from child restraints that are
properly fitted.
— Never use the anchor points for
adult seat belts or harnesses.
— A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the
front passenger seat.

— Keep seatbacks as upright as
possible after fitting the child
restraint.
— Infants and children should al-
ways be placed in an appropri-
ate child restraint while in the
vehicle.
. When the child restraint is not in
use, keep it secured with the LATCH
system or a seat belt. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose objects can
injure occupants or damage the
vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating
surface and buckles before placing a
child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-
dren) system. Some child restraints include rigid
or webbing-mounted attachments that can be
connected to these anchors.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (39,1)
For details, see “Lower Anchors and Tethers for anchor point on the vehicle.
CHildren System (LATCH)” later in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and small children of various sizes. When
selecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
. Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
. Check the child restraint in your vehicle to
be sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s
seat and seat belt system.
. If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on forward-facing child
restraints be secured to the designated
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

LATCH lower anchor
SSS0801
LATCH label location
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
System (LATCH)
GUID-3A1A4921-5C9C-4347-B791-C3094BCE2FD4
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with the LATCH (Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system
compatible child restraints. This system may
also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX
compatible system. With this system, you do not
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint.
1-24 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (40,1)
GUID-33CE3731-1F03-443A-8CF6-CDDAB704C7C4
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and
instructions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
. Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration. SSS0637
LATCH lower anchor location
. Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using LATCH lowerGUID-DFC4FF9B-A8F5-4E6B-9100-8F238B533199
anchor location
the LATCH lower anchors. The child The LATCH anchors are located at the rear of
restraint will not be secured prop- the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
erly. attached to the seatback to help you locate the
. Inspect the lower anchors by insert- LATCH anchors.
ing your fingers into the lower
anchor area. Feel to make sure
there are no obstructions over the
anchors such as seat belt webbing
or seat cushion material. The child
restraint will not be secured prop-
erly if the lower anchors are ob-
structed.

SSS0643
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments
GUID-8BAB037C-5B6D-44DE-830B-55C33F68E811
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this
system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat
belt to secure the child restraint. Check your
child restraint for a label stating that it is
compatible with LATCH. This information may
also be in the instructions provided by the child
restraint manufacturer.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SSS0644
LATCH rigid attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Black plate (41,1)
SSS0802
Top tether anchor point locations
GUID-88B0DA6B-48C8-4D43-823E-06537948B956
Anchor points are located on the floor behind
the outboard and center seating positions.
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing child restraints with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments or seat belts.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap child restraint on the rear
seat, consult a NISSAN dealer for details.
1-25
 Black plate (42,1)

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN-

STALLATIONGUID-BD4A4FCD-5DC0-4FEB-9820-BF55E3A4A411
USING LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before
installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.

SSS0648 SSS0649
Rear-facing web-mounted — step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted — step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is
properly attached to the lower anchors.

1-26 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


SSS0639
Rear-facing — step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (43,1)
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1
through 4.
SSS0650
Rear-facing — step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the child restraint
near the LATCH attachment path. The child
restraint should not move more than 1 inch
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
forward and check to see if the LATCH
attachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint or try
installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if
applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
 Black plate (44,1)

ger air bag and status light” later in this

section.

SSS0100 SSS0100
Rear-facing — step 1
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT IN-
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
STALLATIONGUID-FE8F38A1-6CB8-4668-A5F7-CB4161B5AC06
USING THE SEAT BELTS safety” earlier in this section and “Child re-
straints” earlier in this section before installing a
WARNING child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
The three-point seat belt with Auto- restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be seats:
used when installing a child restraint. 1. Child restraints for infants must be
Failure to use the ALR mode will result used in the rear-facing direction and
in the child restraint not being properly therefore must not be used in the front
secured. The restraint could tip over or seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
be loose and cause injury to a child in a Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can instructions.
change the operation of the front
passenger air bag. See “Front passen-
1-28 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


SSS0654
Rear-facing — step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for belt routing.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (45,1)
SSS0655 SSS0656
Rear-facing — step 3 Rear-facing — step 4
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

SSS0657
Rear-facing — step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.
1-30 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (46,1)
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-
STRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH GUID-485A2C23-22CE-47D8-A4B0-982AC225E511
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before
installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
SSS0658 child restraint using the LATCH system:
Rear-facing — step 6
1. Position the child restraint on the seat.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it Always follow the child restraint manufac-
before you place the child in it. Push it from turer’s instructions.
side to side while holding the child restraint
near the seat belt path. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),
from side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the belt holds the restraint in
place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten
the seat belt as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the

SSS0645
Forward-facing web-mounted — step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is
properly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this
section. Do not install child restraints that
require the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a top
tether anchor.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SSS0646
Forward-facing rigid-mounted — step 3
3. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable headrest and it is interfering with
the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Black plate (47,1)
SSS0647
Forward-facing — step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
1-31
 Black plate (48,1)

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 6.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE-
STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE
SEAT BELTSGUID-921B92C8-992C-479E-B015-F19A421AFE89

SSS0638
Forward-facing — step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the child restraint
near the LATCH attachment path. The child
restraint should not move more than 1 inch
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
forward and check to see if the LATCH
attachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint. Not all
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
1-32 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
. The three-point seat belt with Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must
be used when installing a child
restraint. Failure to use the ALR
mode will result in the child re-
straint not being properly secured.
The restraint could tip over or be
loose and cause injury to a child in a
sudden stop or collision. Also, it can
change the operation of the front
passenger air bag. See “Front pas-
senger air bag and status light”
later in this section.
. When installing a child restraint
system in the rear center position,
both the center seat belt connector
tongue and buckle tongue must be
secured. See “Rear center seat belt”
earlier in this section.
SSS0640
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) — step 1
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before
installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move the
seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and, therefore,
must not be used in the front seat.

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (49,1)

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct child restraint
fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in
a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the child restraint
is removed. See “Head restraints” earlier in
this section for head restraint adjustment,
removal and installation information. SSS0360B SSS0651
If the seating position does not have an Forward-facing — step 3 Forward-facing — step 4
adjustable head restraint or headrest and it 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
is interfering with the proper child restraint restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
fit, try another seating position or a different hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
child restraint. follow the child restraint manufacturer’s mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
instructions for belt routing. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
If the child restraint is equipped with a top when the seat belt is fully retracted.
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only). See
“Installing top tether strap” later in this
section. Do not install child restraints that
require the use of a top tether strap in
seating positions that do not have a top
tether anchor.

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


SSS0652
Forward-facing — step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
1-34 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SSS0653
Forward-facing — step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
Black plate (50,1)
SSS0641
Forward-facing — step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it from
side to side while holding the child restraint
near the seat belt path. The child restraint
should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm),
from side to side. Try to tug it forward and
check to see if the belt holds the restraint in
place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten
the seat belt as necessary, or put the
restraint in another seat and test it again.
You may need to try a different child
restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.
SSS0803
Forward-facing — step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light should illuminate. If this light
is not illuminated, see “Front passenger air
bag and status light” in this section. Move
the child restraint to another seating
position. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child
restraint mode) is canceled.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (51,1)
SSS0802
INSTALLINGGUID-59BD9773-D5FB-4A40-A629-230CF7E1F55D
TOP TETHER STRAP
First secure the child restraint with the LATCH
system (rear outboard seating positions only) or
the seat belt as applicable.
1. Remove the anchor cover from the anchor
point which is located directly behind the
child seat.
2. Position the top tether strap over the top of
the seatback.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
bracket that provides the straightest instal-
lation.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
1-35
 Black plate (52,1)

slack.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
BOOSTER SEATS
GUID-DF82A688-ABAA-4A5E-A557-514AABE84C41

Precautions GUID-BBFC5B7F-B068-435F-A96A-BBAEFEDF668E
on booster seats

WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not
used properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a sudden stop or collision
greatly increases:
. Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
. A booster seat must only be in-
stalled in a seating position that has
a lap/shoulder belt.
LRS0455
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
. Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
. Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
LRS0453
. Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
low back booster seat * 1 is chosen, the
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
high back booster seat * 2 should be used.
. If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with
your child. Always follow all recommended
procedures.

1-36 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (53,1)

when using a booster seat with the

seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child

safety”, “Child restraints” and “Booster seats”
sections earlier in this section before installing a
child restraint.

LRS0464 SSS0640

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
territories require that infants and small rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
children be restrained in an approved child 1. If you must install a booster seat in the
restraint at all times while the vehicle is front seat, move the seat to the rear-
being operated. most position.
The instructions in this section apply to booster 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
seat installation in the rear seats or the front place it in a forward-facing direction. Always
passenger seat. follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
Booster seatGUID-906FC462-164E-4FE3-BE05-FC9DE1AC4750
installation instructions.

CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


LRS0454
Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head
restraint to obtain the correct booster seat
fit. If the head restraint is removed, store it in
a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. See “Head restraints” earlier in
this section for head restraint adjustment,
removal and installation information.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint or headrest and it
is interfering with the proper booster seat fit,
try another seating position or a different
1-38 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (54,1)
booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s
instructions for adjusting the seat belt
routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing. SSS0803
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt 7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
shown in “Seat belts” earlier in this section. passenger seat, turn the ignition switch to
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light may or may not illuminate
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat used. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
S35-D-110201-750013D3-4DA5-4F34-8644-D034C27A567C
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
S35-D-110201-64A33E9E-5442-4B86-8B34-1A52ADC3D902
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
section contains important information concern-
ing the following systems:
. Driver and passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag
. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-
over supplemental air bag
. Seat belt with pretensioner
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can
help cushion the impact force to the head and
chest of the driver and front passenger in certain
frontal collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvis
areas of the driver and front passenger in certain
side impact collisions. The side air bags are
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle
is impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag system: This
system can help cushion the impact force to the
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (55,1)
head of occupants in front and rear outboard
seating positions in certain side impact or
rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain
and rollover air bags are designed to inflate on
the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a
rollover both curtain and rollover air bags are
designed to inflate and remain inflated for a
short period of time.
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection
provided by the driver and passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the
occupant seated a suitable distance away from
the steering wheel, instrument panel and door
finishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section
for instructions and precautions on seat belt
usage.)
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the systems are operational.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
 Black plate (56,1)

WARNING
. The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact,
rear impact, rollover, or lower se-
verity frontal collision. Always wear
your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various
kinds of accidents.
. The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag
status light is lit or if the front
SSS0131
passenger seat is unoccupied. See
“Front passenger air bag and status
light” later in this section.
. The seat belts and the front air bags
are most effective when you are
sitting well back and upright in the
seat with both feet on the floor. The
front air bags inflate with great
force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System, if you are
unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-
ting sideways or out of position in
any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may
SSS0132 also receive serious or fatal injuries
from the front air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit
1-40 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (57,1)

back against the seatback and as crease the risk that they are injured
far-away as practical from the steer- if the front air bag inflates.
ing wheel or instrument panel. Al-
ways use the seat belts.
. The driver and front passenger seat
belt buckles are equipped with
sensors that detect if the seat belts
are fastened. The Advanced Air Bag
System monitors the severity of a
collision and seat belt usage then
inflates the air bags as needed.
Failure to properly wear seat belts
can increase the risk or severity of SSS0007
injury in an accident.
. The front passenger seat is
equipped with an occupant classifi-
cation sensor (pattern sensor) that
turns the front passenger air bag
OFF under some conditions. This
sensor is only used in this seat.
Failure to be properly seated and
wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an
accident. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.
. Keep hands on the outside of the
SSS0006
steering wheel. Placing them inside
the steering wheel rim could in-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (58,1)

WARNING
. Never let children ride unrestrained
or extend their hands or face out of
the window. Do not attempt to hold
them in your lap or arms. Some
examples of dangerous riding posi-
tions are shown in the illustrations.
. Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side
air bags or curtain and rollover air
bags inflate if they are not properly
SSS0008 SSS0099
restrained. Pre-teens and children
should be properly restrained in the
rear seat, if possible.
. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating front air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child.
See “Child restraints” earlier in this
section for details.

SSS0009 SSS0100

1-42 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (59,1)

SSS0059A SSS0140 SSS0159

Do not lean against doors or windows.

WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact sup-
plemental air bags and roof-mounted
curtain side-impact and rollover supple-
mental air bags:
. The side air bags and curtain and
rollover air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a frontal
impact, rear impact or lower severity
side collision. Always wear your
SSS0162 seat belts to help reduce the risk
SSS0188A or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (60,1)

. The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain and rollover air bags are
most effective when you are sitting
well back and upright in the seat.
The side air bag and curtain and
rollover air bag inflate with great
force. Do not allow anyone to place
their hand, leg or face near the side
air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side
roof rails. Do not allow anyone
sitting in the front seats or rear
outboard seats to extend their hand
out of the window or lean against
the door. Some examples of dan-
gerous riding positions are shown
in the previous illustrations.
. When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you
may be seriously injured. Be espe-
cially careful with children, who
should always be properly re-
strained. Some examples of danger-
ous riding positions are shown in
the illustrations.
. Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with
side air bag inflation.

1-44 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYSTEM (front seats)
GUID-BCBE423F-BE9E-45CC-9789-8C72FD21C176
1. Crash zone sensor
2. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air
bag modules
4. Occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor)
5. Occupant classification system control unit
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SSS0804
6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bags
7. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover
supplemental air bag inflators
8. Lap outer pretensioners
9. Seat belt with pretensioners
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Black plate (61,1)
10. Satellite sensors
11. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN
Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and
front passenger seats. This system is designed
to meet certification requirements under U.S.
regulations. It is also permitted in Canada.
However, all of the information, cautions
and warnings in this manual still apply and
must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel; the
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the instrument panel above the glove
box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity frontal collisions, although they
may inflate if the forces in another type of
collision are similar to those of a higher severity
frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain
frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is
not always an indication of proper front air bag
operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has
dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors
information from the crash zone sensor, satellite
sensor, Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt
buckle sensors and occupant classification
sensor (pattern sensor). Inflator operation is
based on the severity of a collision and seat belt
usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the
1-45

occupant classification sensor is also monitored.
Based on information from the sensors, only one
front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on
the crash severity and whether the front
occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally,
the front passenger air bag may be automatically
turned OFF under some conditions, depending
on the information provided by the occupant
classification sensor. If the front passenger air
bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light
will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the
light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will
be off). (See “Front passenger air bag and
status light” later in this section for further
details.) One front air bag inflating does not
indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, contact NISSAN or a NISSAN dealer. If
you are considering modification of your vehicle
due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in
the front of this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate
a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should get fresh
air promptly.
1-46 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (62,1)
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the head
and chest of the front occupants. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,
an inflating front air bag may cause facial
abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do
not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat
belts should be correctly worn and the driver
and passenger seated upright as far as practical
away from the steering wheel or instrument
panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order
to help protect the front occupants. Because of
this, the force of the front air bag inflating can SSS0803
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too Front passenger air bag status light
close to, or is against, the air bag module during Front passenger air bag and status light
GUID-ACE53E41-9E7C-4048-9DF6-4D8DC09B7ACC
inflation.
The front air bags will deflate quickly after a
collision.
WARNING
The front air bags operate only when the The front passenger air bag is designed
ignition switch is in the ON position. to automatically turn OFF under some
After turning the ignition switch to the ON conditions. Read this section carefully
to learn how it operates. Proper use of
position, the supplemental air bag warning
the seat, seat belt and child restraints is
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
necessary for most effective protection.
warning light will turn off after about 7
Failure to follow all instructions in this
seconds if the system is operational.
manual concerning the use of seats,
seat belts and child restraints can
increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.
Status light: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The front passenger air bag status light is
located on the instrument panel below the air
conditioner controls. The light operates as
follows:
. Unoccupied passenger seat: The light
is OFF and the front passenger air bag is
OFF and will not inflate in a crash.
. Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The light illuminates to indicate
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
will not inflate in a crash.
. Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
ger meets the conditions outlined in this
section: The light is OFF to indicate
that the front passenger air bag is opera-
tional.
Front passenger air bag:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is
operated under some conditions as described
below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the
front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate
in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags
in your vehicle are not part of this system.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be
automatically turned OFF.
The occupant classification sensor (pattern
sensor) is in the front passenger seat cushion
and is designed to detect an occupant and
objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in
the front passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag
System is designed to turn the passenger air
bag OFF in accordance with the regulations.
Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in
the regulations is on the seat, the occupant
classification sensor can detect it and cause the
air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as
outlined in this manual should not cause the
passenger air bag to be automatically turned
OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,
however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat
properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by
sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise
being out of position), this could cause the
sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure
to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly
for the most effective protection by the seat belt
and supplemental air bag.
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Black plate (63,1)
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate
child restraints and booster seats be properly
installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the
occupant classification sensor is designed to
operate as described above to turn the front
passenger air bag OFF for specified child
restraints. Failing to properly secure child
restraints and to use the Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode)
may allow the restraint to tip or move in an
accident or sudden stop. This can also result in
the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead
of being OFF. (See “Child restraints” earlier in
this section for proper use and installation.)
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object being detected by the occupant
classification sensor. Other conditions could
also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is
automatically turned OFF with the seat occu-
1-47

pied. The light will not illuminate when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the
passenger air bag status light is illuminated
(indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be
that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting
on the seat properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may
not be illuminated, depending on the size of the
child and the type of child restraint being used. If
the air bag status light is not illuminated
(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a
crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat
belt is not being used properly. Make sure that
the child restraint is installed properly, the seat
belt is used properly and the occupant is
positioned properly. If the air bag status light is
not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child
restraint in a rear seat.
If the passenger air bag status light will not
illuminate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
1-48 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
light will take a few seconds to register a change
in the passenger seat status. However, if the
seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status
light will remain off.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
light , located in the meter and gauges area,
will blink. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions GUID-387727EE-AF0A-4050-A289-3F91D1423535
WARNING
. Do not place any objects on the
steering wheel pad or on the instru-
ment panel. Also, do not place any
objects between any occupant and
the steering wheel or instrument
panel. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the front air bag inflates.
. Do not place objects with sharp
edges on the seat. Also, do not
place heavy objects on the seat that
will leave permanent impressions in
Black plate (64,1)
the seat. Such objects can damage
the seat or occupant classification
sensor (pattern sensor). This can
affect the operation of the air bag
system and result in serious perso-
nal injury.
. Do not use water or acidic cleaners
(hot steam cleaners) on the seat.
This can damage the seat or occu-
pant classification sensor. This can
also affect the operation of the air
bag system and result in serious
personal injury.
. Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you
may severely burn yourself.
. No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the supplemental air bag system.
This is to prevent accidental infla-
tion of the supplemental air bag or
damage to the supplemental air bag
system.
. Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or front end
structure. This could affect proper
operation of the front air bag sys-

tem.
. Tampering with the supplemental
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury. Tampering includes
changes to the steering wheel and
the instrument panel assembly by
placing material over the steering
wheel pad and above the instrument
panel or by installing additional trim
material around the air bag system.
. Modifying or tampering with the
front passenger seat may result in
serious personal injury. For exam-
ple, do not change the front seats by
placing material on the seat cushion
or by installing additional trim ma-
terial, such as seat covers, on the
seat that is not specifically designed
to assure proper air bag operation.
Additionally, do not stow any ob-
jects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback.
Such objects may interfere with the
proper operation of the occupant
classification sensor.
. No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the seat belt system. This may
affect the front air bag system.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (65,1)
Tampering with the seat belt system
may result in serious personal in-
jury.
. Work on and around the front air
bag system should be done by a
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-
trical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not
be modified or disconnected. Un-
authorized electrical test equipment
and probing devices should not be SSS0521
used on the air bag system.
. A cracked windshield should be FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM-
replaced immediately by a qualified PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND
repair facility. A cracked windshield ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IM-
could affect the function of the PACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLEMEN-
supplemental air bag system. TAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
GUID-096A54D2-8C32-47BD-A15D-AE19A34FB303
The side air bags are located in the outside of
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
the seatback of the front seats. The curtain and
rollover air bags are located in the side roof rails.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you These systems are designed to meet voluntary
inform the buyer about the front air bag system guidelines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections of-position occupants. However, all of the
in this Owner’s Manual. information, cautions and warnings in this
manual still apply and must be followed.
The side air bags and curtain and rollover air
bags are designed to inflate in higher severity
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

side collisions, although they may inflate if the
forces in another type of collision are similar to
those of a higher severity side impact. They are
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle
is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side
collisions on the side where the vehicle is
impacted. Curtain and rollover air bags are also
designed to inflate in certain types of rollover
collisions or near rollovers.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain and
rollover air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain and rollover
air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not
harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should
be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing
condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest
and pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain
and rollover air bags help to cushion the impact
force to the head of occupants in the front and
rear outboard seating positions. They can help
save lives and reduce serious injuries. However,
side air bags and curtain and rollover air bags
may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air
bags and curtain and rollover air bags do not
1-50 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bags. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover
air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect
the occupants in the outboard seating positions.
Because of this, the force of the side air bags
and curtain and rollover air bags inflating can
increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too
close to, or is against, these air bag modules
during inflation. The side air bags and curtain
and rollover air bags will deflate quickly after the
collision is over.
The side air bags and curtain and rollover
air bags operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the systems are operational.
Black plate (66,1)
WARNING
. Do not place any objects near the
seatback of the front seats. Also, do
not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door
finisher and the front seat. Such
objects may become dangerous
projectiles and cause injury if a side
air bag inflates.
. Right after inflation, several side air
bag and curtain and rollover air bag
system components will be hot. Do
not touch them; you may severely
burn yourself.
. No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the side air bag and curtain and
rollover air bag systems. This is to
prevent damage to or accidental
inflation of the side air bag and
curtain and rollover air bag systems.
. Do not make unauthorized changes
to your vehicle’s electrical system,
suspension system or side panel.
This could affect proper operation
of the side air bag and curtain and
rollover air bag systems.

. Tampering with the side air bag
system may result in serious perso-
nal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing
material near the seatbacks or by
installing additional trim material,
such as seat covers, around the side
air bag.
. Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain and rollover air bag
systems should be done by a
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-
trical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not
be modified or disconnected. Un-
authorized electrical test equipment
and probing devices should not be
used on the side air bag and curtain
and rollover supplemental air bag
systems.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain and rollover air bag systems and guide
the buyer to the appropriate sections in this
Owner’s Manual.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SEAT BELTS WITH PRETENSIONERS
(front seats) GUID-6661B209-8D93-4FE3-95C3-B230E4D4CC5D
WARNING
. The pretensioners cannot be reused
after activation. They must be re-
placed together with the retractor
and buckle as a unit.
. If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but a pretensioner is not
activated, be sure to have the pre-
tensioner system checked and, if
necessary, replaced by a NISSAN
dealer.
. No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring
of the pretensioner system. This is
to prevent damage to or accidental
activation of the pretensioners.
Tampering with the pretensioner
system may result in serious perso-
nal injury.
. Work around and on the preten-
sioner system should be done by a
NISSAN dealer. Installation of elec-
trical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Un-
authorized electrical test equipment
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Black plate (67,1)
and probing devices should not be
used on the pretensioner system.
. If you need to dispose of a preten-
sioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a
NISSAN dealer. Correct preten-
sioner disposal procedures are set
forth in the appropriate NISSAN
Service Manual. Incorrect disposal
procedures could cause personal
injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with the
supplemental air bag system in certain types of
collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, it
helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle
becomes involved in certain types of collisions,
helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same
way as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. The
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it
may cause irritation and choking. Those with a
history of a breathing condition should get fresh
air promptly.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
1-51
 Black plate (68,1)

reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light is
used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner
system. (See "SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT" in this section for more
details.) If the supplemental air bag warning light
indicates there is a malfunction, have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
SSS1020 SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS GUID-37DF6A92-22A9-49A7-98CE-C6CDC2B970ED
Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag systems are placed in the vehicle
as shown in the illustration.
*
1 SRS air bag
GUID-CE62463F-AE26-46D9-BB1F-CAB75ADF2F27
The warning labels are located on the surface of
the sun visors.
1-52 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LIGHT GUID-10351182-5327-4A48-81C2-1CEB9FDA3F20
The supplemental air bag warning light, display-
ing in the instrument panel, monitors the
circuits of the supplemental front-impact air bag,
front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag and seat belt
pretensioner systems. The monitored circuits
include Air bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone
sensor, satellite sensors, occupant classification
system, front air bag modules, side air bag
modules, curtain and rollover air bag modules,
pretensioners and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-
nates for about 7 seconds and then turns off.
This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
and pretensioner systems need servicing:
. The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
. The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
. The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag, curtain and rollover air bag and preten-
sioner systems may not operate properly. They
must be checked and repaired. Take your
vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain and roll-
over air bag and/or pretensioner sys-
tems will not operate in an accident. To
help avoid injury to yourself or others,
have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO-
CEDURES35-D-110201-893056AA-962B-4966-BF1A-CC8E22C7E775
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and
rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed
to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a
reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemen-
tal air bag warning light will remain illuminated
after inflation has occurred. Repair and replace-
ment of these systems should be done only by a
NISSAN dealer.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain
and rollover air bags and pretensioners and
related parts should be pointed out to the
person performing the maintenance. The ignition
switch should always be in the LOCK position
when working under the hood or inside the
vehicle.
WARNING
. Once a front air bag, side air bag or
curtain and rollover air bag has
inflated, the air bag module will
not function again and must be
replaced. Additionally, the activated
pretensioners must also be re-
placed. The air bag module and
pretensioner system should be re-
Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Black plate (69,1)
placed by a NISSAN dealer. The air
bag modules and pretensioner sys-
tem cannot be repaired.
. The front air bag, side air bag and
curtain and rollover air bag systems,
and pretensioner system should be
inspected by a NISSAN dealer if
there is any damage to the front
end or side portion of the vehicle.
. If you need to dispose of a supple-
mental air bag or pretensioner, or
scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Correct supplemental air
bag and pretensioner system dis-
posal procedures are set forth in the
appropriate NISSAN Service Man-
ual. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
1-53
 Black plate (70,1)

MEMO

1-54 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (71,1)

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel ........................................................................

... 2-3 Windshield wiper and washer switch .............................. ... 2-31
>
Meters and gauges ...................................................................
... 2-4 Rear window wiper and washer switch .......................... ... 2-32
Speedometer ........................................................................
... 2-4 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch ....... ... 2-33
Odometer/twin trip odometer ..........................................
... 2-5 Headlight and turn signal switch .......................................
... 2-34
Tachometer ...........................................................................
... 2-5 Xenon headlights (if so equipped) ............................ ... 2-34
Engine coolant temperature gauge ................................
... 2-6 Headlight switch ............................................................
... 2-36
Fuel gauge ............................................................................
... 2-6 Turn signal switch ..........................................................
... 2-38
Instrument brightness control ..........................................
... 2-7 Fog light switch (if so equipped) ..............................
... 2-38
Compass (if so equipped) ......................................................
... 2-8 Hazard warning flasher switch ...........................................
... 2-38
Zone variation change procedure ...................................
... 2-9 Horn ..........................................................................................
... 2-39
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ............ ... 2-11 Heated seats (if so equipped) ...........................................
... 2-39
Checking bulbs .................................................................
... 2-12 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch ................. ... 2-41
Warning lights ...................................................................
... 2-12 Power outlet ............................................................................
... 2-41
Indicator lights ...................................................................
... 2-17 Storages ..................................................................................
... 2-42
Audible reminders ............................................................
... 2-18 Cup holders .....................................................................
... 2-42
Vehicle information display ..................................................
... 2-20 Sunglasses holder .........................................................
... 2-43
Outside air temperature ..................................................
... 2-20 Glove box .........................................................................
... 2-44
Indicators for operation ...................................................
... 2-22 Console box ....................................................................
... 2-44
Indicators for maintenance .............................................
... 2-24 Luggage floor box (if so equipped) .......................... ... 2-45
Trip computer ....................................................................
... 2-25 Luggage side box ..........................................................
... 2-45
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Cargo cover (if so equipped) .....................................
... 2-46
position indicator ..............................................................
... 2-28 Luggage hooks (if so equipped) .................................. 2-47
Security systems ....................................................................
... 2-28 Coat hooks (if so equipped) .......................................
... 2-47
Vehicle Security System .................................................
... 2-29 Utility hook .......................................................................
... 2-48
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .......................... ... 2-30 Roof rack (if so equipped) ..........................................
... 2-48

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (72,1)

Windows ..................................................................................
... 2-49 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) ...... ... 2-56
Power windows ................................................................
... 2-49 Programming HomeLink® .............................................
... 2-56
Moonroof (if so equipped) ...................................................
... 2-51 Programming HomeLink® for
Automatic moonroof ........................................................
... 2-52 Canadian customers .....................................................
... 2-58
Interior lights ............................................................................
... 2-53 Operating the HomeLink®
Map lights ...........................................................................
... 2-53 Universal Transceiver ....................................................
... 2-58
Ceiling light ........................................................................
... 2-54 Programming trouble-diagnosis .................................
... 2-58
Vanity mirror lights (if so equipped) ..................................
... 2-55 Clearing the programmed information ......................
... 2-58
Cargo light ...............................................................................
... 2-55 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button .......... ... 2-58
If your vehicle is stolen .................................................
... 2-59

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (73,1)

INSTRUMENT PANEL
S35-D-110201-A7D4030A-2862-489B-A7AF-66159DF04F04
9. Hazard warning flasher switch
10. Audio system/Navigation system (if so equipped)
— Clock
— Rear view monitor (if so equipped)
— Around viewTM monitor (if so equipped)
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag
12. Outside remote mirror control switch
13. Headlight aiming control (if so equipped)
14. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK switch (if so
equipped)
15. Fuse box cover
16. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
17. Hood release handle
18. Tilting steering wheel lever
19. Parking brake
20. Ignition switch
21. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)
22. ’“Camera” Around viewTM monitor display switch
(if so equipped)
23. Sport mode switch
24. Power outlet
25. Heater/air conditioner control
JVC0173X
26. Selector lever
1. Side ventilator — Horn 27. Front passenger air bag status light
2. Headlight, fog light (if so equipped) and turn — Driver supplemental air bag 28. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
signal switch 5. Meters and gauges defroster switch
3. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left side) 6. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right side) 29. Glove box
— Audio control — Cruise control switches
— Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system control 7. Wiper and washer switch
4. Steering wheel 8. Center ventilator

Instruments and controls 2-3

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (74,1)

METERS AND GAUGES

S35-D-110201-F221FA22-5C18-4A37-B124-E6F61E733E4B

SIC4534

SPEEDOMETER
S35-D-110201-C9945ABD-2549-458F-908F-CB27BD1CA5A3

Speedometer
S35-D-110201-60576567-9CF2-4129-A4A9-9B5C4699383D
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed in
miles per hour (MPH) or kilometers per hour
(km/h).

SIC4507

1. Tachometer 7. switch (settings control and trip computer

2. Vehicle information display control)
3. Speedometer 8. Fuel gauge
4. Warning/indicator lights The needle indicators may move slightly
5. Engine coolant temperature gauge after the ignition switch is turned to the
6. switch (twin trip odometer control and LOCK position. This is not a malfunction.
brightness control)

2-4 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (75,1)

Twin trip odometer

S35-D-110201-D6A1AD54-C687-4B93-91DA-22BF83CE3F84
The twin trip odometer * B records the distance
of 2 individual trips (TRIP A and TRIP B).
Changing the display:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Briefly push the switch * C to change the
display as follows.
TRIP A ? TRIP B ? TRIP A
Resetting the GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
trip odometer:
Push and hold the switch for approximately
1 second to reset the selected trip (TRIP A or
TRIP B).
SIC4575 SIC4535

ODOMETER/TWIN TRIP ODOMETER

S35-D-110201-2BE450E5-2630-467B-84F7-2D3A478E020E
TACHOMETER
S35-D-110201-BB0955F7-0971-43A9-994F-8F7EC807ED65
The odometer and twin trip odometer are The tachometer indicates engine speed in
displayed on the vehicle information display revolutions per minute (RPM). Do not rev the
when the ignition switch is in the ON position. engine into the red zone * 1 .

Odometer
S35-D-110201-8DFDDE94-809B-4D2D-AA93-E378AFA980E9
The odometer * A records the total distance the CAUTION
vehicle has been driven.
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce
engine speed. Operating the engine in
the red zone may cause serious engine
damage.

Instruments and controls 2-5

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (76,1)

normal range, reduce vehicle speed to

decrease temperature. If the gauge is
over the normal range, stop the vehicle
as soon as safely possible. If the engine
is overheated, continued operation of
the vehicle may seriously damage the
engine. See “If your vehicle overheats”
in the “6. In case of emergency” section
for immediate action required.

SIC4513 SIC4511

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FUEL GAUGE

S35-D-110201-1F9776FA-11AF-431D-8547-74A51ADB5779
GAUGES35-D-110201-93431A36-1936-48DD-9179-7AC08AF28991 The gauge * A indicates the approximate fuel
The gauge * A indicates the engine coolant level in the tank.
temperature. The gauge may move slightly during braking,
The engine coolant temperature is within the turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
normal range when the gauge is within the zone Refill the fuel tank before the gauge
*B shown in the illustration. registers 0.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the The low fuel warning light illuminates and
outside air temperature and driving conditions. low fuel warning appears on the vehicle
information display when the fuel tank is getting
low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,
CAUTION preferably before the gauge reaches the empty
(0) position. There is a small reserve of fuel in the
If the gauge indicates engine coolant
tank when the fuel gauge reaches the empty (0)
temperature near the hot (H) end of the
2-6 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (77,1)

position. INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CON-

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is TROL S35-D-110201-942D1E32-EA3F-452B-B723-C16268B42967
located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The instrument brightness control operates
when the headlight switch is in the or
position.
CAUTION
Turn the control * A to adjust the brightness of

. If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the the meter panel and the instrument panel lights.
malfunction indicator light (MIL) The brightness indicator * B will be shown
may come on. Refuel as soon as briefly in the vehicle information display when
possible. After a few driving trips, the control is turned.
the light should turn off. If the When the brightness level reaches the maximum
light remains on after a few driving or minimum, a beep will sound.
trips, have the vehicle inspected by SIC4596 When the brightness level reaches the minimum,
a NISSAN dealer. the meter panel and the instrument panel lights
. For additional information, see will be turned off.
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” After the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
later in this section. position, the brightness indicator * B is dis-
played for 30 seconds.

SIC4508

Instruments and controls 2-7

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (78,1)

COMPASS (if so equipped)

S35-D-110201-6718DB06-B463-43CA-BD28-611344A99E9E

on your everyday route. The compass will be

calibrated once it has tracked 3 complete
circles.
To turn on and off the compass manually, push
the switch *
A while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.

SIC3181

When the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, the compass display * B will indicate
the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

NOS1741

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass

by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h). You can also
calibrate the compass by driving your vehicle

2-8 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (79,1)

ZONE VARIATION CHANGE PROCE-

DURE S35-D-110201-82A40380-09D9-4293-9E67-C058500213DD
The difference between magnetic north and
geographical north is known as variance. In
some areas, this difference can sometimes be
great enough to cause false compass readings.
Follow these instructions to set the variance for
your particular location if this happens:
1. Push the switch for more than 3
seconds. The current zone number will
appear in the display.
2. Find your current location and variance
number on the zone map.
NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.
3. Push the switch repeatedly until the
new zone number appears in the display,
then release the switch. After you release
the switch, the display will show a compass
direction within a few seconds.
. If the compass deviates from the correct
indication soon after repeated adjust-
ment, have the compass checked at a
SIC0611B NISSAN dealer.
Zone map . The compass may not indicate the
correct compass point in tunnels or while
driving up or down a steep hill. (The
compass returns to the correct compass

Instruments and controls 2-9

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (80,1)

point when the vehicle moves to an area

where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)

CAUTION
. Do not install a ski rack, antenna,
etc., which are attached to the
vehicle by means of a magnet. They
affect the operation of the compass.
. When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as it may cause the liquid
cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

2-10 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (81,1)

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

AUDIBLE REMINDERS
S35-D-110201-B00B3ECC-8D3D-461F-9906-7A31121D4043

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light (AWD

Low fuel warning light High beam indicator light
models)*
Low tire pressure warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light
Master warning light Overdrive off indicator light

Seat belt warning light Security indicator light

Brake warning light
Supplemental air bag warning light Small light indicator light

Charge warning light
Electric power steering warning light
Engine oil pressure warning light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light SPORT mode indicator light
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK indicator light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
(AWD models)*
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
Front passenger air bag status light
light
*: if so equipped

Instruments and controls 2-11

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


CHECKING BULBS
S35-D-110201-509763A1-1CD5-4013-B64B-BA38C7221423
WARNING LIGHTS
S35-D-110201-B0BCAF7C-D090-4C01-8D57-DB3AE4D3CA95
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning
and turn the ignition switch to the ON position
light (AWD models)
without starting the engine. The following lights S35-D-110201-355E3C0A-32CD-480B-B487-AC5E7170D1C5
will come on: The light illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. It turns off after the
, or , , , , , engine is started.
The following lights come on briefly and then go If the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system malfunc-
off (if so equipped): tions, or the diameter of the front and the rear
, or , , , , , wheels are different, the warning light will either
remain illuminated or blink. (See “All-Wheel
If any light does not come on, it may indicate a
Drive (AWD)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system checked by section.)
a NISSAN dealer.
Some indicators and warnings are also dis-
CAUTION
played on the vehicle information display be-
tween the speedometer and tachometer. (See . If the warning light comes on while
“Vehicle information display” later in this sec- driving there may be a malfunction
tion.) in the AWD system. Reduce the
vehicle speed and have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as
soon as possible.
. If the AWD warning light blinks
while driving:
— blinks rapidly (about twice a
second):
Pull off the road in a safe area,
and idle the engine. The driving
mode will change to 2WD to
2-12 Instruments and controls
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (82,1)
prevent the AWD system from
malfunctioning. If the warning
light turns off, you can drive
again.
— blinks slowly (about once every
2 seconds):
Pull off the road in a safe area,
and idle the engine. Check that
all tire sizes are the same, tire
pressure is correct and tires are
not worn.
. If the warning light is still on after
the above operations, have your
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
as soon as possible.
or Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light
S35-D-110201-1E759848-5414-4A25-BA81-86C4D2F42713
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates
the ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may
indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system then

operates normally, but without anti-lock assis-
tance. (See “Brake system” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.)
orS35-D-110201-FAC4FDDE-38CB-4A48-8813-E0FC7230DB1A
Brake warning light
This light functions for both the parking brake
and the foot brake systems.
Parking brakeGUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
indicator:
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the light illuminates when the parking brake is
applied.
Low brake fluid warning light:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the
light illuminates while the engine is running with
the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle
and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. (See “Brake fluid” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
brake system checked, and if necessary re-
paired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See
“Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light”
earlier in this section.)
WARNING
. Your brake system may not be
working properly if the warning light
is on. Driving could be dangerous. If
you judge it to be safe, drive care-
fully to the nearest service station
for repairs. Otherwise, have your
vehicle towed because driving it
could be dangerous.
. Pressing the brake pedal with the
engine stopped and/or low brake
fluid level may increase your stop-
ping distance and braking will re-
quire greater pedal effort as well as
pedal travel.
. If the brake fluid level is below the
minimum or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
Black plate (83,1)
Charge warning light
S35-D-110201-B5291C9A-3089-486D-840B-2926E436A0BE
If the light illuminates while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not
functioning properly. Turn the engine off and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,
broken, missing or if the light remains on, see a
NISSAN dealer immediately.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving if the alternator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
Electric power steering warning
light S35-D-110201-88542F69-8229-41AA-9C73-2BE953D6B595
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the electric power steering warning light illumi-
nates. After starting the engine, the electric
power steering warning light turns off. This
indicates the electric power steering system is
operational.
If the electric power steering warning light
illuminates while the engine is running, it may
indicate the electric power steering system is
not functioning properly and may need servicing.
Have the electric power steering system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
When the electric power steering warning light
Instruments and controls 2-13

illuminates with the engine running, the power
assist to the steering will cease operation but
you will still have control of the vehicle. At this
time, greater steering efforts are required to
operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp
turns and at low speeds.
See “Electric power steering system” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section.
Engine oil pressure warning light
S35-D-110201-C80220D1-03E9-488E-BDF8-81593D799430
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or illuminates during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
Use the dipstick to check the oil level. (See
“Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section.)
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause
serious damage to the engine almost
immediately. Such damage is not cov-
ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as
soon as it is safe to do so.
2-14 Instruments and controls
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Low fuel warning light
S35-D-110201-883DEE8B-A008-4DC5-AE18-F92E410CAE65
This light illuminates when the fuel in the tank is
getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,
preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the 0
position.
There will be a small reserve of fuel
remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge
reaches E.
Low tire pressure warning light
GUID-2B04969B-D277-451A-A047-99EE83E91ECC
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light
illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning (if so
equipped) also appears in the vehicle informa-
tion display.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD tire
pressure shown on the Tire and Loading
Black plate (84,1)
Information label. The low tire pressure warning
light does not automatically turn off when the tire
pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to
the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to
activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning (if so
equipped) is active as long as the low tire
pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, see “Vehicle informa-
tion display” later in this section, “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section and “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section.
TPMS malfunction:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
turned ON. The light will remain on after 1
minute. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning
(if so equipped) does not appear if the low tire
pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a
TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting

and driving” section.
WARNING
. If the light does not illuminate with
the ignition switch turned ON, have
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible.
. If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle
speed, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop the vehicle as
soon as possible. Driving with un-
der-inflated tires may permanently
damage the tires and increase the
likelihood of tire failure. Serious
vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could
result in serious personal injury.
Check the tire pressure for all four
tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the
recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label to turn the low
tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light stays on after adjusting the
tire pressure and driving over 16
MPH (25 km/h), have the system
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
checked by a NISSAN dealer. If you
have a flat tire, replace it with a
spare tire as soon as possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
. Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
CAUTION
. The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure
to check the tire pressure regularly.
. If the vehicle is being driven at
speeds of less than 16 MPH (25
km/h), the TPMS may not operate
correctly.
Black plate (85,1)
. Be sure to install the specified size
of tires to the front and rear.
Master warning light
S35-D-110201-B0903750-6B3F-4490-9C34-E79202140256
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the master warning light illuminates if any of the
following are displayed on the vehicle informa-
tion display.
. Intelligent Key detection warning (if so
equipped)
. Low fuel warning
. Low washer fluid warning (if so equipped)
. Parking brake release warning
. Door open warning
. Lift gate open warning
. Loose fuel cap warning
. Check tire pressure warning (if so equipped)
. Setting menu operation warning
. Intelligent Key system fault warning (if so
equipped)
See “Vehicle information display” later in this
section.
Instruments and controls 2-15

Seat belt warning light
S35-D-110201-DFCBA132-B95A-44A5-9B3E-E0FBB8D293E7
The light and chime remind you to fasten seat
belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, and will
remain illuminated until the driver’s seat belt is
fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound
for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt
is securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light for the front
passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not
fastened when the front passenger’s seat is
occupied. For about 5 seconds after the ignition
switch is in the ON position, the system does
not activate the warning light for the front
passenger.
See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
for precautions on seat belt usage.
Supplemental air bag warning light
GUID-0BCEC56A-5310-4561-AD7B-B9A0E3518B42
After turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning light
will illuminate. The supplemental air bag warning
light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the
supplemental front air bag and supplemental
side air bag, curtain side-impact air bag systems
and/or pretensioner seat belt are operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag
2-16 Instruments and controls
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
and pretensioner systems need servicing and
your vehicle must be taken to your nearest
NISSAN dealer.
. The supplemental air bag warning light
remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
. The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
. The supplemental air bag warning light does
not illuminate at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental
Restraint Systems and/or the pretensioners may
not function properly.
For additional information, see “Supplemental
Restraint System” in the “1. Safety — Seats,
seat belts and supplemental restraint system”
section.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning
light is on, it could mean that the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain and roll-
over air bag and/or pretensioner sys-
tems will not operate in an accident. To
help avoid injury to yourself or others,
have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible.
Black plate (86,1)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
warning lightGUID-A2AB8C35-82AD-4A90-9170-49ABF8331549
The light will blink when the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system or the traction control
system is operating, thus alerting the driver that
the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road
surface may be slippery.
If the VDC warning light illuminates while the
VDC system is on, this light alerts the driver to
the fact that the VDC system’s fail-safe mode is
operating, for example the VDC system may not
be functioning properly. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer. If a malfunction
occurs in the system, the VDC system function
will be canceled but the vehicle is still driveable.
For additional information, see “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.

INDICATOR LIGHTS
S35-D-110201-93D8A153-4B41-4643-9F4D-4E46D2B6B569
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) LOCK
indicator light (AWD model)
S35-D-110201-FC7B00D5-9770-487E-BFC5-E6D3A121AAFB
This light illuminates when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, and turns off within 1
second.
When selecting the LOCK mode while the
engine is running, this light will illuminate. (See
“All-Wheel Drive (AWD)” in the “5. Starting and
driving” section.)
Front passenger air bag status light
S35-D-110201-CE599749-7443-4418-9473-AB9574042550
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit
and the passenger front air bag will be OFF
depending on how the front passenger seat is
being used.
For front passenger air bag status light opera-
tion, see “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
of this manual.
High beam indicator light
S35-D-110201-07BD5427-AE0D-485E-80A5-812FA0319F8E
This light illuminates when the headlight high
beam is on and goes out when the low beam is
selected.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
S35-D-110201-F2AAEA88-0C31-456F-B0D1-06BE0BA285F5
If the malfunction indicator light illuminates
steady or blinks while the engine is running, it
may indicate a potential emission control and/or
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) mal-
function.
The malfunction indicator light may also illumi-
nate steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check
to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and
. Malfunction indicator light blinking — An
closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3
US gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the light should
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds
and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine
is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not
ready for an emission control system inspection/
maintenance test. (See “Readiness for Inspec-
tion/Maintenance (I/M) test” in the “9. Technical
and consumer information” section.)
Operation:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The malfunction indicator light will illuminate in
one of two ways:
. Malfunction indicator light illuminated steady
— An emission control system and/or CVT
malfunction has been detected. Check the
Black plate (87,1)
fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning appears in the vehicle information
display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle. The light
should turn off after a few driving trips. If the
light does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
engine misfire has been detected which may
damage the emission control system.
To reduce or avoid emission control system
damage:
— Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
— Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
— Avoid steep uphill grades.
— If possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
The malfunction indicator light may stop
blinking and remain illuminated.
Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN
dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle
towed to the dealer.
Instruments and controls 2-17

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without
having the emission control system
and/or CVT system checked and re-
paired as necessary could lead to poor
driveability, reduced fuel economy, and
possible damage to the emission con-
trol system.
Overdrive off indicator light
S35-D-110201-DB3484E2-4E19-4E8D-8653-05337ABAC493
The overdrive off indicator light illuminates when
the overdrive off mode is selected.
For additional information, see “Continuously
Variable Transmission (CVT)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Security indicator light
S35-D-110201-96187D83-25D7-49DD-B539-C22AB5E56EEC
The light blinks when the ignition switch is in the
ACC, OFF or LOCK position. This function
indicates the security system equipped on the
vehicle is operational.
If the security system is malfunctioning, this light
will remain on while the ignition switch is in the
ON position. For additional information, see
“Security systems” later in this section.
2-18 Instruments and controls
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Small light indicator light
S35-D-110201-983C926F-208B-45A5-A6A7-8EE1E1B71861
The light illuminates when the headlight switch is
turned to the position.
SPORTGUID-A5B1431D-85F0-4BB0-8D0D-7C6EA87C77F8
mode indicator light
The SPORT mode indicator light illuminates
when the SPORT mode is turned “ON”.
(See“Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section
for the use of the SPORT mode switch.)
Turn signals/hazard indicator lights
S35-D-110201-B4A3944F-23DC-4EA1-8175-E073999D4DFC
The light flashes when the turn signal switch
lever or hazard switch is turned on.
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off
indicatorS35-D-110201-0A999065-0D3C-4D64-8EDF-469349E59659
light
The light comes on when the Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This
indicates that the VDC system and traction
control system are not operating.
Black plate (88,1)
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
S35-D-110201-EBE34375-E958-4BE7-B4B9-6966B8417588
Key reminder chime
S35-D-110201-AB668DF3-6A09-4AA0-AD8E-4FAC9B4D0267
The key reminder chime sounds if the driver’s
side door is opened while the key is left in the
ignition switch and the ignition switch is in the
ACC, OFF or LOCK position. Remove the key
and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.
Light reminder chime
S35-D-110201-C3CB04AA-B814-4136-9596-954368CA7654
The light reminder chime will sound when the
driver side door is opened with the light switch
in the or position, and the ignition
switch is in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position.
Turn the light switch off when you leave the
vehicle.
Brake pad wear warning
S35-D-110201-1563C518-8031-4E59-8C17-F598AED67549
The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-
ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
will make a high pitched scraping sound when
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will
first occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,
the sound will always be heard even if the brake
pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the warning
sound is heard.
 Black plate (89,1)

ParkingS35-D-110201-A0CEFDAA-E25A-4EB3-B94E-E27ED0243C7B
brake reminder chime
The parking brake reminder chime will sound if
the vehicle is driven at more than 4 MPH (7
km/h) with the parking brake applied. Stop the
vehicle and release the parking brake.
Seat belt warning chime
S35-D-110201-B111E09A-3135-472D-8E70-13DED4C26584
The seat belt warning chime will sound for about
6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is
securely fastened.
Intelligent Key door buzzer (if so
equipped) GUID-B22CE9E1-E8C5-48F1-98CA-8261AC0807CC
When the chime or buzzer sounds from inside
and outside the vehicle, check for the following:
. The ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position.
. The intelligent Key is not left inside the
vehicle.
. Doors are closed securely.
. The selector lever is in the P position.
When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both
the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
See “Intelligent Key system” in the “3. Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section.

Instruments and controls 2-19

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (90,1)

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

S35-D-110201-F6A3583F-0558-48FA-ACF6-F3E6D55C756A
brightness control)
*: if so equipped
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
GUID-C477B35D-0A78-4C16-94C3-0FFE06FBA2FA
The outside air temperature is displayed in 8F or
8C in the range of −58 to 1408F (−50 to 608C).
The outside air temperature mode includes low
temperature warning features.
. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position,
— If the outside temperature is below 258F
(- 4 8C), the outside temperature display
flashes for 20 seconds, then stays on
steady.
— If the outside temperature is between 27
and 378F(−3 and 38C), the outside
temperature display flashes continuously.
. With the ignition switch in the ON position,
or while driving,
— If the outside temperature drops below
378F(38C), the outside temperature dis-
SIC4577
play flashes continuously. In addition, the
1. Outside temperature 4. Odometer low outside temperature warning indica-
2. Clock 5. Twin trip odometer tor appears for 5 seconds, then turns off.
3. Operation indicators and warnings 6. Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) posi- — If the outside temperature drops below
— Trip computer tion indicator 258F(- 4 8C), the outside temperature
— Cruise control 7. switch (settings control and trip computer display stays on steady. The low outside
— Settings menu control) temperature warning indicator does not
— Intelligent Key operation* 8. switch (twin trip odometer control and appear.

2-20 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (91,1)

These warning features can be turned off in the

Trip computer setting mode.(See “Trip compu-
ter” later in this section.)
The outside temperature sensor is located in
front of the radiator. The sensor may be affected
by road or engine heat, wind directions and
other driving conditions. The display may differ
from the actual outside temperature or the
temperature displayed on various signs or bill-
boards.
If the battery was disconnected, when it is
reconnected and the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, 8F or 8C will flash for one
minute to check the outside temperature sensor.
When the outside temperature sensor is opera-
tional, the outside temperature will be displayed.
If the outside temperature sensor is not opera-
tional, the outside temperature will not be
displayed.

JVI0327X

Instruments and controls 2-21

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


INDICATORS FOR OPERATION
S35-D-110201-D16CF82D-E6FD-4988-A994-F13981E642DB
The design of the warnings and alerts may differ
depending on the model.
1. Door S35-D-110201-FF441106-E140-48E3-B3BE-A4AAF695F633
open warning
This warning appears if any of the doors are
open or not closed securely. The vehicle icon
indicates which door is open on the display.
2. Lift gate open warning
GUID-B53B583A-3509-4BC9-8451-D580CC438755
This warning appears if the lift gate is open or
not closed securely. When the switch is
pushed, the lift gate open warning turns off.
3. Loose fuelGUID-8CF60297-DEF1-4C4B-A041-52FA79FC575D
cap warning
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is
not tightened correctly after the vehicle has
been refueled. (See “Fuel-filler cap” in the “3.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.)
4. Check tire pressure warning (if so
equipped) GUID-16165B2A-7DD3-4D9B-95E2-5039AD576DFD
This warning appears when the low tire pressure
warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire
pressure is detected. If this warning appears,
stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure shown
on the Tire and Loading Information label. To
turn off the check tire pressure warning, push
the switch for about 1 second. (See “Low
2-22 Instruments and controls
[ Edit: 2011/ 8/ 2 Model: S35-D ]
tire pressure warning light” earlier in this section
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
in the “5. Starting and driving” section.)
5. Low washer fluid warning (if so
equipped) GUID-90E15ADB-F0B0-4D80-8356-99653A9D81D1
This light illuminates when the washer fluid is at
a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. (See
“Window washer fluid” in the “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section.)
When the switch is pushed, the low washer
fluid warning turns off (if so equipped).
6. SHIFT “P”GUID-58C85533-5532-497D-A5F9-10BA63C390BB
warning (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the ignition switch is
turned to stop the engine with the selector lever
in any position except the P (Park) position.
If this warning appears, move the selector lever
to the P (Park) position or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
An inside warning chime will also sound. (See
“Intelligent Key system” in the “3. Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section.)
Black plate (92,1)
7. Parking brake release warning
GUID-FD53AB45-3AC7-4816-8C9B-02CE195475FC
This warning appears when the vehicle speed is
above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and the parking brake is
applied.
8. Intelligent Key detection warning (if so
equipped) GUID-90F98116-CBBF-42F7-9888-C0FC896EBDE2
This warning appears in either of the following
conditions.
No key inside GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
the vehicle:
The warning appears when the door is closed
with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle
and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is
inside the vehicle.
Unregistered Intelligent Key:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The warning appears when the ignition switch is
turned from the LOCK position and the Intelli-
gent Key cannot be recognized by the system.
You cannot start the engine with an unregistered
key. Use the registered Intelligent Key.
See “Intelligent Key system” in the “3. Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section for
more details.

9. Intelligent key battery discharge in-
dicator (if so GUID-CAFFE8FC-6DF5-4295-88C7-5F990638E820
equipped)
This indicator appears when the Intelligent key
battery is running out of power.
If this indicator appears, replace the battery with
a new one. (See “Battery replacement” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
10. Intelligent Key system fault warning
(if so equipped)
GUID-A07A76FA-0B98-4D91-A83E-2BA58990F079
CAUTION
If the Intelligent Key system fault warn-
ing comes on, it may indicate a system
malfunction. Contact a NISSAN dealer
for repair.
For more information, see “Intelligent Key
system” in the “3. Pre-driving checks and
adjustments” section.
11. Setting menu operation warning
GUID-A8A654A3-3FED-4E7E-8D4D-5F2ADBF361F9
The warning appears when you try to operate
the setting menu while driving. The setting menu
can only be entered when the vehicle is
stationary.
[ Edit: 2011/ 8/ 2 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (93,1)
12. Low outside temperature warning
GUID-FAB680DE-B0C2-402C-8E2B-4AFE508F4736
The cruise control set indicator (SET) is
This warning appears if the outside temperature displayed while the vehicle speed is controlled
drops below 378F (38C) with the ignition switch by the cruise control system. If the SET indicator
in the ON position. The outside temperature blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate
display flashes at the same time. These warning that the cruise control system is not functioning
properly. Have the system checked by a
features can be turned off. (See “Trip computer”
later in this section.) NISSAN dealer.
For more details, see “Cruise control” in the “5.
13. Low fuel GUID-865D9FDA-A98A-4836-829E-6E8F45765521
warning Starting and driving” section.
This warning appears when the fuel level in the
tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
reaches the empty (0) position.
There is a small reserve of fuel remaining
in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches
the empty (0) position.
14. Driver alert
GUID-DBAABE18-07F0-45C6-8584-E84930538F2C
This warning appears when the previously set
time for a break is reached. You can set the time
for up to 6 hours in the setting menu. (See “Trip
computer” later in this section.)
15. Cruise control indicator
GUID-FCFF80D9-8140-4384-9DF4-A8C02BDBC40D
The cruise main switch indicator (CRUISE) is
displayed when the cruise control main switch is
pushed. When the main switch is pushed again,
the CRUISE indicator disappears. When the
CRUISE indicator is displayed, the cruise
control system is operational.
Instruments and controls 2-23
 Black plate (94,1)

INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE

S35-D-110201-800F6ACB-DB84-4028-98D1-DAACB7798F91 tires will last that long. Use the tire
1. Service due indicator replacement indicator as a guide only
S35-D-110201-CFD2A761-A4C9-4CF4-8BE3-496BCDE236AC
and always perform regular tire checks.
This indicator appears when the customer set
Failure to perform regular tire checks,
distance comes for service due, for example, for
including tire pressure checks could
engine oil and oil filter. You can set or reset the
result in tire failure. Serious vehicle
distance for service due. (See “Trip computer”
damage could occur and may lead to a
later in this section.) For scheduled maintenance
collision, which could result in serious
items and intervals, see your NISSAN Service
personal injury or death.
and Maintenance Guide.
2. Tire replacement indicator
S35-D-110201-CE0B87AB-634A-4111-8740-7919E54C2B20 3. “OTHER” indicator
S35-D-110201-ED731025-DFE8-493E-8EAF-5AFA33B448D9
This indicator appears when the customer set This indicator appears when the customer set
distance comes for replacing tires. You can set distance comes for checking or replacing
or reset the distance for replacing tires. (See maintenance items other than the engine oil, oil
“Trip computer” later in this section.) filter and tires. Other maintenance items can
include such things as air filter or tire rotation.
WARNING You can set or reset the distance for checking or
replacing the items. (See “Trip computer” later in
The tire replacement indicator is not a this section.) For scheduled maintenance items
substitute for regular tire checks, in- and intervals, see your NISSAN Service and
cluding tire pressure checks. See Maintenance Guide.
“Changing wheels and tires” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
tion. Many factors including tire infla-
tion, alignment, driving habits and road
conditions affect tire wear and when
SIC4538
tires should be replaced. Setting the
tire replacement indicator for a certain
driving distance does not mean your
2-24 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (95,1)

“Current fuel consumption” and “Settings”.

. When the switch *A is pushed and
held for more than 3 seconds, all the items
on the display can be reset except for
“Current fuel consumption”, “Settings”,
“Range” and “TRIP A”.

SIC4551

TRIP COMPUTER
S35-D-110201-032DC1AF-C190-4089-A120-1FC1894A1A57
To operate the trip computer, use the *
A
switch.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
modes of the trip computer can be selected by
pushing the switch *A briefly.

Each time the switch *A is pushed, the

display will change as follows:
Fuel Economy ? Average speed ? Driving
distance ? Elapsed time ? Range (distance to
empty) (dte) ? Settings
. When the switch *
A is pushed and
held for less than 3 seconds, the selected
item can be reset except for “Range”,

Instruments and controls 2-25

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


Example*
*: The display unit can be converted or varies
depending on the vehicle.
2-26 Instruments and controls
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SIC4541
1. Fuel Economy (MPG, l/100 km)
GUID-04DE4B00-08C2-4E32-8EE7-064FAA0F9373
The Fuel Economy mode shows the current and
average fuel consumption.
Current fuel consumption:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The current fuel consumption mode shows the
current fuel consumption by a moving bar graph.
Black plate (96,1)
Average fuel consumption:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The average fuel consumption mode shows the
average fuel consumption by the value above the
bar graph, the position of the diamond icon and
the value of ˘ since the last reset. Resetting the
average fuel consumption is done by pushing
and holding the switch * A for less than 3
seconds.
The display is updated every 30 seconds. At
about the first 0.3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the
display shows “----”.
2. Average Speed (MPH or km/h)
GUID-7DE3377E-B539-46C3-AD74-DFAA59FD557E
The Average Speed mode shows the average
vehicle speed since the last reset. Resetting is
done by pushing and holding the switch * B
for less than 3 seconds.
The display is updated every 30 seconds. For
the first 30 seconds after a reset, the display
shows “----”.
3. Driving Distance (miles or km)
GUID-F6FC5CCF-6C6F-4693-B932-ADF674431AA4
The Driving Distance mode shows the distance
driven since the last reset. The driving distance
can be reset by pushing and holding the
switch * A for less than 3 seconds.
 Black plate (97,1)

4. Elapsed Time
S35-D-110201-39A88963-3DC3-4B35-9DF4-19A7D86695A0
On or Off.
The Elapsed Time mode shows the time since . [24/12 Hr]
the last reset. The displayed time can be reset Select this submenu to set the 12h/24h time
by pushing and holding the switch *A for display mode.
less than 3 seconds. To return to the top page of the setting mode,
select “BACK”.
5. Range (distance to empty) (dte —
miles or km) GUID-BF637651-F7B6-4978-AC45-413FCB319447 The time display may be different from the one
on the audio display.
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be Units: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly The units can be set for the following items on
being calculated based on the amount of fuel in this menu.
the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption. . Temperature
SIC4542
The display is updated every 30 seconds. . Distance/Fuel
The dte mode includes a low range warning 6. Settings To return to the top page of the setting mode,
S35-D-110201-46255287-1DE0-4853-A809-29D55EC182BE
feature. If the fuel level is low, the warning is Setting cannot be made while driving. select “BACK”.
displayed on the screen.
When the fuel level drops even lower, the dte
The switch *
A is used to select and set Maintenance: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
the item. The maintenance intervals of the following items
display will change to “----”.
Turn the *
A switch to select or adjust and can be set or reset for the reminders.
. If the amount of fuel added is small, the push to set. . SERVICE
display just before the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position may continue to Clock: Select this submenu to set or reset the
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
distance for service due.
be displayed. Clock adjustment can be set on this menu.
. TIRE
. When driving uphill or rounding curves, the . Set Clock
fuel in the tank shifts, which may momenta- Select this submenu to set or reset the
Adjust the time (hour and minute) of the
rily change the display. distance for replacing tires.
clock.
. OTHER
. [On] or [Off]
Select this submenu and set or reset the
Select this submenu to set the clock display
distance for items other than service or tires.
Instruments and controls 2-27

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (98,1)

SECURITY SYSTEMS
S35-D-110201-36B2AB1C-293A-4BB8-A8C4-91B4FF80CB04

To return to the top page of the setting mode, Factory: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

select “BACK”.
Alarms:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Alarms menu can be set to notify the following
items.
. Driver alert
Select this submenu to set the driver alert
period.
. Outside temp
Select this submenu to turn ON or OFF the
low outside temperature warning features.
For a description of the low outside tem-
perature warning features when Outside
Temp is set to ON, see “Outside air
temperature” earlier in this section.
With Outside Temp set to OFF,
— The outside temperature display remains
on steady at all outside temperatures and
does not flash.
— The low outside temperature warning
indicator does not appear.
To return to the top page of the setting mode,
select “BACK”.
Language: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Select the submenu to set the desired language
of the display.
Select the submenu to reset the factory settings
of the display.
NOTE:
When resetting Factory, all previous set-
tings made are changed to default.
To return to the top page of the setting mode,
select “BACK”.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-
MISSION (CVT) POSITION INDICATOR
S35-D-110201-9B42C689-272C-4B6A-B7AF-C4F2DC0E17F6
The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator indicates the selector lever SIC2133
position when the ignition switch is in the ON
position. Your vehicle has two types of security systems,
as follows:
. Vehicle security system
. NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
The security condition will be shown by the
security indicator light.

2-28 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 8/ 2 Model: S35-D ]


VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
GUID-8079DDC3-AA50-4E4A-B8C9-47DC84E10A79
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors,
or lift gate when the system is armed. It is not,
however, a motion detection type system that
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior
or exterior vehicle components in all situations.
Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle,
and always lock it when unattended. Be aware
of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit
areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection,
such as component locks, identification markers,
and tracking systems, are available at auto
supply stores and specialty shops. Your
NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment.
Check with your insurance company to see if
you may be eligible for discounts for various
theft protection features.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SIC2045
How to arm GUID-7CAA9A5F-E69A-457E-AC80-696BDC017C66
the vehicle security system
1. Close all windows.
The system can be armed even if the
windows are open.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the key if it is inserted.
3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The doors
can be locked with:
. the lock button on the keyfob or
Intelligent Key (if so equipped)
. any request switch (Intelligent Key
equipped model)
Black plate (99,1)
. the power door lock switch
. the key — master or mechanical (Intelli-
gent Key equipped model)
4. Confirm that the security indicator light
illuminates. The security indicator light stays
on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle
security system is now pre-armed. After
about 30 seconds the vehicle security
system automatically shifts into the armed
phase. The security light begins to flash
once every approximately 3 seconds. If,
during this 30-second pre-arm time period,
the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is
turned to the ACC or ON position, the
system will not arm.
Even when the driver and/or passengers
are in the vehicle, the system will activate
with all doors locked with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position. When turning
the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position, the system will be released.
Vehicle security system activation
GUID-E0994200-F9B0-476C-AF5D-4AFA2F5FF981
The vehicle security system will give the follow-
ing alarm:
. The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
. The alarm automatically turns off after
approximately 50 seconds. However, the
alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered
Instruments and controls 2-29

with again.
The alarm is activated by:
. Unlocking the door without using the keyfob,
the Intelligent Key (if so equipped) the
request switch (if so equipped) or the key.
(Even if the door is opened by releasing the
door inside lock knob, the alarm will
activate.)
How to stop GUID-22EF1D00-401F-445E-9D49-7B8AEBA716D0
an activated alarm
The alarm will stop by unlocking a door by
pushing the unlock button on the keyfob or
Intelligent Key, pushing the request switch or
using the key. The alarm will not stop if the
ignition switch is turned to the ACC or ON
position.
If the system does not operate as de-
scribed above, have it checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
2-30 Instruments and controls
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (100,1)
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS- FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Cana-
TEM da. Operation is subject to the following
GUID-52296442-4547-4FA1-9662-0A05BE6E48F5
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not two conditions;
allow the engine to start without the use of the (1) This device may not cause harmful
registered key. interference, and (2) this device must
If the engine fails to start using the registered accept any interference received, including
key, it may be due to interference caused by interference that may cause undesired
another registered key, an automated toll road operation of the device.
device or automated payment device on the key CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
ring. Restart the engine using the following PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY
procedures: RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds. ATE THE EQUIPMENT.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK
position and wait approximately 10 seconds.
3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If this procedure allows the engine to start,
NISSAN recommends placing the regis-
tered key on a separate key ring to avoid
interference from other devices.
Statement related to section 15 of FCC
rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer
System (CONT ASSY-BCM. ANT ASSY-
IMMOBILISER)
This device complies with part 15 of the
 Black plate (101,1)

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER

SWITCH
S35-D-110201-26603314-0067-49C3-8DC3-F795C77DB10D

service as soon as possible. Please bring

all registered keys that you have when WARNING
visiting a NISSAN dealer for service.
In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the windshield
and obscure your vision which may lead
to an accident. Warm windshield with
the defroster before you wash the
windshield.

CAUTION
SIC2045
. Do not operate the washer continu-
Security indicator light
GUID-B6969E9E-2AE7-4B89-9C71-367597E1FAA0
ously for more than 30 seconds.
The security indicator light is located on the . Do not operate the washer if the
meter panel. It indicates the status of the reservoir tank is empty.
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. . Do not fill the window washer
The light blinks after the ignition switch was in reservoir tank with washer fluid
the LOCK position. This function indicates the concentrates at full strength. Some
security systems equipped on the vehicle are methyl alcohol based washer fluid
operational. concentrates may permanently stain
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is the grille if spilled while filling the
malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the window washer reservoir tank.
ignition switch is in the ON position. . Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
If the light still remains on and/or the with water to the manufacturer’s
engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer recommended levels before pouring
for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System the fluid into the window washer

Instruments and controls 2-31

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (102,1)

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH
S35-D-110201-6287FDDC-DDC0-4614-BC2D-29AE6205258F

reservoir tank. Do not use the

window washer reservoir tank to WARNING
mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water. In freezing temperatures the washer
solution may freeze on the rear window
If the windshield wiper operation is inter- glass and obscure your vision. Warm
rupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop the rear window with the defroster
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, before you wash the rear window.
turn the wiper switch to the OFF position
and remove the snow or ice that is on and
around the wiper arms. In approximately 1
minute, turn the switch on again to operate
CAUTION
the wiper.
SIC2821 . Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
The windshield wiper and washer operates
. Do not operate the washer if the
when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
reservoir tank is empty.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
. Do not fill the window washer
following speed:
reservoir tank with washer fluid
*1 Intermittent — intermittent operation can be
concentrates at full strength. Some
adjusted by turning the knob toward *
A (Slower)
or *B (Faster). methyl alcohol based washer fluid
concentrates may permanently stain
*2 Low — continuous low speed operation
the grille if spilled while filling the
*3 High — continuous high speed operation
window washer reservoir tank.
Push the lever up * 4 to have one sweep
operation of the wiper. . Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates
with water to the manufacturer’s
Pull the lever toward you * 5 to operate the recommended levels before pouring
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several the fluid into the window washer
times. reservoir tank. Do not use the

2-32 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (103,1)

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH
GUID-0D0E8587-930B-43B3-9368-B3B0F30F30EF

window washer reservoir tank to

mix the washer fluid concentrate
and water.

If the rear window wiper operation is

interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may
stop moving to protect its motor. If this
occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF
position and remove the snow or ice that is
on and around the wiper arms. In approxi-
mately 1 minute, turn the switch on again
to operate the wiper.
SIC3480 SIC3481

The rear window wiper and washer operate To defog/defrost the rear window glass and
when the ignition switch is in the ON position. outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine
Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position and push the switch on. The indicator light * 1

to operate the wiper. will illuminate. Push the switch again to turn the
defroster off.
*
1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation (not
adjustable) It will automatically turn off in approximately 15
*2 Low (ON) — continuous low speed operation minutes.
Push the switch forward * 3 to operate the
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several
times.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window defroster.

Instruments and controls 2-33

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
S35-D-110201-8104C934-B454-4845-BB26-5BCBF1F256AD
XENONS35-D-110201-51586A62-6562-41E5-82FB-43C896A0EF46
HEADLIGHTS (if so equipped)
WARNING
HIGH VOLTAGE
. When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent
an electric shock, never attempt to
modify or disassemble. Always have
your xenon headlights replaced at a
NISSAN dealer.
. Xenon headlights provide consider-
ably more light than conventional
headlights. If they are not correctly
aimed, they might temporarily blind
an oncoming driver or the driver
ahead of you and cause a serious
accident. If headlights are not aimed
correctly, immediately take your ve-
hicle to a NISSAN dealer and have
the headlights adjusted correctly.
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on,
its brightness or color varies slightly. However,
the color and brightness will soon stabilize.
. The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off opera-
tion. It is generally desirable not to turn
2-34 Instruments and controls
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (104,1)
off the headlights for short intervals
(for example, when the vehicle stops at
a traffic signal).
. If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drasti-
cally decrease, the light will start
blinking, or the color of the light will
become reddish. If one or more of the
above signs appear, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
SIC2412A
Autolight system (if so equipped)
GUID-FA702B69-EFA2-45DC-8232-8507EB8E9B3F
The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically.
To set the autolight system:
1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch
to the OFF, or position.
The autolight system can turn on the headlights
automatically when it is dark and turn off the
 Black plate (105,1)

headlights when it is light.

If the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position and one of the doors is opened and this
condition is continued, the headlights remain on
for 5 minutes.
Automatic headlights off delay:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
You can keep the headlights on for up to 180
seconds after you turn the ignition switch to OFF
and open any door then close all the doors.

SAA1755 SIC4565
Type A
Be sure not to put anything on top of the
photo sensor * 1 located on the top of the
instrument panel. The photo sensor con-
trols the autolight; if it is covered, the
photo sensor reacts as if it is dark and the
headlights will illuminate.

SIC4566
Type B

Instruments and controls 2-35

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (106,1)

HEADLIGHT SWITCH
S35-D-110201-D3180DCA-291B-41E0-9575-59BFC897CD0C
Battery saverGUID-C87E6811-F73E-43C4-B263-0CDDFD967519
system
Lighting . When the headlight switch is in the or
GUID-883639D7-CE21-42AD-BB55-8D5AA7204896
position while the ignition switch is in
*1 Turn the switch to the position:
the ON position, the lights will automatically
The front park, side marker, tail, license plate and
instrument lights will come on. turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch
*2 Turn the switch to the position: has been turned to the OFF position.
Headlights will come on and all the other lights . When the headlight switch remains in the
remain on. or position after the lights auto-
matically turn off, the lights will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.

SIC3484 CAUTION
Headlight beam select
GUID-C74B6A43-085A-4AE9-8DC9-9FFF2FAB7C5C . When you turn on the headlight
*
1 To select the low beam, put the lever in the neutral switch again after the lights auto-
position as shown. matically turn off, the lights will not
*
2 To select the high beam, push the lever forward turn off automatically. Be sure to
while the switch is in the position. Pull it back turn the light switch to the OFF
to select the low beam.
position when you leave the vehicle
*3 Pulling the lever toward you will flash the headlight
for extended periods of time, other-
high beam even when the headlight switch is in
the OFF position. wise the battery will be discharged.
. Never leave the light switch on
when the engine is not running for
extended periods of time even if the
headlights turn off automatically.

2-36 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


SIC2275
Headlight aiming control (if so equipped)
S35-D-110201-1FB40E63-F262-4574-B0B3-682A946243B6
Depending on the number of occupants in the
vehicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight
axis may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is
traveling on a hilly road, the headlights may
directly hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle
ahead or the windshield of the oncoming
vehicle. The light axis can be lowered with the
operation of the switch.
The larger the number designated on the switch,
the lower the axis.
When traveling with no heavy load or on a flat
road, select position 0.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (107,1)
switch is turned to the OFF position.
WARNING
Xenon headlights are extremely bright
WARNING
compared to conventional headlights. If
When the daytime running light system
the xenon headlights hit the rearview
is active, tail lights on your vehicle are
mirror of the vehicle ahead or the
not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on
windshield of oncoming vehicle, the
your headlights. Failure to do so could
driver of these vehicles may have
cause an accident injuring yourself and
difficulty driving because of the bright-
others.
ness. Use the headlight aiming control
switch to lower the light axis. See
“Xenon headlights” earlier in this sec-
tion for additional information.
Daytime running light system (Canada
only) GUID-10297789-CB0E-4316-8D06-E96C4D5A3D58
The daytime running lights automatically illumi-
nate when the engine is started with the parking
brake released. The daytime running lights
operate with the headlight switch in the OFF
position or in the position. Turn the head-
light switch to the position for full illumina-
tion when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine
is started, the daytime running lights do not
illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate
once the parking brake is released. The daytime
running lights will remain on until the ignition
Instruments and controls 2-37
 Black plate (108,1)

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH
S35-D-110201-58538178-DA8D-4166-BF6A-386530D47FBC

SIC3488 SIC3020 SIC2574

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

S35-D-110201-D70B7BB9-0165-4793-8DD2-5117530A4F24
*
1 Turn signal
S35-D-110201-78EF5631-94EC-4BFA-B057-20F6E43845D5
Move the lever up or down to signal the turning
direction. When the turn is completed, the turn
signals cancel automatically.
*
2 Lane change signal
S35-D-110201-706FD6E2-4F8D-4CE9-BE9D-F50571D2B390
To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where lights begin flashing.
2-38 Instruments and controls
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
S35-D-110201-3A145094-902C-4624-8C4C-7BCAA5A6360C
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights will flash.
switch to the position, then turn the switch
to the position. To turn them off, turn the
switch to the OFF position. WARNING
The headlights must be on for the fog lights to
operate. . If stopping for an emergency, be
When the headlight high-beam is selected, the sure to move the vehicle well off the
fog lights turn off. road.
. Do not use the hazard warning
flashers while moving on the high-
way unless unusual circumstances
force you to drive so slowly that
your vehicle might become a hazard
to other traffic.

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


HORN
S35-D-110201-6910BDF6-7620-4A3A-A2E3-EA42F9846A63
. Turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning flasher lights are
on.
The flasher can be actuated with the ignition
switch in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
SIC3404
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system.
Tampering with the supplemental front
air bag system may result in serious
personal injury.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (109,1)
HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
S35-D-110201-0C36F960-D520-4B91-8EDB-7DE5A9B2422D
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use
the seat heater if you or the occupants
cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-
tures or have an inability to feel pain in
those body parts in contact with the
seat. Use of the seat heater by such
people could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
. The battery could run down if the
seat heater is operated while the
engine is not running.
. Do not use the seat heater for
extended periods or when no one
is using the seat.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates heat, such as a
blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc.
Otherwise, the seat may become
overheated.
. Do not place anything hard or heavy
on the seat or pierce it with a pin or
similar object. This may result in
Instruments and controls 2-39
 Black plate (110,1)

damage to the heater. The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.
. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat The indicator light will remain on as long as
should be removed immediately the switch is on.
with a dry cloth.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or
. When cleaning the seat, never use before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn
gasoline, thinner, or any similar off the switch.
materials.
. If any abnormalities are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn
the switch off and have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SIC3355

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

The switches located on the center console can
be operated independently of each other.
1. Start the engine.
2. Select heat range.
*
1 For high heat, push the HI (High) side of
the switch.
*
2 For low heat, push the LO (Low) side of
the switch.
The indicator light in the switch * 3 will
illuminate when low or high is selected.
3. To turn off the heater, return the switch to
the level position. Make sure the indicator
light goes off.
2-40 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (111,1)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

POWER OUTLET
OFF SWITCH
S35-D-110201-A6E4B20D-7614-4546-90DD-DBDB4900E03B S35-D-110201-C63091BC-C543-488A-8F3D-AFA12FC37391

The power outlet is located in the instrument

panel and the center console (if so equipped).

CAUTION
. The outlet and plug may be hot
during or immediately after use.
. Do not use with accessories that
exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power
draw. Do not use double adapters or
more than one electrical accessory.
. Use power outlet with the engine
SSD1153 SIC3492 running to avoid discharging the
Instrument panel vehicle battery.
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most . Avoid using power outlet when the
driving conditions. air conditioner, headlights or rear
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC window defroster is on.
system reduces the engine output to reduce . This power outlet is not designed
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced for use with a cigarette lighter unit.
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. . Push the plug in as far as it will go.
If maximum engine power is needed to free a If good contact is not made, the plug
stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off. may overheat or the internal tem-
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF perature fuse may open.
switch. The indicator will illuminate. . Before inserting or disconnecting a
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the plug, be sure the electrical acces-
engine to turn on the system. (See “Vehicle sory being used is turned OFF.
Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “5. SIC3493
Starting and driving” section.) Center console (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-41

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (112,1)

STORAGES
S35-D-110201-CF7976D3-F285-4050-AFD1-1371CF792F0B

. When not in use, be sure to close CUP HOLDERS

S35-D-110201-FD1D8479-5AEA-4CA7-8486-247F76618FF5

the cap. Do not allow water to

contact the outlet. CAUTION
. Avoid abrupt starting and braking
when the cup holder is being used
to prevent spilling the drink. If the
liquid is hot, it can scald you or your
passenger.
. Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
SIC3494
Front
The flap *A will be folded down when inserting
a large container.
To remove the inner tray for cleaning, pull it up as
illustrated *
1 .

2-42 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (113,1)

. Do not leave glasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in
direct sunlight. The heat may da-
mage the glasses.

SIC3495 SIC3496
Rear
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the cup holder, pull the lid. S35-D-110201-7D49A2AA-DD28-4615-B72E-A1CBFE395B60

WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed
while driving to prevent an accident.

To open the sunglasses holder, push *

1 .

CAUTION
. Do not use for anything other than
glasses.

Instruments and controls 2-43

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (114,1)

GLOVE S35-D-110201-F9260F73-5260-4688-8D88-814B9E5BA4ED
BOX

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.

To open the glove box, pull the handle.

To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.
The glove box light illuminates when the head-
light switch is turned on.
SIC3497 SIC3499
*
A Card holder
*
B Back side pocket of lid CONSOLE BOX
S35-D-110201-E018BA87-9079-45DE-909F-A77EB11D068E

*
C Removable partition (if so equipped) To open the console boxes, push up the knob
To remove the partition, pull it out. *A and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until latched.

To remove the inner box (if so equipped) for
cleaning or storing a large object, pull it up as
illustrated *
B .

The inside of the console box lid is designed to

be used as a card holder * C and pen holders
*D .

SIC3498

2-44 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (115,1)

LUGGAGE FLOOR BOX (if so

equipped)
S35-D-110201-B2DC4A4F-CB14-4C93-B757-CA7BE5833E8C
Type A: To open the luggage floor box, push
*A . To close, push the lid until the lock latches.

The net partitions can be folded to make a larger

storage space.

CAUTION
To avoid damage, do not load more
than 22 lbs (10 kg) of cargo into the
luggage floor box.
SIC4530 SIC4267
Type A
Type B: To open the luggage floor box, pull the LUGGAGE SIDE BOX
S35-D-110201-65867C13-C89A-46EC-8E2A-F8212C01D932
handle * B on the lid. To close, push the lid until
To open the luggage side box, pull up the strap.
the lock latches.
The luggage floor box needs to be removed
when you need a spare tire. (See “Flat tire” in the
“6. In case of emergency” section.)

SIC3514
Type B

Instruments and controls 2-45

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (116,1)

hooks and hold until it is retracted. cover is not removed, it may da-
To remove the cargo cover, stow the cover and mage the top tether strap during a
pull the holder to the opposite side *
2 . collision. Your child could be ser-
iously injured or killed in a collision
if the child restraint top tether strap
WARNING is damaged.
. Never put anything on the cargo . Do not allow cargo to contact the
cover, no matter how small. Any top tether strap when it is attached
object on it could cause an injury to the top tether anchor. Properly
in an accident or sudden stop. secure the cargo so it does not
contact the top tether strap. Cargo
. Close the cargo cover when folding that is not properly secured or that
the rear seat. contacts the top tether strap may
. Do not leave the cargo cover in the damage the top tether strap during
vehicle with it disengaged from the a collision. Your child could be
holder. seriously injured or killed in a colli-
. Properly secure all cargo with ropes sion if the child restraint top tether
or straps to help prevent it from strap is damaged.
sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unse-
SIC3503
cured cargo could cause personal
CARGO COVER (if so equipped) injury.
S35-D-110201-4D798BFB-9ED7-4FB8-9F2C-7D3C067EF3DC
The cargo cover keeps the contents in the cargo . If the cargo cover contacts the top
area hidden from the outside. tether strap when it is attached to
To use the cargo cover, pull it out and hang both the top tether anchor, remove the
sides on the hooks *1 .
cargo cover from the vehicle or
secure it on the cargo floor below
To stow the cargo cover, remove it from the its attachment location. If the cargo
2-46 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (117,1)

. Unsecured luggage can become

dangerous in an accident or sudden
stop.

CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than
22 lb (10 kg) *
A or 7 lb (3 kg) *
B to a
single hook.

SIC4550

COAT HOOKS (if so equipped)

S35-D-110201-DF957E51-D7CE-457F-B5FE-B60CF761743A
The coat hooks are equipped above the rear
window.

CAUTION
SIC3504 Do not apply a total load of more than 2
LUGGAGE HOOKS (if so equipped) lb (1 kg) to a single hook.
S35-D-110201-2D988198-3E52-49E3-8EEB-85813B616CF7

WARNING
. Always make sure that the luggage
is properly secured. Use the suitable
ropes and hooks.
Instruments and controls 2-47

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


SIC3506
UTILITY S35-D-110201-0F642A2D-5628-4E33-83E0-2E6B14382F28
HOOK
To use the utility hook on the seatback, pull it.
CAUTION
. Do not apply a total load of more
than 6 lb (3 kg) to the hook.
. Do not use the utility hook to pull
the seatback to the upright and
locked position. Doing so will cause
the utility hook to break.
2-48 Instruments and controls
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SIC3549
ROOF RACKGUID-963DC233-F1BF-4195-80FA-612BBCFAEFB2
(if so equipped)
Secure the crossbars to the roof rail before
loading. The crossbars are available from a
NISSAN dealer.
Always distribute the luggage evenly on the roof
rack. Do not load more than 99 lb (45 kg). Be
careful that your vehicle does not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and
rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (lo-
cated on the driver’s door pillar). For more
information regarding GVWR and GAWR, see
“Vehicle loading information” in the “9. Technical
and consumer information” section.
Black plate (118,1)
WARNING
. Drive extra carefully when the vehi-
cle is loaded at or near the cargo
carrying capacity, especially if the
significant portion of that load is
carried on the roof rack.
. Heavy loading of the roof rack has
the potential to affect the vehicle
stability and handling during sud-
den or unusual handling maneuvers.
. Roof rack load should be evenly
distributed.
. Do not exceed maximum roof rack
load weight capacity.
. Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from
sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop
or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
CAUTION
Use care when placing or removing
items from the roof rack. If you cannot
comfortably lift the items onto the roof
 Black plate (119,1)

WINDOWS
S35-D-110201-EF5A4CAB-3CE8-402A-B85B-F12E85049006

rack from the ground, use a ladder or POWERS35-D-110201-28870A1D-95F8-487F-8BEF-004065E33A6E

WINDOWS
stool.
WARNING
. Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle
while it is in motion and before
closing the windows. Use the win-
dow lock switch to prevent unex-
pected use of the power windows.
. Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con- SIC3507
trols and become trapped in the
1. Window lock button
window. Unattended children could
2. Driver side window
become involved in serious acci-
3. Rear left passenger side window
dents.
4. Front passenger side window
5. Rear right passenger side window
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is in the ON position, or for about 45 Main power window switch (driver’s
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the side) GUID-B6E7617E-E40E-40C3-9E55-437ACDA41B5A
OFF position. If the driver’s or front passenger’s
To open or close the window, push down * A or
door is opened during this period of about 45
pull up * B the switch and hold it. The main
seconds, power to the windows is canceled.
switch (driver side switches) will open or close
all the windows.

Instruments and controls 2-49

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


Locking passengers’ windows
GUID-21155F19-5215-4B78-A2CE-1C399D86BA17
When the lock button * C is pushed in, only the
driver side window can be opened or closed.
Push it in again to cancel.
SIC3508
Passenger side power window switch
GUID-6392E6CE-0551-411A-994B-8AC9D946BB5E
The passenger side switch will open or close
only the corresponding window. To open or
close the window, push down or pull up the
switch and hold it.
2-50 Instruments and controls
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (120,1)
SIC3509
Automatic operation (if so equipped)
GUID-E7474ECC-09DE-4A54-A358-7896B84E25A1
The automatic operation is available for the
switch that has an mark on its surface.
Type A: To fully open or close the window, push
down or pull up the switch to the second detent
and release it; the switch need not be held. The
window will automatically open or close all the
way. To stop the window, just push or lift the
switch in the opposite direction.
Type B: To fully open the window, push down
the switch to the second detent and release it;
the switch need not be held. The window will
automatically open all the way. To stop the
window, just lift the switch. To fully close the

window, push and hold the switch.
A light push or pull on the switch will cause the
window to open or close until the switch is
released.
Auto-reverseGUID-CD58E688-0E5F-4849-A2F9-9DCE763F2A71
function (if so equipped)
WARNING
There are some small distances imme-
diately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., in-
side the vehicle before closing the
window.
If the control unit detects something caught in
the window as it is closing, the window will be
immediately lowered.
The auto reverse function can be activated when
the window is closed by automatic operation
when the ignition switch is in the ON position or
for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned
to the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window
occurs.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
If the windows do not close automatically
GUID-4366A858-91A3-4739-91C0-DACFB774B6DE
If the power window automatic function (closing
only) does not operate properly, perform the
following procedure to initialize the power
window system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Close the door.
3. Open the window completely by operating
the power window switch.
4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to
close the window, and then hold the switch
more than 3 seconds after the window is
closed completely.
5. Release the power window switch. Operate
the window by the automatic function to
confirm the initialization is complete.
If the power window automatic function does
not operate properly after performing the pro-
cedure above, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Black plate (121,1)
GUID-74BA112D-48AA-4F68-AF07-7C0714B7A644
WARNING
. In an accident you could be thrown
from the vehicle through an open
moonroof. Always use seat belts
and child restraints.
. Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out
of the moonroof opening while the
vehicle is in motion or while the
moonroof is closing.
CAUTION
. Remove water drops, snow, ice or
sand from the moonroof before
opening.
. Do not place any heavy object on
the moonroof or surrounding area.
Instruments and controls 2-51
 Black plate (122,1)

AUTOMATICGUID-795A67FE-3AA6-4D5F-A971-C344A69CEBB7
MOONROOF Auto reverse function
S35-D-110201-AF18E966-5C54-4980-BC51-E872555FB4DF
The moonroof only operates when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. WARNING
The automatic moonroof is operational for about
45 seconds, even if the ignition switch is turned There are some small distances imme-
to the OFF position. If the driver’s door or the diately before the closed position which
passenger’s door is opened during this period of cannot be detected. Make sure that all
about 45 seconds, power to the moonroof is passengers have their hands, etc., in-
canceled. side the vehicle before closing the
moonroof.
Sunshade
S35-D-110201-6A117BAD-3314-4417-9693-3DEEE0575E80
The sunshade will open automatically when the
If the control unit detects something caught in
moonroof is opened. However, it must be closed
SIC3510 the moonroof when it is closing, the moonroof
manually.
will be immediately opened.
Sliding the moonroof
GUID-E58CB540-F94C-4392-847D-DF07AA0A152B The auto reverse function can be activated when
To fully open or close the moonroof, push the the moonroof is closed by automatic operation
switch toward *1 or *2 and release when the ignition switch is in the ON position or
it; it need not be held. The roof will automatically for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is
open or close all the way. To stop the roof, push turned to the OFF position.
the switch in any direction while it is opening or If the moonroof cannot be closed automatically
closing. when the auto reverse function activates due to
Tilting the moonroof a malfunction, push and hold the switch toward
GUID-F8514024-28D3-4F20-A4B9-9C5D9274A6BB
To tilt up, first close the moonroof by pushing the
*2 .

switch toward *2 . Push the switch toward Depending on the environment or driving
*2 again and release it; it need not be conditions, the auto reverse function may
held. To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch be activated if an impact or load similar to
toward * 1 . something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.

2-52 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (123,1)

INTERIOR LIGHTS
S35-D-110201-6554559D-EE81-4A45-B1ED-9C063E192D41

If the moonroof does not operate

GUID-750E5F7D-B6E5-4E9E-9714-1DE514A949D8
If the moonroof does not operate properly, CAUTION
perform the following procedure to initialize the
moonroof operation system. Do not use for extended periods of time
1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by with the engine stopped. This could
repeatedly pushing the switch toward result in a discharged battery.
* 2 .

2. Push and hold the switch toward *

2 to
tilt the moonroof up.
3. Release the moonroof switch after the
moonroof moves slightly up and down.
4. Push and hold the switch toward *
1 to
SIC3512
fully tilt the moonroof down.
5. Check if the moonroof switch operates MAP LIGHTS
S35-D-110201-C243F5B9-4483-4D93-AA0B-1EA9F7CF9D9D
normally. Push the light lens to turn the map light on or off.
If the moonroof does not operate properly after The map light control switch has three positions:
performing the procedure above, have your ON * 1 , DOOR * 2 and OFF * 3 .
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.
The light *4 (if so equipped) will illuminate
when the headlight switch is turned to the
or position.
ON position
S35-D-110201-7683F6B1-A28E-4E34-903D-85E1BC5B2ED3
When the switch is in the ON position *
1 , the
map lights will illuminate.

Instruments and controls 2-53

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (124,1)

DOOR S35-D-110201-6D5F4D58-B171-4027-B458-15DB5CE5FB39
position OFF position
S35-D-110201-55BC51B8-E593-4DF0-A4A4-C808144A2F0B
When the switch is in the DOOR position * 2 , When the switch is in the OFF position * 3 , the
the map lights will illuminate under the following map lights will not illuminate, regardless of the
conditions: condition.
. ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
. doors are unlocked by pushing the unlock
button (on the keyfob or Intelligent Key)
or the request switch (Intelligent Key system
equipped model), with the ignition switch in
the LOCK position
— remain on for about 15 seconds. SIC3513
. any door is opened and then closed with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position
CEILING LIGHT
GUID-BE9CB642-0C31-473C-A93E-63673165372B

— remain on for about 15 seconds. The ceiling light switch has three positions: ON,
DOOR and OFF.
. any door is opened with the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON position ON position
S35-D-110201-70BCA29A-4C18-4168-8B6D-98BE0BE33E7F
— remain on while the door is opened. When the switch is in the ON position *
1 , the
When the door is closed, the lights go ceiling light will illuminate.
off.
The lights will turn off after 30 minutes DOORS35-D-110201-96E5D9BB-55A7-44D8-B0DC-A27CDCB014C4
position
when the lights remain illuminated to When the switch is in the DOOR position * 2 ,
prevent the battery from becoming dis- the ceiling light will illuminate under the following
charged. conditions:
. ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position

2-54 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (125,1)

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS (if so

CARGO LIGHT
equipped)
S35-D-110201-60256316-8D60-44BF-B844-446DA9E30D11 GUID-AC455466-F059-41D4-A466-DD80D2F1310F

— remain on for about 15 seconds.

. doors are unlocked by pushing the unlock
button (on the keyfob or Intelligent Key)
or the request switch (Intelligent Key system
equipped model), with the ignition switch in
the LOCK position
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
. any door is opened and then closed with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position
— remain on for about 15 seconds.
. any door is opened with the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON position
— remain on while the door is opened. SIC2064 SIC2131A
When the door is closed, the lights go
off. The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when When the switch is in the ON position * 1 , the

The light will turn off after 30 minutes
when the lights remain illuminated to
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
OFF position
S35-D-110201-D2E4CC19-C6A3-43E3-A546-AEDCAD5B81E9
When the switch is in the OFF position * 3 , the
ceiling light will not illuminate, regardless of the
condition.
the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.
When the cover is closed, the light will turn off.
The lights will turn off after 30 minutes
when the lights remain illuminated to
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
light illuminates while the lift gate is opened.
When the lift gate is closed, the light will turn off.
When the switch is in the OFF position *
2 , the
light will turn off.
The light will turn off after 30 minutes
when the lights remain illuminated to
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.

Instruments and controls 2-55

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


HomeLink® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
S35-D-110201-66C2B4FC-EF3E-4734-84F9-A3A414FE2874
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a
convenient way to consolidate the functions of
up to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
. Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
devices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and
security systems.
. Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the
vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-
connected, HomeLink® will retain all pro-
gramming.
Once HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is
programmed, retain the original transmit-
ter for future programming procedures
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon
sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes.
For additional information, see “Program-
ming HomeLink®” later in this section.
WARNING
. Do not use HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and
2-56 Instruments and controls
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (126,1)
PROGRAMMING HomeLink®
reverse features as required by S35-D-110201-D5C00885-9125-4196-B013-1D365942DDA0
federal safety standards. (These To program your HomeLink® Transceiver to
standards became effective for operate a garage door, gate, or entry door
opener models manufactured after opener, home or office lighting, you need to be
April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener at the same location as the device. Note:
which cannot detect an object in the Garage door openers (manufactured after
path of a closing garage door and 1996) have “rolling code protection”. To pro-
then automatically stop and reverse, gram a garage door opener equipped with
does not meet current federal safety “rolling code protection”; you will need to use
standards. Using a garage door a ladder to get up to the garage door opener
opener without these features in- motor to be able to access the “smart or learn”
creases the risk of serious injury or program button.
death.
. During programming procedure,
your garage door or security gate
may open or close. Make sure that
people and objects are clear of the
garage door, gate, etc. that you are
programming.
. Your vehicle’s engine should be
turned off while programming
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.

SIC3182
1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outer
HomeLink® buttons (to clear the memory)
until the indicator light *
A blinks (after 20
seconds). Release both buttons.
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter
1-3 inches away from the HomeLink® sur-
face.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SIC3183
3. Using both hands, simultaneously push and
hold both the HomeLink® button you want to
program and the hand-held transmitter
button.
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
been completed.
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator
light on HomeLink® flashes, changing from a
“slow blink” to a “rapid blink”. This could
take up to 90 seconds. When the indicator
light blinks rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapidly flashing light indicates
successful programming. To activate the
garage door or other programmed device,
push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
Black plate (127,1)
button - releasing when the device begins to
activate.
5. If the indicator light on HomeLink® blinks
rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid,
HomeLink® has picked up a “rolling code”
garage door opener signal. You will need to
proceed with the next steps to train
HomeLink®, completing the programming
may require a ladder and another person
for convenience.
6. Push and release the program button
located on the garage door opener’s motor
to activate the “training mode”. This button is
usually located near the antenna wire that
hangs down from the motor. If the wire
originates from under a light lens, you will
need to remove the lens to access the
training button.
NOTE:
Once you have pushed and released the
training button on the garage door
opener’s motor and the “training light”
is lit, you have 30 seconds in which to
perform step 7. For convenience, use
the help of a second person to assist
when performing this step.
7. Quickly (within 30 seconds of pushing and
releasing the garage door opener training
button) and firmly push and release the
Instruments and controls 2-57

HomeLink® button you’ve just programmed.
Push and release the HomeLink® button up
to three times to complete the training.
8. Your HomeLink® button should now be
programmed. To program the remaining
HomeLink® buttons for additional door or
gate openers, follow steps 2 through 8 only.
NOTE:
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
“clear” all previously programmed
HomeLink® buttons.
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLink® buttons, please
refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.
homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.
PROGRAMMING HomeLink® FOR CA-
NADIAN CUSTOMERS
GUID-6ACFA63C-38E7-40AC-9D44-7085C554AF73
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required
hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after
2 seconds. To program your hand-held trans-
mitter to HomeLink®, continue to push and hold
the HomeLink® button (note steps 2 through 4
under “Programming HomeLink®”) while you
push and re-push (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator
light flashes rapidly (indicating successful pro-
gramming).
2-58 Instruments and controls
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
NOTE:
If programming a garage door opener, etc.,
it is advised to unplug the device during
the “cycling” process to prevent possible
damage to the garage door opener com-
ponents.
OPERATING THE HomeLink® UNIVER-
SAL TRANSCEIVER
S35-D-110201-2F4ADB5B-DB01-458A-B276-C4210429C7AD
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (once pro-
grammed) may now be used to activate the
garage door, etc. To operate, simply push the
appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNO-
SIS
S35-D-110201-0B7FA6ED-FEC7-47F2-8980-375FA4DA8824
If HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand-
held transmitter information:
. replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.
. position the hand-held transmitter with its
battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® surface.
. push and hold both the HomeLink® and
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-
ruption.
. position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in
(50 to 127 mm) away from the HomeLink®
Black plate (128,1)
surface. Hold the transmitter in that position
for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not
programmed within that time, try holding the
transmitter in another position - keeping the
indicator light in view at all times.
If you continue to have programming difficulties,
please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs
Department. The phone numbers are located in
the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN-
FORMATION
S35-D-110201-27C5AE41-4F1F-4D07-8C90-BF387497020E
Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to
clear all programming, push and hold the two
outside buttons and release when the indicator
light begins to flash (in approximately 20
seconds).
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
®
HomeLink BUTTON
S35-D-110201-6CBBA29C-5D44-408B-8B3F-6BE900E6D619
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transcei-
ver button, complete the following.
1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink ®
button. Do not release the button until step
4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
hand-held transmitter 2 to 5 in (50 to 127
mm) away from the HomeLink® surface.
 Black plate (129,1)

3. Push and hold the hand-held transmitter device must accept any interference that
button. may be received, including interference
4. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash, first that may cause undesired operation.
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator The transmitter has been tested and
light begins to flash rapidly, release both complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
buttons. Changes or modifications not expressly
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button approved by the party responsible for
has now been reprogrammed. The new device compliance could void the user’s authority
can be activated by pushing the HomeLink® to operate the device.
button that was just programmed. This proce- DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
dure will not affect any other programmed FCC I.D.: CB2V67690
HomeLink® buttons.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
S35-D-110201-0E33C5C3-FB03-4FDB-B7CB-C54F97BF0844
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the
manufacturer or dealer of those devices for
additional information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer-
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
FCC Notice:
This device complies with FCC rules part
15. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference and (2) This

Instruments and controls 2-59

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (130,1)

MEMO

2-60 Instruments and controls

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (131,1)

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ..............................................................................................
... 3-2 Warning signals ..............................................................
... 3-14
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys ................... ... 3-2 Troubleshooting guide ..................................................
... 3-15
Intelligent Keys (if so equipped) .....................................
... 3-3 How to use remote keyless entry function .............. ... 3-16
Doors ............................................................................................
... 3-4 Hood .........................................................................................
... 3-20
Locking with key ..................................................................
... 3-5 Lift gate ....................................................................................
... 3-21
Locking with inside lock knob ..........................................
... 3-5 Lift gate release ..............................................................
... 3-22
Locking with power door lock switch ............................ ... 3-5 Fuel-filler door ........................................................................
... 3-22
Automatic door locks .........................................................
... 3-6 Opening the fuel-filler door .........................................
... 3-22
Child safety rear door lock ...............................................
... 3-6 Fuel-filler cap ..................................................................
... 3-22
Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) ................. ... 3-7 Steering wheel .......................................................................
... 3-24
How to use remote keyless entry system ..................... ... 3-8 Tilt operation ...................................................................
... 3-24
Intelligent Key system (if so equipped) ............................ ... 3-10 Sun visors ................................................................................
... 3-25
Intelligent Key operating range .....................................
... 3-12 Mirrors ......................................................................................
... 3-25
Door locks/unlocks precaution ....................................
... 3-12 Inside mirror .....................................................................
... 3-25
Intelligent Key operation .................................................
... 3-13 Outside mirrors ...............................................................
... 3-27
Vanity mirror .....................................................................
... 3-28

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (132,1)

KEYS
S35-D-110201-DE70668C-DA04-469B-B5C4-09EB700CFDF7
A key number plate is supplied with your keys. duplicate your existing key. As many as 5 keys
Record the key number and keep it in a safe can be used with one vehicle. You should bring
place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If all the registered keys that you have to a
you lose your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because
duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN the registration process will erase the memory of
does not record any key numbers so it is very all key codes previously registered into the
important to keep track of your key number plate. NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the
registration process, these components will only
A key number is only necessary when you have
recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
Immobilizer System during registration. Any key
from. If you still have a key, this key can be
that is not given to your dealer at the time of
duplicated by a NISSAN dealer.
registration will no longer be able to start your
vehicle.
SPA2405

1. Master key (2) CAUTION

2. Key number plate (1)
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYS- Do not allow the NISSAN Vehicle Im-
TEM KEYS
S35-D-110201-9A9F7A26-2A31-4E79-9589-56D7FD9A686E
mobilizer System key, which contains
Your vehicle can only be driven with the master an electrical transponder, to come in
keys which are registered to the NISSAN contact with salt water. This could
Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your cause the system to malfunction.
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in
the key head.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (133,1)

nents when registering new keys, be sure to take equipment and personal computers.
all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN
dealer.

SPA2406
1. Intelligent Key (2)
2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Key) (2)
3. Key number plate (1)
INTELLIGENT KEYS (if so equipped)
S35-D-110201-D15F2CE6-CCCA-4C47-A594-B5FAFAF94A86
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys which are registered to your
vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System compo-
nents. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The new
keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer
prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System of your
vehicle. Since the registration process requires
erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo-
CAUTION
. Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
which contains electrical compo-
nents, to come into contact with
water or salt water. This could affect
the system function.
. Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
. Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object.
. If the outside temperature is below
148F (-108C) degrees, the battery of
the intelligent key may not function
properly.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key for
an extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).
. Do not attach the Intelligent Key
with a key holder that contains a
magnet.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a mag-
netic field, such as a TV, audio

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (134,1)

DOORS
S35-D-110201-11F4111D-00C7-425A-8CBE-258C29021D15

CAUTION WARNING
Always carry the mechanical key in- . Always have the doors locked while
stalled in the Intelligent Key. driving. Along with the use of seat
belts, this provides greater safety in
the event of an accident by helping
to prevent persons from being
thrown from the vehicle. This also
helps keep children and others from
unintentionally opening the doors,
and will help keep out intruders.
. Before opening any door, always
SPA2033
look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
Mechanical key . Do not leave children unattended
S35-D-110201-9601DF7C-3FF9-40D5-B6B8-9E5EEEBD0038
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock inside the vehicle. They could un-
knob at the back of the Intelligent Key. knowingly activate switches or con-
trols. Unattended children could
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into become involved in serious acci-
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to dents.
the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors. (See “Doors” later in this section.)

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


SPA2394
LOCKING WITH KEY
S35-D-110201-EA701736-2D62-4FE5-9A07-3E66A223B473
The power door lock system allows you to lock
or unlock all doors simultaneously.
. Turning the driver’s door key cylinder to the
front of the vehicle *
1 will lock all doors and
the lift gate.
. Turning the driver’s door key cylinder once
to the rear of the vehicle * 2 will unlock the
driver’s door. After returning the key to the
neutral position, turning it to the rear again
within 5 seconds will unlock all doors and
the lift gate.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (135,1)
SPA1814 SPA2300
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
S35-D-110201-F596BA5E-9604-428A-990B-ACE1BA5124FA
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK
To lock the door without the key, move the inside SWITCH
S35-D-110201-CBDF94BB-B871-4D60-9710-B678FE8875EE
lock knob to the lock position *
1 then close the Operating the power door lock switch will lock
door. or unlock all the doors. The switches are located
To unlock, move the inside lock knob to the on the driver’s and front passenger’s door
unlock position *
2 . armrests.
When locking the door without a key, be To lock the doors, push the power door lock
sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle. switch to the lock position *
1 with the driver’s
or front passenger’s door open, then close the
door.
When locking the door this way, be sure
not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock the doors, push the power door lock
switch to the unlock position *
2 .
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
 Black plate (136,1)

LockoutS35-D-110201-D9159B01-8C96-4797-ADA7-C072902F1545
protection 5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
When the power door lock switch (driver or front OFF and ON position again between each
passenger) is moved to the lock position with setting change.
the key in the ignition switch or the Intelligent When the automatic door unlock system is
Key in the vehicle and any door open, all doors deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the
will lock and unlock automatically. ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. To
This function helps to prevent the keys from unlock the door manually, use the inside lock
being accidentally locked inside the vehicle. knob or the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side).
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
S35-D-110201-9792C716-DB41-40DC-A515-5B1BB12E9151
. All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
. All doors unlock automatically when the
SPA2037
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The automatic unlock function can be CHILD S35-D-110201-E7140EBB-C56B-4EFA-B4A0-B356D8C49F31
SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
deactivated or activated. To deactivate or
Child safety rear door locks help prevent the rear
activate the automatic door unlock system,
doors from being opened accidentally, espe-
perform the following procedure:
cially when small children are in the vehicle.
1. Close all doors.
When the levers are in the lock position
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. *1 , the rear doors can be opened only
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2, from the outside.
push and hold the power door lock switch to To disengage, move the levers to the unlock
the position (UNLOCK) for more than 5 position *
2 .
seconds.
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
S35-D-110201-1E00637E-1C0B-4FEB-811E-9997F446A105
It is possible to lock/unlock all doors (including
the lift gate), and activate the panic alarm by
using the keyfob from outside the vehicle.
Before locking the doors, make sure the
key is not left in the vehicle.
The keyfob can operate at a distance of
approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
(The effective distance depends upon the
conditions around the vehicle.)
As many as 5 keyfobs can be used with one
vehicle. For information concerning the pur-
chase and use of additional keyfobs, contact a
NISSAN dealer.
The keyfob will not function:
. When the keyfob is not within the opera-
tional range.
. When the doors are open or not closed
securely.
. When the key is in the ignition switch.
. When the battery is discharged.
WARNING
The remote keyless entry keyfob trans-
mits radio waves when the buttons are
pushed. The FAA advises that the radio
waves may affect aircraft navigation
and communication systems. Do not
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (137,1)
operate the keyfob while on an air- NISSAN dealer.
plane. Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the unit If the indicator light on the keyfob does not
is stored during a flight. illuminate when pushing the buttons, the keyfob
battery may be discharged.
For information regarding the replacement of a
CAUTION battery, see “Battery replacement” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
The following conditions or occur-
rences will damage the keyfob.
. Do not allow the keyfob to become
wet.
. Do not drop the keyfob.
. Do not strike the keyfob sharply
against another object.
. If the outside temperature is below
148F (-108C) degrees, the battery of
keyfob may not function properly.
. Do not place the keyfob for an
extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).
If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
keyfob. This will prevent the keyfob
from unauthorized use to unlock the
vehicle. For information regarding the
erasing procedure, please contact a
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
 Black plate (138,1)

remains open. Using panic alarm

S35-D-110201-1BFE353E-D31D-455C-84CE-1BA2297CF9C6
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
horn chirps once. you may activate the alarm to call attention as
. When the LOCK button is pushed with follows:
all doors locked, the hazard indicator flashes 1. Push the PANIC button *
3 on the
twice and the horn chirps once as a keyfob for more than 1 second.
reminder that the doors are already locked. 2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will
. Operate the door handles to confirm that the stay on for 25 seconds.
doors have been securely locked.
3. The panic alarm stops when:
Unlocking doors
S35-D-110201-29B39298-D051-4CAC-95C7-6FD65C0E8B70
. It has run for 25 seconds, or
. Any of the buttons on the keyfob is
1. Push the UNLOCK button *
2 on the
keyfob. pushed. (Note: the PANIC button must
SPA2416 be pushed for more than 1 second.)
. The driver’s door unlocks.
*
1 LOCK button . The hazard indicator flashes once if all
Setting S35-D-110201-9248839D-3D23-438A-9E35-5533D7B6AFCA
hazard indicator and horn mode
*
2 UNLOCK button doors are completely closed.
*
3 PANIC button This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn
2. Push the UNLOCK button again within mode when you first receive the vehicle.
HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS 5 seconds.
ENTRY S35-D-110201-CA37B8F2-FD76-4255-B48E-4F80A3B5B847
SYSTEM In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the
. All the doors and the lift gate unlock.
LOCK button *1 is pushed, the hazard
. The hazard indicator flashes once if all
Locking S35-D-110201-6A487745-4220-4149-BAAE-6CE691473769
doors indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.
doors are completely closed. When the UNLOCK button *2 is pushed,
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one the hazard indicator flashes once.
2. Close all the doors.
of the following operations is performed within 1 If the horn chirp is not necessary, you can switch
3. Push the LOCK button *
1 on the minute of pushing the UNLOCK button. to hazard indicator only mode by following the
keyfob.
. Any door or lift gate is opened. switching procedure.
4. All the doors will lock. . The ignition switch is turned to the ON In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCK
All of the doors will lock when the LOCK position. button is pushed, the hazard indicator
button is pushed even though a door flashes twice. When the UNLOCK button is

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (139,1)

pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the horn Mode (Pushing the or button) DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK
operates. HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once
Hazard indicator and horn mode
HORN - once HORN - none
Hazard indicator mode HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none

Switching procedure:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
To switch the hazard indicator and horn opera-
tion, push the LOCK *1 and UNLOCK
*2 buttons on the keyfob simultaneously
for more than 2 seconds.
. When the hazard indicator mode is set, the
hazard indicator flashes 3 times.
. When the hazard indicator and horn mode is
set, the hazard indicator flashes once and
the horn chirps once.

NOS1695

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
S35-D-110201-1EBA8E8A-E285-4EDF-8DC6-8282FF7F52ED
WARNING
. Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should con-
tact the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
. The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are
pushed. The FAA advises that the
radio waves may affect aircraft na-
vigation and communication sys-
tems. Do not operate the
Intelligent Key while on an airplane.
Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored during a flight.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
door locks using the remote controller function
or pushing the request switch on the vehicle
without taking the key out from a pocket or
purse. The operating environment and/or condi-
tions may affect the Intelligent Key system
operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
CAUTION
. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key
with you when operating the vehi-
cle.
. Never leave the Intelligent Key in
the vehicle when you leave the
vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The
Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio
waves. Environmental conditions may interfere
with the operation of the Intelligent Key system
under the following operating conditions.
. When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such
as a TV tower, power station and broad-
casting station.
. When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
. When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
. When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
. When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal
Black plate (140,1)
computer.
. When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-
charged, replace it with a new one.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiv-
ing radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as
signals from a TV and personal computer, the
battery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a
battery, see “Battery replacement” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
. Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
which contains electrical compo-
nents, to come into contact with
 Black plate (141,1)

water or salt water. This could affect recommends erasing the ID code of that
the system function. Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent
the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to
. Do not drop the Intelligent Key. operate the vehicle. For information regarding
. Do not strike the Intelligent Key the erasing procedure, contact a NISSAN deal-
sharply against another object. er.
. Do not change or modify the Intel- The Intelligent Key function can be disabled. For
ligent Key. information about disabling the Intelligent Key
. Wetting may damage the Intelligent function, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet,
immediately wipe until it is comple-
tely dry.
. If the outside temperature is below
148F (−108C) degrees, the battery of
the Intelligent Key may not function
properly.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key for
an extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).
. Do not attach the Intelligent Key
with a key holder that contains a
magnet.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a mag-
netic field, such as a TV, audio
equipment, personal computers or
cellular phone.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATING
RANGE S35-D-110201-78F9827F-C347-4841-AFF5-1DE018677F6B
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range from the request switch * 1 .
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operat-
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
from each request switch * 1 .
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SPA2074
switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone who does not
carry the Intelligent Key to push the request
switch to lock/unlock the doors including the lift
gate.
Black plate (142,1)
SPA2407
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAU-
TION GUID-5B258DE1-6D3E-4530-A070-24F6EB804D09
. Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the In-
telligent Key is outside the vehicle.
. After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
. To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
key with you and then lock the doors.
 Black plate (143,1)

. Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.

SPA2408 SPA2409

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

S35-D-110201-EC829859-7623-4249-A79B-75682E29C873
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the key out from your pocket or bag.

SPA2410

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
handle request switch (driver’s or front passen-
ger’s) *
A or lift gate request switch * B within
the range of operation.
When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard
indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside
chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details,
see “Setting hazard indicator and horn mode”
later in this section.
LockingS35-D-110201-8EA6E22F-8395-4193-8EB5-5A139EFC2C10
doors
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.*1
2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
3. Close all the doors.*2
4. Push the door handle request switch (dri-
ver’s or front passenger’s) *A or the lift
gate request switch * B while carrying the
Intelligent Key with you.*3
5. All the doors and the lift gate will lock.
6. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the
outside chime sounds twice.
*1: Doors will lock with the request switch while
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
*2: Doors will not lock with the request switch
while any door is open.
*3: Doors will not lock with the request switch
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (144,1)
when the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle. WARNING SIGNALS
S35-D-110201-0D8A99B7-E65C-4934-A016-E4324CF1EA91
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the The Intelligent Key system is equipped with a
vehicle, doors can be locked with another function that is designed to minimize improper
registered Intelligent Key. operations and to help prevent the vehicle from
being stolen. The warning buzzer sounds and
Unlocking doors
S35-D-110201-B5E33822-CFDC-4AA1-AD0F-54BBE3729FBB
the warning display appears on the vehicle
1. Push the door handle request switch * A or
information display when improper operations
the lift gate request switch * B while
are detected.
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
2. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-
side chime sounds once. The corresponding CAUTION
door or the lift gate will unlock.
3. Push the request switch again within 5 When the buzzer sounds and the warn-
seconds. ing display appears, be sure to check
both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and out-
side chime sounds once again. All the doors
and the lift gate will unlock.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pushing the request switch while
the doors are locked.
. Opening any doors.
. Pushing the ignition switch.
. Inserting the mechanical key into the ignition
switch.
During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK
button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all
doors will be locked automatically after another
1 minute.
 Black plate (145,1)

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
S35-D-110201-F67E3182-54C1-4F8E-8206-45B5D1438491

Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the request switch
When closing the doors
When opening the driver’s door
When stopping the engine
When turning the ignition switch
When starting the engine
When pushing the ignition switch
The outside buzzer sounds for approximately 2
seconds.
The outside buzzer sounds for approximately
10 seconds.
The Intelligent Key detection warning appears
on the display and the outside buzzer sounds 3 The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.
times.
The outside buzzer sounds for approximately 3 The Intelligent Key has been left in the
seconds and all doors unlock.
A warning chime sounds continuously.
The SHIFT “P” warning appears on the display.
A warning chime sounds continuously.
The Intelligent key battery discharge indicator
appears on the display.
The Intelligent Key detection warning appears
on the display.
The doors cannot be locked.
The ignition switch is not turned to the
LOCK position.
vehicle.
The ignition switch is not in the LOCK
position, or the mechanical key is
inserted into the ignition switch.
The selector lever is not in the P (Park) Shift the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
The ignition switch is not turned to the
LOCK position.
The battery charge is low.
The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.
Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicle
and push the request switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and push the request switch while
carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
Close all the doors securely and push the
request switch while carrying the Intelligent
Key with you.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Carry the Intelligent Key from the vehicle
and close the door.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
Remove the mechanical key from the igni-
tion switch.
position.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
Replace the battery with a new one. (See
“Battery replacement” in the “8. Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section.)
Carry the Intelligent Key.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS
ENTRY S35-D-110201-CF29B22E-A85F-4042-83BE-F5970367F85C
FUNCTION
WARNING
. Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those
who use a pacemaker should con-
tact the electric medical equipment
manufacturer for the possible influ-
ences before use.
. The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are
pushed. The FAA advises that the
radio waves may affect aircraft na-
vigation and communication sys-
tems. Do not operate the
Intelligent Key while on an airplane.
Make sure the buttons are not
operated unintentionally when the
unit is stored during a flight.
CAUTION
. Do not allow the Intelligent Key,
which contains electrical compo-
nents, to come into contact with
water or salt water. This could affect
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (146,1)
the system function. conditions around the vehicle.)
. Do not drop the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless entry function will not
operate:
. Do not strike the Intelligent Key
sharply against another object. . When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
. Do not change or modify the Intel-
. When the doors are open or not closed
ligent Key.
securely.
. Wetting may damage the Intelligent . When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, charged.
immediately wipe until it is comple-
The remote keyless entry function can also
tely dry.
operate the vehicle alarm.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key for
an extended period in an area where
temperatures exceed 1408F (608C).
. Do not attach the Intelligent Key
with a key holder that contains a
magnet.
. Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a mag-
netic field, such as a TV, audio
equipment, personal computers or
cellular phone.
The remote keyless entry function can operate
all door locks using the remote keyless entry
function of the Intelligent Key. The remote
keyless entry function can operate at a distance
of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.
(The operating distance depends upon the
 Black plate (147,1)

4. Push the LOCK button *

1 on the . Pushing the ignition switch.
Intelligent Key. . Inserting the mechanical key into the ignition
5. All the doors and the lift gate will lock. switch.
6. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the During this 1-minute time period, if the UNLOCK
horn chirps once. button is pushed, all doors will be locked
automatically after another 1 minute.
*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while
the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. Using panic alarm
S35-D-110201-F0A15784-7138-4284-8670-24D4950A9145
*2: Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
while any door is open. you may activate the alarm to call attention as
Operate the door handles to confirm that the follows:
doors have been securely locked. 1. Push the PANIC button *
3 on the
Intelligent Key for more than 1 second.
SPA2252 Unlocking doors
S35-D-110201-5BF96B05-51EE-4842-8795-C1E930136475
2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will
*
1 LOCK button 1. Push the UNLOCK button *
2 on the
stay on for 25 seconds.
*
2 UNLOCK button Intelligent Key.
3. The panic alarm stops when:
*
3 PANIC button 2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The . It has run for 25 seconds, or
When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard driver’s door will unlock.
. Any of the buttons on the Intelligent Key
indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside 3. Push the UNLOCK button again within is pushed. (Note: PANIC button must be
chime) will sound as a confirmation. For details, 5 seconds. pushed for more than 1 second.)
see “Setting hazard indicator and horn mode”
4. The hazard indicator flashes once. All the
later in this section.
doors and the lift gate will unlock.
LockingS35-D-110201-A8D08BE2-F673-412D-BEB0-690D24D790A0
doors All doors will be locked automatically unless one
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK of the following operations is performed within 1
position.*1 minute after pushing the UNLOCK button
while the doors are locked.
2. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
. Opening any doors.
3. Close all the doors.*2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (148,1)

Setting hazard indicator and horn mode

GUID-1392CA15-47C1-4364-9564-F188E178C817
This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn
mode when you first receive the vehicle.
In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the
LOCK button *1 is pushed, the hazard
indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps once.
When the UNLOCK button *2 is pushed,
the hazard indicator flashes once.
If horns are not necessary, the system can be
switched to the hazard indicator mode.
In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCK
button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes
twice. When the UNLOCK button is
pushed, neither the hazard indicator nor the
horn operates.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (149,1)

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Pushing door handle request switch or HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once
lift gate request switch OUTSIDE CHIME - twice OUTSIDE CHIME - once
HAZARD - twice HAZARD - once
Pushing or button HORN - none
HORN - once

Hazard indicator mode:

GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

Operation DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK

Pushing door handle request switch or
HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none
lift gate request switch
Pushing or button HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none

Switching procedure:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
To switch the hazard indicator and horn opera-
tion, push the LOCK *1 and UNLOCK
*2 buttons on the Intelligent Key simulta-
neously for more than 2 seconds.
. When the hazard indicator mode is set, the
hazard indicator flashes 3 times.
. When the hazard indicator and horn mode is
set, the hazard indicator flashes once and
NOS1695
the horn chirps once.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (150,1)

HOOD
S35-D-110201-3E438177-7161-4F63-AE18-E528B9958B72

WARNING
. Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving.
Failure to do so could cause the
hood to fly open and result in an
accident.
. If you see steam or smoke coming
from the engine compartment, to
avoid injury do not open the hood.

SPA2412

When opening the hood: When closing the hood:

1. Pull the hood release handle * 1 located
below the instrument panel; the hood will
then spring up slightly.
2. Pull the lever *
2 up at the front of the hood
with your fingertips.
3. Raise the hood.
4. Remove the support rod from the hood and
insert it into the slot *
3 .
1. Return the support rod to its original
position.
2. Slowly move the hood down to latch the
lock.
3. Push the hood down to lock the hood
securely into place.

Hold the coated part *

A when removing or
resetting the support rod. Avoid direct
contact with the metal parts, as they may
be hot immediately after the engine has
been stopped.
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (151,1)

LIFT GATE
S35-D-110201-3B6AEB5E-E690-4213-A96C-BD4949D8360D

locks.
WARNING
. Always be sure the lift gate has
been closed securely to prevent it
from opening while driving.
. Do not drive with the lift gate open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle.
See “Exhaust gas (carbon monox-
ide)” in the “5. Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
. Make sure that all passengers have SPA2413
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle
before closing the lift gate. To open the lift gate, unlock it and push the
opener switch *A . Pull up the lift gate to open.

The lift gate can be unlocked by:

. pushing the unlock button on the
keyfob or the Intelligent Key (if so equipped)
twice.
. pushing the lift gate request switch (if so
equipped).
. pushing the power door lock switch to the
unlock position.
. inserting the key into the driver’s door key
cylinder and turning it to the rear of the
vehicle twice.
To close the lift gate, pull down until it securely

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (152,1)

FUEL-FILLER DOOR
S35-D-110201-2B147586-63E0-4DF3-B881-8610B6736448

SPA2414 SPA2415 SPA2338

LIFT GATE RELEASE

S35-D-110201-B8DEF828-77B2-4BDA-90BB-EAF054BB537F OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR FUEL-FILLER CAP
S35-D-110201-2406F22D-9BA5-40C7-BA12-ABC92FD1B580
S35-D-110201-7CC1E09E-D8D3-41CA-9B6A-49166F375329
If the lift gate cannot be opened due to a To open the fuel-filler door, pull the left side of To remove the fuel-filler cap:
discharged battery, follow these steps. the door. 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to
1. Remove the cover inside of the lift gate with remove.
a suitable tool. 2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder *
A
2. Move the lever toward the direction *
A as while refueling.
illustrated to open the lift gate. To install the fuel-filler cap:
Have the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer. 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-
filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a
single click is heard.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


WARNING
. Gasoline is extremely flammable
and highly explosive under certain
conditions. You could be burned or
seriously injured if it is misused or
mishandled. Always stop engine
and do not smoke or allow open
flames or sparks near the vehicle
when refueling.
. Do not attempt to top off the fuel
tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically. Continued
refueling may cause fuel overflow,
resulting in fuel spray and possibly
a fire.
. Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It
has a built-in safety valve needed
for proper operation of the fuel
system and emission control sys-
tem. An incorrect cap can result in a
serious malfunction and possible
injury. It could also cause the mal-
function indicator light to come on.
. Never pour fuel into the throttle
body to attempt to start your vehi-
cle.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
. Do not fill a portable fuel container
in the vehicle or trailer. Static elec-
tricity can cause an explosion of
flammable liquid, vapor or gas in
any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death when
filling portable fuel containers:
— Always place the container on
the ground when filling.
— Do not use electronic devices
when filling.
— Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are
filling it.
— Use only approved portable fuel
containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
. If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid
paint damage.
. Insert the cap straight into the fuel-
filler tube, then tighten until the
fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to tight-
en the fuel-filler cap properly may
Black plate (153,1)
cause the malfunction indicator
light (MIL) to illuminate. If the
light illuminates because the fuel-
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten
or install the cap and continue to
drive the vehicle. The light
should turn off after a few driving
trips. If the light does not turn
off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected by a NISSAN deal-
er.
For additional information, see
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”
in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
. The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will
appear if the fuel-filler cap is not
properly tightened. It may take a few
driving trips for the message to be
displayed. Failure to tighten the
fuel-filler cap properly after the
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears
may cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) to illuminate.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
 Black plate (154,1)

STEERING WHEEL
S35-D-110201-080D2004-4570-4B0C-B875-A5DE896B6841

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.

SPA2807 SPA2383

LOOSES35-D-110201-7BDBA3A1-1B36-47D7-8D3F-6BCA39874459
FUEL CAP warning TILT OPERATION
S35-D-110201-28BA420D-969D-46F3-B289-6F251133B52B

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears on the Pull the lock lever down *1 and adjust the
vehicle information display when the fuel-filler steering wheel up or down * 2 to the desired

cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle position.

has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips Push the lock lever up * 3 securely to lock the
for the message to be displayed. To turn off the steering wheel in place. A clicking noise may be
warning, perform the following steps: heard when the lever is moved to the lock
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon position.
as possible. (See “FUEL-FILLER CAP”.)
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
3. Push the switch * A for about 1
second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP
warning after tightening the fuel cap.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (155,1)

SUN VISORS MIRRORS

S35-D-110201-B266053D-0E25-4B84-A94E-88E6B81337A0
S35-D-110201-2C2A1443-F866-4FB7-8FF5-8337E541196D

SPA2447 SPA2143

INSIDE S35-D-110201-67D1410D-36D6-4377-944E-434F7B628FFC
MIRROR Manual S35-D-110201-7FA2E3AD-51E8-43DF-93EA-2C31AEAE2711
anti-glare type
Adjust the height and the angle of the inside The night position *1 will reduce glare from the
mirror to the desired position. headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
Use the day position *
2 when driving in daylight
hours.

SIC2872
WARNING
1. To block out glare from the front, swing
down the sun visor *
1 . Use the night position only when ne-
2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun cessary, because it reduces rear view
visor from the center mount and swing it to clarity.
the side *2 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (156,1)

Automatic anti-glare type

S35-D-110201-BCCF0D4C-958E-4AB1-8A98-EE47B549C9AC
For the compass operation, see “Compass” in
The inside mirror is designed so that it the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
automatically changes reflection according to For the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver opera-
the intensity of the headlights of the following tion, see “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in
vehicle. the “2. Instruments and controls” section.
The anti-glare system will be automatically
turned on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.

SPA2422

Type A: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the system is turned on, the indicator light
*A will illuminate and excessive glare from the
headlights of the vehicle behind you will be
reduced.
Push the switch *B to make the inside
rearview mirror operate normally and the indi-
cator light will turn off. Push the switch
again to turn the system on.
Do not allow any object to cover the
sensors * C or apply glass cleaner on
them. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity
of the sensors, resulting in improper
operation.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (157,1)

Adjusting outside mirrors

S35-D-110201-3F0FC23C-63BA-4C15-907F-D683589765C8
The outside mirror control switch is located on
the left side of the instrument panel.
The outside mirror will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
Turn the switch right or left to select the right or
left side mirror, then adjust using the control
switch.
Defrosting outside mirrors (if so
equipped)
S35-D-110201-FE0BE402-86EE-473F-932D-0CDFE7858E17
The outside mirrors will be heated when the rear
SPA2162A SPA1390 window defroster switch is operated.

Type B: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
S35-D-110201-85E8C1B6-9131-460C-BDC1-2187D806CC2F
When the system is turned on, the indicator light
*A will illuminate and excessive glare from the
WARNING
headlights of the vehicle behind you will be
reduced. Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
Push the switch * B for 3 seconds to make the passenger side are closer than they
the inside mirror operate normally and the appear. Be careful when moving to the
indicator light will turn off. Push the switch right. Using only this mirror could cause
again for 3 seconds to turn the system on. an accident. Use the inside mirror or
Do not hang any objects on the mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly
apply glass cleaner. Doing so will reduce judge distances to other objects.
the sensitivity of the sensor *
C , resulting
in improper operation.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (158,1)

SPA1829 SIC2064

FoldableS35-D-110201-35753C78-8667-43C1-A202-7708082BAF4E
outside mirrors VANITY MIRROR
GUID-077032A8-BE9E-45A3-9146-957D47A5EB9A

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun
rear of the vehicle. visor and pull up the cover.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (159,1)

MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (160,1)

MEMO

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (161,1)

4 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio,

phone and voice recognition systems
Safety note ..................................................................................
... 4-2 Servicing air conditioner ..............................................
... 4-29
Control panel buttons — color screen with navigation Operating tips (for automatic air conditioner) ........ ... 4-30
system (if so equipped) ..........................................................
... 4-3 Audio system ..........................................................................
... 4-30
How to use touch screen .................................................
... 4-3 Audio operation precautions .......................................
... 4-30
How to use the back button ............................................
... 4-5 FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) player ....... ... 4-41
How to use brightness control and display FM-AM-SAT(if so equipped) radio with Compact
ON/OFF button ...................................................................
... 4-5 Disc (CD) player (Type A) ...........................................
... 4-48
How to use the setup button ...........................................
... 4-6 FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD) player
RearView monitor (if so equipped) ......................................
... 4-9 (Type B) ..........................................................................
... 4-57
How to read the displayed lines ..................................
... 4-10 iPod® player operation ..................................................
... 4-62
Difference between predicted and CD/DVD/USB memory care and cleaning .............. ... 4-64
actual distances ................................................................
... 4-10 Steering wheel switch for audio control
How to adjust the screen (if so equipped) ............... ... 4-13 (if so equipped) ..............................................................
... 4-64
Operating tips ...................................................................
... 4-13 Antenna ............................................................................
... 4-65
AROUND VIEWTM MONITOR (if equipped) .................. ... 4-14 Car phone and CB radio ....................................................
... 4-66
How to switch the display .............................................
... 4-16 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
How to see each view ....................................................
... 4-17 (if so equipped) .....................................................................
... 4-67
Difference between predicted and Regulatory information ..................................................
... 4-68
actual distances ................................................................
... 4-20 Using the system ...........................................................
... 4-68
Operating tips ...................................................................
... 4-23 Control buttons ...............................................................
... 4-71
Ventilators .................................................................................
... 4-23 Getting started ...............................................................
... 4-71
Side ventilators .................................................................
... 4-23 List of voice commands ...............................................
... 4-73
Heater and air conditioner ...................................................
... 4-24 Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode .................................
... 4-76
Manual air conditioner .....................................................
... 4-24 Troubleshooting guide ..................................................
... 4-78
Automatic air conditioner ...............................................
... 4-27

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (162,1)

SAFETY NOTE
S35-D-110201-085FF441-F2C8-4C6E-ABB3-F2123CE126F8
tions may result in system malfunctions.
WARNING
. Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in
accidents, fire, or electric shock.
. Do not use this system if you notice
any abnormality, such as a frozen
screen or lack of sound. Continued
use of the system may result in
accident, fire or electric shock.
. In case you notice any foreign
object in the system hardware, spill
liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell
coming from it, stop using the
system immediately and contact
your nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignor-
ing such conditions may lead to
accidents, fire, or electric shock.
. Park the vehicle in a safe location
and apply the parking brake to view
the images on the front center dis-
play screen using devices connected
to the auxiliary input jacks.

Do not attempt to operate the system in

extreme temperature conditions [below
−48F (−208C) and above 1588F (708C)].
Operating this system under these condi-
4-2 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (163,1)

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
GUID-B91320C6-CA93-4DC0-9D1D-0B560BE93822
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
key shown only on the display. These keys can
be selected by touching the screen.
HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN
GUID-7C59B976-54A1-4D74-A77C-CF757A76A294

CAUTION
. The glass screen on the liquid
crystal display may break if it is hit
with a hard or sharp object. If the
glass breaks, do not touch the liquid
crystalline material, which contains
a small amount of mercury. In case
of contact with skin, wash immedi-
ately with soap and water.
SAA3377
. To clean the display, use a soft, dry
1. (brightness control) button 8. TUNE/SCROLL knob cloth. If additional cleaning is ne-
2. Display screen 9. Power button/Volume control knob cessary, use a small amount of
3. MAP button* *For Navigation system control buttons, refer to neutral detergent with a soft cloth.
4. NAV button* the separate Navigation System Owner’s Man- Never use a rough cloth, alcohol,
5. TRAF button* ual. benzine, thinner or any kind of
6. SETUP button (P.4-6) solvent or paper towel with a che-
When you use this system, make sure the mical cleaning agent. They will
7. BACK button
engine is running.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (164,1)

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

. Do not splash any liquid such as
water or car fragrance on the dis-
play. Contact with liquid will cause
the system to malfunction.

To ensure safe driving, some functions cannot

be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then
operate the navigation system.
SAA3386 SAA3387

WARNING Touch screenGUID-67B20698-8B04-4122-9E42-414B14750F5F

operation Adjusting the item:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

Selecting the item: For screens where an item can be adjusted

. ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
. Avoid using vehicle features that
could distract you. If distracted,
you could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Touch an item to select. For example, to select
the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key *
the screen.
incrementally, such as when adjusting the bass
and treble for the audio system, touch the “+”
1 on
key *1 or the “−” key * 2 to adjust the settings
of an item.
When there are more items than can be
displayed on one screen, touch the up arrow
*3 to scroll up the page or touch the down
arrow *4 to scroll down the page.

4-4 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


SAA3388
Other items are adjusted by selecting one of a
set number of conditions. For example, the
Display Mode can be set to “Automatic”, “Day”
or “Night”. To adjust this type of item, touch the
item * 1 . The item will cycle through the
available settings and the red indicator lights
to the left of the setting condition *2 will come
on or turn off accordingly.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (165,1)
. OK:
Completes the character input.
Touch screen maintenance
GUID-81BE922F-CC67-4C42-9828-DA9A2B268C8C
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or
detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe
the screen.
HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON
GUID-3731A0E9-D30B-4326-87CC-DE42F49C98C6
Push the BACK button to return to the
SAA3389
previous screen.
HOW TO USE BRIGHTNESS CON-
Inputting characters: TROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF BUTTON
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407 GUID-45C21C47-851E-4C30-8B09-DFE9F060C0A9
Touch the letter key * 1 .
To change the display brightness, push the
There are some options available when inputting button. Pushing the button again will change the
characters. display to the day or the night display.
. 123/ABC: If no operation is performed within 5 seconds,
Changes the available character set to the display will return to the previous display.
numbers. Push and hold the button for more than two
. Space: seconds to turn the display off. Push the button
Inserts a space. again to turn the display on.
. Delete:
Deletes the last inputted character with one
touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to
delete all of the characters.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
 Black plate (166,1)

SAA3390 SAA3396 SAA3397

HOW TO USE THE SETUP BUTTON

GUID-12359B90-6257-4C35-8D6D-868D31AAACA0
When the SETUP button is pushed, the Setup
screen will appear on the display. You can select
and/or adjust several functions, features and
modes that are available for your vehicle.
Audio setup GUID-3A0D33F6-B887-4B69-81BC-BE7B20D8CE08
Push the AUDIO button to adjust the following
items to the desired setting:
Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Controls the sound of the audio system. Balance
adjusts the sound between the left and right
speakers. Fade adjusts the sound between the
front and rear speakers.
Speed Volume: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Controls the level to which the volume is
adjusted as the vehicle’s driving speed changes.
Choose a setting between 1 and 5 or choose 0
to disable the feature entirely.
AUX Level: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Controls the volume level of incoming sound
when an auxiliary device is connected to the
system. Available options are Quiet, Medium
and Loud.

4-6 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (167,1)

Navigation setup
GUID-B9AA7DEB-75C8-439C-AB2C-CD5EB042E481
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
XM setup GUID-EABD1884-04E7-402A-A446-574F90206135
For XM setup, refer to “Audio system” later in
this section.

SAA3391 SAA3392

System setupGUID-28F2C574-E628-459B-BF48-5E85D07EDE74 Display: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

Select the “System” key to select and/or adjust
various functions of the system. A screen with
additional options will appear.
Select the “Display” key to adjust the appear-
ance of the display. The following settings can
be adjusted:
. Brightness:
The brightness of the display can be set to Very
Bright, Bright, Default, Dark or Very Dark. Touch
the “Brightness” key to cycle through the
options.
. Display Mode:
The display can be adjusted to fit the level of
lighting in the vehicle. Touch the “Display Mode”
key to cycle through the options. “Day” and
“Night” modes are suited for the respective

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (168,1)

times of day, while “Automatic” controls the . Daylight Savings Time:

display automatically. When this setting is activated, daylight savings
. Scroll Direction: time is on. Touch the “Daylight Savings Time”
The direction that menus scroll can be adjusted. key to toggle the setting on or off.
Choose either “up” or “down”. . Time Zone:
Choose the applicable time zone from the list.

SAA3393

Clock: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Select the “Clock” key to adjust the time and the
appearance of the clock on the display. The
following settings can be adjusted:
. Time Format:
The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
. Use GPS Clock:
When this setting is activated, the clock is set
and continually updated via the GPS used by
the Navigation System.
. Set Clock Manually:
When this setting is activated, the clock can be
set manually. Touch the “+” or “−” key to adjust
the hours and minutes up or down.
4-8 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (169,1)

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)
S35-D-110201-2F64DC1B-3CBB-41D0-8176-3FF7CF94DB67

Reset all settings/memory:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Select the “Reset All Settings/Memory” key to
return all settings to default and to clear the
memory.
Traffic setup GUID-227EBD73-F2E5-4100-A2D1-99989F787550
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
When the selector lever is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows
the view to the rear of the vehicle.
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in
detecting large stationary objects to help avoid
damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect
small objects below the bumper and may not
detect objects close to the bumper or on the
ground.

WARNING
SAA3395 . The rear view camera is a conve-
nience but it is not a substitute for
Language: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
proper backing up. Always turn and
Select the “Language” key to adjust the check that it is safe to do so before
language used by the system. The language backing up. Always back up slowly.
can be set to English, Français or Español. . Objects viewed in the RearView
Touch click: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407 Monitor differ from actual distance
because a wide-angle lens is used.
Select the “Touch Click” key to toggle the touch
Objects in the RearView Monitor
click feature on or off. When activated, a click
will appear visually opposite than
sound will be heard every time a key on the
when viewed in the rear view and
screen is touched.
outside mirrors.
Beep tones: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407 . Make sure that the lift gate is
Select the “Beep Tones” key to toggle the beep securely closed when backing up.
tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep . Underneath the bumper and the
sound will be heard every time a key on the corner areas of the bumper cannot
screen is touched. be viewed on the RearView Monitor
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


because of its monitoring range
limitation.
. Do not put anything on the rear view
camera.
. When washing the vehicle with
high-pressure water, be sure not to
spray it around the camera. Other-
wise, water may enter the camera
unit causing water condensation on
the lens, a malfunction, fire or an
electric shock.
. Do not strike the camera. It is a
precision instrument. Otherwise, it
may malfunction or cause damage
resulting in a fire or an electric
shock.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the lens.
4-10 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (170,1)
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED
AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
S35-D-110201-65C6F016-3036-40CB-BCA9-7E6F60BB027E
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line should be used as a reference only
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface.
The distance viewed on the monitor is for
reference only and may be different than the
actual distance between the vehicle and dis-
played objects.
SAA2776
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES S35-D-110201-90C6EB03-D1AD-43E9-8C29-AB01726784FA
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
bumper line *A are displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
. Red line * 1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
. Yellow line *2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
. Green line * 3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
. Green line * 4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
Vehicle width guide lines * 5 :
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
 Black plate (171,1)

any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor

further than it appears.

SAA1978 SAA3440

BackingS35-D-110201-723BFB5B-80F0-4A3F-AF31-9D21290A882E
up on a steep uphill BackingS35-D-110201-E22A423E-6FA0-4A11-9EF7-E7C850FD6622
up near a projecting object
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the
lines are shown closer than the actual distance. object if it projects over the actual backing up
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to course.
the place * A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m)
distance on the hill is the place *B . Note that

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (172,1)

course.

SAA3475 SAA1979

BackingS35-D-110201-5270CFCA-3E74-4D1F-B4B5-411B3FA93E38
up behind a projecting object BackingS35-D-110201-18CD6E66-0435-45A8-9DDA-6E621AA373AD
up on a steep downhill
The position * C is shown further than the When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
position * B in the display. However, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
position *C is actually at the same distance lines are shown further than the actual distance.
as the position * A . The vehicle may hit the For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to
object when backing up to the position * A if the place * A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m)
the object projects over the actual backing up distance on the hill is the place *B . Note that
4-12 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


any object on the hill is viewed in the monitor
closer than it appears.
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN (if so
equipped)
S35-D-110201-13D61027-722A-45AE-AFC0-8CFDC52BE5FB
To set up the RearView Monitor to your
preferred settings, push the SETTING button
while the RearView Monitor screen is displayed.
Each time the SETTING button is pushed, the
next setting item is selected. Turn the TUNE·SC-
ROLL control knob to adjust each item.
Available setting items:
. Brightness
. Contrast
. Tint
. Color
. Black Level
The setting items will disappear and the display
will return to the original screen if SETTING
button is pushed when the last setting item is
selected or if the screen is left without operation
for some time.
OPERATING TIPS
S35-D-110201-D230E307-9B7F-4AC1-8FCA-9B9030CC86BF
. When the selector lever is shifted to the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor screen auto-
matically changes to the RearView Monitor
mode. However, the radio can be heard.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 29 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (173,1)
. It may take some time until the RearView tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
Monitor or the normal screen is displayed dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent
after the selector lever has been shifted to R and then wipe with a dry cloth.
from another position or to another position . Do not damage the camera as the monitor
from R. Objects may be distorted momenta- screen may be adversely affected.
rily until the RearView Monitor screen is
. Do not use wax on the camera window.
displayed completely. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth
. When the temperature is extremely high or dampened with mild detergent diluted with
low, the screen may not clearly display water.
objects. This is not a malfunction.
. When strong light directly enters the cam-
era, objects may not be displayed clearly.
This is not a malfunction.
. Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
. The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
. The colors of objects on the RearView
Monitor may differ somewhat from those of
the actual object.
. Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night. This is not a
malfunction.
. If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
the RearView Monitor may not clearly dis-
play objects. Clean the camera.
. Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discolora-
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
 Black plate (174,1)

AROUND VIEWTM MONITOR (if

equipped)
GUID-3F356F81-D510-4416-955F-6B4EEAA895ED

. Front View
The view to the front of the vehicle.
. Rear View
The view to the rear of the vehicle..
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in
situations such as slot parking or parallel
parking.

JVH0112X

The CAMERA button is located on the center

console.
When you push the CAMERA button or shift the
selector lever into the “R” (Reverse) position
while the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the Around View Monitor operates. The monitor
displays various views of the position of the SAA3574
vehicle.
Available views: There are some areas where the system will not
detect objects. When in the front or the rear
. Bird’s-eye View
view display, an object below the bumper or on
The surrounding view of the vehicle. the ground may not be detected * 1 . When in
. Front-side View the bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam of
The view around and ahead of the front the camera detecting areas will not appear in the
passenger’s side wheel. monitor* 2 .

4-14 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (175,1)

. When washing the vehicle with

WARNING highpressure water, be sure not to
spray it around the cameras. Other-
. The Around View Monitor is a con- wise, water may enter the camera
venience but it is not a substitute for unit causing water condensation on
proper vehicle operation because it the lens, a malfunction, fire or an
has areas where objects cannot be electric shock.
viewed. The four corners of the
. Do not strike the cameras. They are
vehicle in particular, are blind spots
precision instruments. Doing so
where objects do not appear in the
could cause a malfunction or cause
bird’s-eye, front, or rear views. Al-
damage resulting in a fire or an
ways look out the windows and
electric shock.
check with your own eyes to be sure
that it is safe to move before
operating the vehicle. Always oper-
ate the vehicle slowly. CAUTION
. Do not use the Around View Monitor
with the outside mirror in the stored Do not scratch the lens when cleaning
position, and make sure that the lift dirt or snow from the front of the
gate is securely closed when oper- camera.
ating the vehicle using the Around
View Monitor.
. The distance between objects
viewed on the Around View Monitor
differs from the actual distance.
. The cameras are installed above the
front grille, the outside mirrors and
above the rear license plate. Do not
put anything on the cameras.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (176,1)

: Shift the selector/shift lever

: Push the CAMERA button

* : Original screen before the Around View
A
Monitor is operated
*
B : Rear view/bird-eye view screen

*
C : Rear view/front-side view screen

*
D : Front view/bird-eye view screen

*
E : Front view/front-side view screen

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

GUID-D37F843B-D01B-4873-B594-7DE0114813CC
The Around View Monitor display consists of the
left and the right screens. You can see a
combination of different views on the screens
as illustrated.
Activating Around View Monitor
GUID-B1BDCDBE-BFA1-4923-9E8B-23758B2340E8
Selector lever operation:
. When the selector lever is shifted into the
“R” (Reverse) position (* 1 ) while a screen
other than the Around View Monitor * A is
displayed, Around View Monitor is activated
and the rear view/bird’s-eye view screen * B
is displayed.
The screen * B switches back to screen*A
when the selector lever is shifted out of the
JVH0116M
“R” (Reverse) position (* 2 ).

4-16 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


CAMERA button operation:
. When the CAMERA button is pushed (* 8 )
while a screen other than the Around View
Monitor * is displayed, Around View
A The vehicle width and predictive course lines are
Monitor is activated and the front view/
bird’s-eye view screen *D is displayed.
Operations after activation
GUID-1590A1DD-599E-477D-B2B3-0FE4F614BE78
. When the rear view is displayed on the left
side on the screen (* B or * C ), the view on
the right side switches between the
bird’seye view * B and the front-side view
*C each time the CAMERA button is
pushed (* 3 ).
. When the front view/bird’s-eye view * D is
displayed on the screen, pushing the
CAMERA button (* 9 ) will switch the view
on the right side to the front-side view *E .
When the CAMERA button is pushed again
(*10 ), the screen which was displayed
before the Around View Monitor was acti-
vated * A is displayed.
. The view on the driver’s side switches to the
rear view (* B or * C ) when the selector
lever is shifted into the “R” (Reverse)
position (*5 or * 7 ).
The view will switch back to the front view
(*D or * E ) when the selector lever is
shifted out of the “R” (Reverse) position (*4
or * 6 ).
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (177,1)
HOW TO SEE EACH VIEW
GUID-146749CB-DC4D-4863-BBC3-66331435BE1A mirrors or actually look to properly
judge distances to other objects.
WARNING
. The distance guide line and the wider than the actual width and course.
vehicle width line should be used
as a reference only when the vehicle
is on a paved, level surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is
for reference only and may be
different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed
objects.
. Use the displayed lines and the bird-
eye view as a reference. The lines
and the bird-eye view are greatly
affected by the number of occu-
pants, fuel level, vehicle position,
road condition and road grade.
. If the tires are replaced with differ-
ent sized tires, the predictive course
line and the bird-eye view may be
displayed incorrectly.
. When driving the vehicle up a hill,
objects viewed in the monitor are
further than they appear. When
driving the vehicle down a hill,
objects viewed in the monitor are
closer than they appear. Use the
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

Front and rear view
GUID-CBAFB0D4-01CF-4C22-BEF3-FC1214620EB3
Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
vehicle body line *A , are displayed on the
monitor.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
. Red line * 1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
. Yellow line*2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
. Green line* 3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
. Green line* 4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)
Vehicle width guide lines * 5 :
SAA1840
Front view Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
Predicted course lines*
6 :
Indicate the predicted course when operating
the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be
displayed on the monitor when the steering
wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will
move depending on how much the steering
wheel is turned and will not be displayed while
the steering wheel is in the neutral position.
The front view will not be displayed when the
vehicle speed is above 6 MPH (10 km/h).
SAA1896
Rear view
4-18 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (178,1)
WARNING
. The distance between objects
viewed in the rear view may differ
from the actual distance. Objects in
the rear view will appear visually
opposite from those viewed in the
inside and outside mirrors.
. On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between
the predicted course line and the
actual course line.
. The displayed lines on the rear view
will appear slightly off to the right
because the rear view camera is not
installed in the rear center of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
When the monitor displays the front
view and the steering wheel turns about
90 degrees or less from the neutral
position, both the right and left pre-
dicted course lines * 6 are displayed.
When the steering wheel turns about 90
degrees or more, a predicted course

line is displayed only on the opposite
side of the turn.
SAA3570
Bird’s-eye view
GUID-50301F42-478E-4D89-939B-7FFBFE931E68
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of
the vehicle which helps confirm the vehicle
position and the predicted course to a parking
space.
The vehicle icon * 1 shows the position of the
vehicle. Note that the distance between objects
viewed in the bird’s-eye view differs from the
actual distance.
The areas that the cameras cannot cover *
2 are
indicated in black.
After the ignition switch is turned on, the
nonviewable area * 2 is highlighted in yellow
for 3 seconds after the bird’s-eye view is
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (179,1)
displayed.
In addition, the non-viewable corners are dis-
played in red (blink for the first 3 seconds) *
3
to remind the drivers to be cautious.
WARNING
. Objects in the bird’s-eye view will
appear further than the actual dis-
tance because the bird’s-eye view is
a pseudo view that is processed by
combining the views from the cam-
eras on the outside mirrors, the
front and the rear of the vehicle.
. Tall objects, such as a curb or
vehicle, may be misaligned or not
displayed at the seam of the views.
. Objects that are above the camera
cannot be displayed.
. The view for the bird’s-eye view may
be misaligned when the camera
position alters.
. A line on the ground may be mis-
aligned and is not seen as being
straight at the seam of the views.
The misalignment will increase as
the line proceeds away from the
vehicle.
4-19
 Black plate (180,1)

CAUTION
. There is a plastic cover over the
camera. Do not scratch the cover
when cleaning dirt or snow from the
cover.
. The turn signal light may overlap
with the side-of-vehicle line. This is
not a malfunction.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

SAA3571 AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
GUID-EB108E6F-FFB7-4017-9AA2-AC698DAE4B5B
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
Front-side view
GUID-8076DAE4-5740-4153-97B7-D23604255E79
guide line on the front and the rear view should
Guiding lines: be used as a reference only when the vehicle is
on a level, paved surface. The distance viewed
Guiding lines that indicate the width and the on the monitor is for reference only and may be
front end of the vehicle are displayed on the different than the actual distance between the
monitor. vehicle and displayed objects.
The front-of-vehicle line *
1 shows the front part
SAA1978
of the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line *2 shows the vehicle Moving to a GUID-B1B473C0-4A36-49DC-8575-42548B891124
steep uphill
width including the outside mirror.
When moving the vehicle up a hill, the distance
The extensions *3 of both the front *
1 and guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are
side *2 lines are shown with a green dotted shown closer than the actual distance. For
line. example, the display shows 3 ft (1 m) to the
place * A , but the actual 3 ft (1 m) distance on
the hill is the place *
B . Note that any object on
4-20 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (181,1)

the hill is viewed in the monitor further than it the hill is viewed in the monitor closer than it
appears. appears.

SAA1979

Moving to a steep downhill

GUID-DF650F08-D143-4AB0-890C-0A871FB28623
When moving the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown further than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1 m) to the
place * A , but the actual 3 ft (1 m) distance on
the hill is the place *
B . Note that any object on

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (182,1)

SAA1923 JVH0115M SAA1980

Moving near GUID-45695E62-599A-43BA-86C6-51CAFF6DBA96

a projecting object There may be a small distance visible between Moving closer to a projecting object
GUID-4A689DBE-9843-4AA4-80EA-C6C9AE4BD279
the vehicle and the object in the birdseye view
The predicted course lines * A do not touch the The position * C is shown further than the
on the display *B .
object in the display. However, the vehicle may position *B in the display. However, the
hit the object if it projects over the actual moving position *
C is actually at the same distance
course. as the position *A . The vehicle may hit the
object when moving toward the position *A if
the object projects over the actual moving
4-22 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (183,1)

VENTILATORS
S35-D-110201-2902BFED-B9AA-4CF2-9D44-C5D05BF5B964
course. . There may be differences in clearness
OPERATINGGUID-CF52BB42-FFBD-4B6D-ABD2-E53AE93EE69F
TIPS between each camera view of the bird’seye
view.
. The screen displayed on the Around View
. If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
Monitor will automatically return to the
the Around View Monitor may not display
previous screen when no operation takes
objects clearly. Clean the camera.
place for 3 minutes after the CAMERA
button has been pushed while the shift lever . Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
is in a position other than the “R” (Reverse) clean the camera. This will cause discolora-
position. tion. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
that has been dampened with a diluted mild
. The display of images on the screen may be
cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry
delayed after screens are switched. Objects
cloth.
in the Around View Monitor may be distorted
momentarily until the Around View Monitor . Do not damage the camera because the
monitor screen may be adversely affected. SAA1775
screen is displayed completely.
. When the temperature is extremely high or . Do not use wax on the camera window. SIDE VENTILATORS
GUID-7D2AD213-490F-4596-A188-7E529E37E640
low, the screen may not display objects Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has
been dampened with a mild detergent Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction
clearly. This is not a malfunction. of ventilators as illustrated.
diluted with water.
. When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly. This is not a malfunction.
. The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
. The colors of objects on the Around View
Monitor may differ somewhat from those of
the actual object.
. Objects on the monitor may not be clear and
the color of the object may differ in a dark
location or at night. This is not a malfunction.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (184,1)

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

S35-D-110201-73A25172-06C8-4D8E-A6DC-5CBD131ADC3A

WARNING
. The air conditioner cooling function
operates only when the engine is
running.
. Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. On
hot, sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or SAA1776
possibly fatal injuries to people or
animals. 1. Fan speed control dial MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER
S35-D-110201-BAF28FD4-665D-44FA-9913-B21AC9730C36
2. Temperature control dial
. Do not use the recirculation mode To turn off the heater and air conditioner, turn the
3. Air flow control dial
for long periods as it may cause the fan speed control dial to the OFF position.
4. Air recirculation button
interior air to become stale and the
5. A/C (Air Conditioner) button Controls
windows to fog up. S35-D-110201-528D314D-1240-4D18-9E3F-DC4286AC735C
6. Rear window defroster button (See “Rear window
Outside air circulation:
and outside mirror defroster switch” in the “2. GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Start the engine and operate the heater and air Instruments and controls” section.) Push the air recirculation button to turn off the
conditioner system. indicator light on the button. The air flow is
drawn from outside the vehicle.
Air recirculation:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Push the air recirculation button to turn on the
indicator light on the button. The air flow is
circulated inside the vehicle.

4-24 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (185,1)

Air flow control:GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

Turn the air flow control dial to change the air
flow mode.
— Air flows from the center and side ventila-
tors with maximum cooling (air condition-
ing). (The air recirculation and A/C will
be automatically turned on.)
— Air flows from the center and side ventila-
tors.
— Air flows from the center and side ventila-
tors and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.
— Air flows from the defroster and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from the defroster outlets.
. You can also select the middle position
A/C (Air Conditioner) operation:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
center ventilators.
Push the A/C button to turn on or off the air 1. Push the air recirculation button to the
conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, the OFF position. (The indicator light turns off.)
A/C indicator light on the button illuminates. 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
Temperature control: position.
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Turn the temperature control dial to set the 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the
desired temperature. Turn the dial between the desired position.
middle and the right position to select the hot 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the
temperature. Turn the dial between the middle desired position.
and the left position to select the cool tempera-
ture. Defrosting or defogging:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
This mode directs the air to the defroster outlets
Heater S35-D-110201-1491AD0D-22C6-45F1-B821-82C280A00A69
operation to defrost/defog the windows.
Heating: 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

between and or between and This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot position.
. outlets. 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the
. When the , or position is 1. Push the air recirculation button to the desired position.
selected, the air recirculation mode OFF position. (The indicator light turns off.) 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the
cannot be turned on to prevent the windows 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
from being fogged up. position. hot (right) position.
Fan speed control: 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the . To remove frost from the outside surface of
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise desired position. the windshield quickly, turn the temperature
(HI) to increase the fan speed. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the control dial to the maximum hot position and
desired position between the middle and the the fan speed control dial to maximum
Turn the fan speed control dial counter- (HI) position.
clockwise (LO) to decrease the fan speed. hot (right) position.
. If it is difficult to defog the windshield, turn
Ventilation: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
the A/C button on.
This mode directs outside air to the side and

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (186,1)

Bi-level heating:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Air conditioner operation
S35-D-110201-B5067E1C-0586-411F-A263-C1D511C1E269
Dehumidified heating:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
This mode directs cool air from the side and The air conditioner system should be operated This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the
center vents and warm air from the foot outlets. for approximately 10 minutes at least once a air.
When the temperature control dial is turned to month. This helps prevent damage to the air 1. Push the air recirculation button to the
the maximum hot or cool position, the air conditioner system due to the lack of lubrication. OFF position. (The indicator light turns off.)
between the ventilators and the foot outlets is
Cooling: 2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
the same temperature. GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air. position.
1. Push the air recirculation button to the
1. Push the air recirculation button to the 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the
OFF position. (The indicator light turns off.)
OFF position. (The indicator light turns off.) desired position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the 4. Push the A/C button on. (The A/C indicator
position.
position. light will illuminate.)
3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the
3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
desired position. desired position between the middle and the
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the hot (right) position.
desired position. 4. Push the A/C button on. (The A/C indicator
light will illuminate.) Dehumidified defogging:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Heating and defogging:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the This mode is used to defog the windows and
This mode heats the interior and defogs the desired position between the middle and the dehumidify the air.
windows. cool (left) position. 1. Turn the air flow control dial to the
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the . For quick cooling when the outside tem- position.
position. perature is high, push the air recirculation 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the
2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the button to the ON position. Be sure to desired position.
desired position. push the air recirculation button to the OFF
3. Push the A/C button on. (The A/C indicator
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the position for normal cooling.
light will illuminate.)
desired position. . A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a desired position.
malfunction.

4-26 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


SAA1792
1. Air flow control dial
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER
S35-D-110201-BEC77647-C26F-4618-9EB8-9389ACFE0521
2. Temperature control dial
3. Fan speed control dial Automatic operation (AUTO)
S35-D-110201-1871447E-05CD-4F57-8BBF-AD87DCECB2B3
4. Rear window defroster button (See “Rear window The AUTO mode may be used all year around as
and outside mirror defroster switch” in the “2. the system automatically controls constant
Instruments and controls” section.) temperature, air flow distribution and fan speed.
5. Outside air circulation /Air recirculation
button
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, turn the
fan speed control dial to the OFF position.
6. A/C (Air Conditioner) button
Cooling and dehumidified heating:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
1. Turn the air flow control dial and fan speed
control dial to the AUTO position.
2. If the A/C indicator light does not illuminate,
push the A/C button. (The A/C indicator
light will illuminate.)
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 30 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (187,1)
3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
4. Press the outside air circulation /air
recirculation button once to change
operation of the air conditioner in the
following order.
Air recirculation mode ?Outside air circula-
tion mode?Automatic control mode?Air
recirculation mode
When automatic control mode is set, the air
recirculation indicator and outside air circu-
lation indicator will turn off.
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
Heating (A/C off):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
1. Turn the air flow control dial and fan speed
control dial to the AUTO position.
2. If the A/C indicator light illuminates, push the
A/C button. (The A/C indicator light will turn
off.)
3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
4. Press the outside air circulation /air
recirculation button once to change
operation of the air conditioner in the
following order.
4-27

Air recirculation mode ?Outside air circula-
tion mode?Automatic control mode?Air
recirculation mode
When automatic control mode is set, the air
recirculation indicator and outside air circu-
lation indicator will turn off.
. Do not set the temperature lower than the
outside air temperature. Doing so may
cause the temperature to not be con-
trolled properly.
. If the windows fog up, use dehumidified
heating instead of the A/C off heating.
Dehumidified defrosting/defogging:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
1. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired
position.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to the
position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
. To remove frost from the outside surface
of the windshield quickly, set the tem-
perature control dial and fan speed
control dial to their maximum position.
. After the windshield is cleared, turn the
air flow control dial to the AUTO position
to set to the automatic mode.
. When the or position is
selected, the air conditioner will auto-
4-28 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 30 Model: S35-D ]
matically turn on when the outside air
temperature is above 238F (−58C) to
defog the windshield. The air recircula-
tion mode will automatically turn off. The
outside air circulation mode will be
selected to improve the defogging per-
formance.
Manual S35-D-110201-64BD9C67-FE06-4C14-8430-C1B0E10FB963
operation
The manual mode can be used to control the
heater and air conditioner to your desired
settings.
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, turn the
fan control dial to the OFF position.
Fan speed control:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise to
increase the fan speed.
Turn the fan speed control dial counterclockwise
to decrease the fan speed.
Turn the fan speed control dial to the AUTO
position to change the fan speed to the
automatic mode.
Air flow control:GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Turn the air flow control dial to change the air
flow mode.
Black plate (188,1)
: Air flows from the center and side ventila-
tors.
: Air flows from the center and side ventila-
tors and foot outlets.
: Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.
: Air flows from the defroster and foot
outlets.
Temperature control:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
Air recirculation:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Push the outside air circulation /air recircu-
lation button to change the air circulation
mode.
When the indicator below the air recirculation
icon is illuminated, the flowing air is
recirculated inside the vehicle.
Outside air circulation:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Push the outside air circulation /air recircu-
lation button to change the air circulation
mode.
When the indicator below the outside air
circulation icon is illuminated, the flowing
air is drawing from outside the vehicle.
Automatic air GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
intake control:
Press the outside air circulation /air recircu-
lation button once to change operation of
the air conditioner in the following order.

Air recirculation mode ?Outside air circulation
mode?Automatic control mode?Air recircula-
tion mode
When automatic control mode is set, the air
recirculation indicator and outside air circulation
indicator will turn off.
SERVICING GUID-6DED59C6-5F9F-4BD9-990B-85372E93B241
AIR CONDITIONER
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains
refrigerant under high pressure. To
avoid personal injury, any air condi-
tioner service should be done only by
an experienced technician with the
proper equipment.
The air conditioner system in your vehicle is
charged with a refrigerant designed with the
environment in mind.
This refrigerant will not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. However, it may contribute in a
small part to global warming.
Special charging equipment and lubricant are
required when servicing your vehicle’s air con-
ditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubri-
cants will cause severe damage to the air
conditioner system. (See “Air conditioning sys-
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 30 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (189,1)
tem refrigerant and lubricant recommendations”
in the “9. Technical and consumer information”
section.)
A NISSAN dealer will be able to service your
environmentally friendly air conditioner system.
Air conditioner filter
GUID-DF641D2F-1DDE-4BEF-B8EC-51EC605C221C
The air conditioner system is equipped with an
air conditioner filter which collects dirt, pollen,
dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats
defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the
filter according the specified maintenance inter-
vals listed in a separate maintenance booklet. To
replace the filter, contact a NISSAN dealer. SAA2263
The filter should be replaced if the air flow
decreases significantly or if windows fog up
easily when operating the heater or air condi-
tioner.
SAA1233
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

OPERATING TIPS (for automatic air
conditioner)
S35-D-110201-204DEB50-2997-43B8-918C-A846A9D5B972
When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a
malfunction. After the coolant temperature
warms up, the air flow from the foot outlets will
operate normally.
The sensors * 1 and * 2 , located on the
instrument panel, help maintain a constant
temperature. Do not put anything on or around
the sensors.
4-30 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (190,1)
AUDIO SYSTEM
S35-D-110201-FF22825B-7F99-4AB6-9E28-41EB279FC012
AUDIOS35-D-110201-3D092FAC-8CEF-44D7-BBC0-FFCD53E6E3D9
OPERATION PRECAUTIONS function in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly change
Radio
S35-D-110201-3A22B0FB-171D-47DD-B377-D4B26CA92D9C because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON signal distance and interference from other
position and push the radio band select button vehicles can work against ideal reception.
to turn on the radio. If you listen to the radio with Described below are some of the factors that
the engine not running, the ignition switch can affect your radio reception.
should be placed in the ACC position.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
Radio reception is affected by station signal cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build- from the audio system speakers. Storing the
ings, bridges, mountains and other external device in a different location may reduce or
influences. Intermittent changes in reception eliminate the noise.
quality normally are caused by these external
influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the
vehicle may influence radio reception
quality.
Radio reception: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance
radio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the
quality of that reception.
However there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These
characteristics are completely normal in a given
reception area, and do not indicate any mal-

SAA0306
FM radio reception:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30
miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single
channel) FM having slightly more range than
stereo FM. External influences may sometimes
interfere with FM station reception even if the
FM station is within 25 miles (40 km). The
strength of the FM signal is directly related to the
distance between the transmitter and receiver.
FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting
many of the same characteristics as light. For
example they will reflect off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,
usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter, static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the
treble setting to reduce the treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-
flected signals reach the receiver at the same
time. The signals may cancel each other,
resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.
AM radio reception:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics. AM signals are also
subject to interference as they travel from
transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Black plate (191,1)
Satellite radioGUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
reception (if so equipped):
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a
malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with the
satellite radio ON and the vehicle outside of any
metal or large building for the satellite radio to
receive all of the necessary data.
The satellite radio mode requires an active XM®
Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
The satellite radio performance may be affected
if cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite
radio signal.
If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite
antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna
can affect satellite radio performance. Remove
the ice to restore satellite radio reception.
4-31

ventilate the player completely.
. The player may skip while driving on rough
roads.
. The CD player sometimes cannot function
when the passenger compartment tempera-
ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-
perature before use.
. Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm) round
discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGI-
TAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging.
. Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
. CDs that are of poor quality, dirty, scratched,
covered with fingerprints, or that have pin
holes may not work properly.
. The following CDs may not work properly:
— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
. Do not use the following CDs as they may
cause the CD player to malfunction.
SAA0480
— 3.1 in (8 cm) discs
— CDs that are not round
Compact Disc (CD) player
S35-D-110201-9FC2147B-E5F1-441F-8BDC-D54E3944EFF9 — CDs with a paper label
. Do not force a compact disc into the CD
— CDs that are warped, scratched, or have
insert slot. This could damage the CD and/
abnormal edges
or CD player.
. This audio system can only play prerecorded
. During cold weather or rainy days, the player
CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
CDs.
occurs, remove the CD and dehumidify or
4-32 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (192,1)
. If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
CHECK DISC:
— Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly
(the label side is facing up, etc.).
— Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PUSH EJECT:
This is an error due to the temperature inside
the player is too high. Remove the CD by
pushing the EJECT button, and after a short
time reinsert the CD. The CD can be played
when the temperature of the player returns
to normal.
UNPLAYABLE:
The file is unplayable in this audio system
(only MP3 or WMA CD).
USB (Universal Serial Bus) devices (if so
equipped)
S35-D-110201-4ADBF1EE-61FC-4537-A838-76C3A039A813
This system supports various USB memory
sticks, USB hard drives and iPod® players.
There are some USB devices which may not be
supported with this system.
. Make sure that the USB device is connected
correctly into the USB connector.
. Do not force the memory stick or USB cable
into the USB connector. This could damage
the connector.

. During cold weather or rainy days, the player
may malfunction due to humidity. If this
occurs, remove the USB device and dehu-
midify or ventilate the USB player comple-
tely.
. The USB player sometimes cannot function
when the passenger compartment tempera-
ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-
perature before use.
. Do not leave USB memory in a place prone
to static electricity or where the air condi-
tioner blows directly. The data in the USB
memory may be damaged.
. The vehicle is not equipped with a USB
memory stick.
. A USB device cannot be formatted with this
system. To format a USB device, use a
personal computer.
. Partitioned USB devices may not be played
correctly.
. Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on the vehicle center screen. Using
English language characters with a USB
device is recommended.
. Do not connect a USB device if a connector
or cable is wet. Allow the cable and/or
connectors to dry completely before con-
necting the USB device. If the connector is
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
exposed to fluids other than water, evapora-
tive residue may cause a short between the
connector pins.
. Large video podcast files cause slow
responses in an iPod®. The vehicle center
display may momentarily black out, but it will
soon recover.
. If an iPod® automatically selects large video
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily
black out, but it will soon recover.
. Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on an iPod®.
. An iPod nano® (1st Generation) may remain
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPod®.
. An iPod nano® (2nd Generation) will con-
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is
disconnected during a seek operation.
. An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using the iPod
nano® (2nd Generation)
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Black plate (193,1)
Compressed Audio Files (MP3/WMA/
AAC/ATRAC3)
S35-D-110201-C3996133-4D8C-45B5-A30C-933C6D736EBF
Explanation ofGUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
terms:
. MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track can reduce the file size by
approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1
kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no
perceptible loss in quality. The compression
reduces certain parts of sound that seem
inaudible to most people.
. WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a
compressed audio format created by Micro-
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
. AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding
(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.
Audio files that have been encoded with
AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver
a higher quality of sound than MP3.
4-33
 Black plate (194,1)

. ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus - Adaptive Trans- . The playback order is the order in which the
form Acoustic Coding (ATRAC) is a lossy files were written by the writing software, so
audio compression format developed by the files might not play in the desired order.
Sony. . Music playback order of compressed audio
. Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of files is as illustrated.
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
. Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
. Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is
called a multisession.
. ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, album title, SAA2494
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
Playback order:
ID3 tag information is displayed on the GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-
tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States of America
and/or other countries.
. The folder names of folders not containing
compressed audio files are not shown in the
display.
. If there is a file in the top level of a disc/USB,
“Root Folder” is displayed.

4-34 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (195,1)

Specification chart (for FM-AM Radio with Compact Disc (CD) player):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Supported file systems
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are
not supported.
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
Supported versions*1
Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
WMA*2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation 64 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16
Displayable character codes*3 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little
Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (196,1)

Specification chart (for FM-AM-SAT Radio with Compact Disc (CD) Player (Type A)):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB2.0

CD, CD-R, CD-RW: ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Supported file systems * Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are
not supported.
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
Version MPEG1 Audio Layer 3
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Supported versions*1 WMA*2 Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
Version MPEG-AAC
AAC Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)
Tag information (Song title and Artist name) WMA tag (WMA only)
AAC tag (AAC only)
CD, CD-R, CD-RW Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders 255, Files: 2500 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
USB
Memory size: 4GB
Text character number limitation 26 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16
Displayable character codes*3 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little
Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

4-36 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (197,1)

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
Specification chart (for FM-AM-SAT Radio with Compact Disc (CD) Player (Type B)):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB2.0

ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet
Supported file systems
writing) is not supported.
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
Supported versions*1
Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
WMA Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation 128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16
Displayable character codes*2 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little
Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (198,1)

Troubleshooting guide (for FM-AM Radio with Compact Disc (CD) player):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before
using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Cannot play Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes
and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of
MP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time before the music If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required
starts playing. before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc.,
Music cuts off or skips
might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is
Move immediately to the next song when playing. prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the
next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play
The songs do not play back in the desired order. in the desired order.

4-38 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (199,1)

Troubleshooting guide (for FM-AM-SAT Radio with Compact Disc (CD) player (Type A)):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Check if the disc or USB device was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before
using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-
DA data) will be played.
Cannot play
Files with extensions other than “.MP3 (.mp3)”, “.WMA (.wma)”, “.AAC (.aac)” or “.M4A (.m4a)” cannot be played. In
addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the
specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of
compressed audio writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc or USB device is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time before the music If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB device, some time may be required before the music starts
starts playing. playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc.,
Music cuts off or skips
might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like .MP3, or when play is prohibited by
Move immediately to the next song when playing.
copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the
The songs do not play back in the desired order. desired order.
Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (200,1)

Troubleshooting guide (for FM-AM-SAT Radio with Compact Disc (CD) Player (Type B)):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before
using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Cannot play If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data)
will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes
and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Poor sound quality
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time before the music If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required
starts playing. before the music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc.,
Music cuts off or skips
might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is
Move immediately to the next song when playing prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the
next song.
Songs do not play back in the desired order The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play
in the desired order.

4-40 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (201,1)

15. PWR (power) button/VOL (volume) control knob

16 AUX IN jack
17. AUDIO button
18. TUNE/FF·REW button
19. SCAN/RPT (repeat) button
FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC
(CD) PLAYER
S35-D-110201-7F3EC8FB-22B5-4244-A10C-C0DBE2251A7F
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-
tion precautions” earlier in this section.
Audio main operation
S35-D-110201-CB88F338-7D68-4C7D-B2E4-2761839D6DD6

Head unit: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically in both
radio reception and CD playback.
ON·OFF/Volume control:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and then push the PWR button while
the system is off to call up the normal mode
(radio, CD, AUX and iPod®) which was playing
SAA2782 immediately before the system was turned off.
While the system is on, pushing the PWR button
1. MUTE button 8. Audio display
turns the system off.
2. DISP (display)/TEXT button 9. CLOCK button
3. FM·AM radio band select button 10. CD EJECT button Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.
4. CD PLAY button 11. iPod® MENU button
5. Station preset buttons 12. SEEK/TRACK button MUTE button:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
6. iPod® button 13. ENTER button Push the button to mute the audio sound.
7. AUX (auxiliary) button 14 BACK button Push the button again to release the mute
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (202,1)

setting.
CLOCK button:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

AUDIO button: Push the CLOCK button to turn on or off the

GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
CLOCK display.
Push the AUDIO button to change the selecting
mode as follows.

NOS2545

Push the TUNE ( , ) or SEEK ( , )

button to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired
level. Use the TUNE or SEEK button also to
adjust Fade or Balance modes. Fade adjusts the
sound level between the front and rear speakers
and Balance adjusts the sound between the SIC4131
right and left speakers.
Push the CLOCK button *
1 to turn the clock on
To turn the beep sound off or on, push the TUNE or off.
or SEEK button until the desired mode is
displayed. This turns on or off the beep sound
1. Push and hold the CLOCK button *
1 until
the clock display starts to flash.
when audio buttons are pushed.
2. Push the SEEK/TRACK button *
2 to adjust
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (Spd
the hours.
Sen Vol) mode to OFF, LOW, MID or HIGH,
push the TUNE or SEEK button until the desired 3. Push the TUNE/FF·REW button *
3 to
mode is displayed. adjust the minutes.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the 4. Push the CLOCK button *
1 again to exit
desired level, push the AUDIO button repeatedly the clock set mode.
until the normal mode display reappears. Other- The display will return to the regular clock
wise, the normal mode display will automatically display after 5 seconds.
reappear after approximately 5 seconds.

4-42 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (203,1)

Radio operation
S35-D-110201-5CFF91BB-BBB0-4B7F-B234-E74EABB5CC53
during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN Radio Data System (RDS):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a
Radio (FM/AM) band select: station. data information service transmitted by some
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Pushing the FM·AM radio band select button will If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within 5 radio stations on the FM band (not AM band)
change the band as follows: seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next encoded within a regular radio broadcast.
station. Currently, most RDS stations are in large cities,
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
but many stations are now considering broad-
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the to Station memory operations:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407 casting RDS data.
radio will automatically change from stereo to 12 stations can be set for the FM band (6 each
RDS can display:
monaural reception. for FM1 and FM2), and 6 can be set for the AM
band for easy access. . Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
When the radio band select button is pushed
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON 1. Choose the radio band using the radio band . Station name, such as “The Groove”.
position, the radio will come on at the station last select button. . Music or programming type such as “Clas-
played. sical”, “Country” or “Rock”.
2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,
SCAN or TUNE button. . Traffic reports about delays or construction.
TUNE (Tuning): If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407 3. Push and hold the desired radio station
Push the TUNE button or for manual RDS icon is displayed.
preset button to until a beep sound is
tuning. To move quickly through the stations, heard. (The radio mutes when the radio
push and hold the TUNE button. station preset button is pushed.) RADIO DISPLAY change:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

SEEK tuning:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Push the SEEK button or to tune from
low to high or high to low frequencies and to
stop at the next broadcasting station.
SCAN tuning:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Push the SCAN button to tune from low to high
frequencies and stops at each broadcasting
station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again
4. The station indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
complete.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
When the DISP button is pushed during the FM
radio mode, the radio display will change in the
following order.
FM radio:
Frequency ↔ PS (Programme Service)/PTY
(Programme type)
In the FM radio mode, pushing the DISP button
will switch the frequency display to the PTY
display (if available), and if the DISP button is
not pushed again within 5 seconds, it will
4-43

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


automatically switch to the PS display. If PTY is
not available, pressing the DISP button will only
switch between the frequency display and the
PS display.
Compact Disc (CD) player operation
S35-D-110201-8EDF958F-CBBC-4976-8BEB-2FC7318F874F
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and insert the CD into the slot with the
label side facing up. The CD will be guided
automatically into the slot and start playing.
After loading the disc, the number of tracks on
the disc will appear on the display.
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
matically turn off and the CD will play.
If the system has been turned off while the CD
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start
the CD.
Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.
CD PLAY:GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the CD button is pushed with the system
off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on
and the CD will start to play.
When the CD button is pushed with the CD
loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the CD will start
to play.
4-44 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (204,1)
the CD will play while forwarding or rewinding.
CD play GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
information:
When the button is released, the CD will return
When the DISP button is pushed for less than to the normal play speed.
1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the
disc information display will change as follows: APS (Automatic Program
CD:
Search) FF, APS REW:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the button is pushed while the CD is
being played, the program next to the present
NOS2585
one will start to play from its beginning. Push
CD with MP3 or WMA: several times to skip through programs. The CD
will advance the number of times the button is
pushed. (When the last program on the CD is
NOS2586 skipped through, the first program will be
played.)
When the button is pushed, the program
FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-
being played returns to its beginning. Push
wind):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407 several times to skip back through programs.
CD: The CD will go back the number of times the
When the or button is pushed while button is pushed.
the CD is being played, the CD will play while
fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is SCAN tuning:
released, the CD will return to normal play
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the SCAN tuning button is pushed for
speed. more than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being
CD with MP3 or WMA: played, the beginning of all the tracks of CD will
be played for 10 seconds in sequence.
When the or button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, Pushing the button again during this 10 second
the folders in the CD will change. period will stop SCAN tuning.
When the or button is pushed for more If the SCAN tuning button is not pushed within
than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, 10 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

disc program.
RANDOM (RDM)/REPEAT (RPT):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the RPT button is pushed for less than
1.5 seconds while the CD is being played, the
play pattern can be changed as follows:
CD:
NOS2554
CD with MP3 or WMA:
NOS2587
CD EJECT:GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.
When this button is pushed while the CD is
being played, the CD will come out and the
system will turn off.
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it
will be pulled back into the slot to protect
it.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SAA3427
system for iPod® operation
InterfaceS35-D-110201-B1BD16DD-8E4F-4352-971B-0EE7967EDE42
®
Connecting iPod :
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
®
The iPod outlet connector is located in the
center console. Connect the cable * 1 as
illustrated, and then connect the other end of
the cable to your iPod® * 2 . Your vehicle is
equipped with the specialized cable for con-
necting the iPod® to your vehicle audio unit. The
battery of your iPod® is charged while it is
connected to the vehicle if the iPod® supports
charging via a FireWire® connection.
When the connection is complete, a NISSAN
logo will be displayed on the iPod® and an iPod®
icon on the audio display illuminates. While
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Black plate (205,1)
connecting the iPod® to the vehicle, the iPod®
can only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
To disconnect the cable from the vehicle outlet,
fully depress the center connector button to
unlatch the connector and pull the connector
straight out of the outlet. To disconnect the
cable from the iPod®, fully depress the side
connector buttons and pull the iPod® connector
straight out of the iPod®.
* iPod®, iPhone® and FireWire® are a trademark
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Compatibility: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The following models are available:
. Fourth generation iPod® (Firmware version
3.1.1 or later)
. Fifth generation iPod® (Firmware version
1.1.2 or later)
. First generation iPod Classic® (Firmware
version 1.3 or later)
. Second generation iPod Classic® (Firmware
version 1.3 or later)
. First, second and third generation iPod
touch® (Firmware version 3.1.0 or later)
. First and second generation iPod mini®
(Firmware version 1.4.1 or later)
4-45
 Black plate (206,1)

. iPod photo® (Firmware version 1.2 or later)

Top menu item selecting:
. First generation iPod nano® (Firmware ver- GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407 NOS2560
sion 1.3.1 or later) When the iPod® MENU button is pushed while
the iPod® is connected, the interface for iPod® * Artist Name will not be displayed for a Podcast.
. Second generation iPod nano® (Firmware
operation is shown on the audio display. The
version 1.1.3 or later) FF (Fast Forward), REW (Re-
items on the menu list can be scrolled by
. Third generation iPod nano® (Firmware pushing the SEEK button or and the wind) button: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
version 1.2 or later) TUNE button or while the iPod® is When the or button is pushed for more
. iPhone® (Firmware version 3.1 or later) operational. To select an item, push ENTER. The than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the
. iPhone® 3G (Firmware version 3.1 or later) display can be changed as follows: iPod® will play while fast forwarding or rewind-
. iPhone® 3GS (Firmware version 3.1 or later) ing. When the button is released, the iPod® will
The fourth and fifth generation iPod nano®, iPod NOS2559 return to the normal play speed.
touch®, the second generation iPod Classic® When the or button is pushed for less
and iPhone® 3G may not work with the system For more information about each item, see the
iPod® Owner’s Manual. than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the
in some cases. next track or the beginning of the current track
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated. on the iPod® will be played.
ENTER, BACK button:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
* 12V-charge iPod®s are not chargeable with . When the ENTER button is pushed while
this system. APS (Automatic Program
the top menu is displayed, program details Search) FF, APS REW button:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
are shown on the audio display.
iPod® button:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407 . To select the program, push to search using
When the or button is pushed for more
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing,
the SEEK or and ENTER button.
position. Then, push the iPod® button to switch numbers of tracks can be skipped through.
. When the BACK button is pushed, it returns
to the iPod® mode. to the previous display. When the or button is pushed for less
If another audio source is playing and the iPod ® than 1.5 seconds while iPod® is playing, the next
is connected, pushing the iPod® button changes track or the beginning of the current track on the
iPod® play information:
to the iPod® mode.
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407 iPod® will be played.
When the DISP button is pushed while a
If the system has been turned off while the iPod® program is being played, the program informa- REPEATGUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
(RPT), RANDOM (RDM):
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start tion display will change as follows:
the iPod®. When the RPT button is pushed while a track is
4-46 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (207,1)

being played, the play pattern can be changed mini plug cable when connecting your music
as follows: device to the audio system. Music may not play
Except Podcast and Audiobook: properly when a monaural cable is used.

NOS2562

Podcast:
ALL REPEAT ↔ TRACK REPEAT
Audiobook:

NOS2563

AUX (Auxiliary) input

S35-D-110201-62552443-6B6E-4335-BC14-EDB1F675D5A5

AUX IN jack: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from a
portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or
laptop computer.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:

GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
With an AUX device plugged in, push the AUX
button repeatedly until the display changes to
the AUX mode.
When the AUX button is pushed with no device
plugged into the jack, the audio system does not
change to the AUX mode.
NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (208,1)

FM-AM-SAT(if so equipped) RADIO

WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER
(Type A)S35-D-110201-36B80692-3C57-45F7-900C-1872B77C8641
1. FM·AM band select button
2. CD EJECT button
3. DISP (display) button
4. Color display
5. iPod® MENU button
6. Radio SCAN tuning button
7. BACK button
8. PWR (power) button/VOL (volume) control knob
9. RPT (repeat) play button
10. RDM (random) play button
11. Radio station preset select buttons
12. AUX IN jack
13. TUNE·SCROLL control knob
14. ENTER/SETTING button

JVH0109X

4-48 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


JVH0110X JVH0111X
models with satellite radio models without satellite radio
1. CD·AUX button 1. AUX button
2. XM band select button 2. CD button
3. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind) button for 3. REW (rewind) button for SEEK/TRACK
SEEK/TRACK 4. FF (fast forward) button for SEEK/TRACK
4. Radio CAT (category)/FF (fast forward) button for For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-
SEEK/TRACK
tion precautions” earlier in this section.
For models with satellite radio:
. No satellite radio reception is available when
the SAT band option is selected unless the
optional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed, and there is an active XM Satellite
Radio subscription.
. The satellite radio mode requires an active
XM Satellite Radio subscription. The satel-
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (209,1)
lite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
. It may take some time to receive the
activation signal after subscribing the XM
Satellite Radio. After receiving the activation
signal, an available channel list will be
automatically updated in the radio. For XM,
place the ignition switch from LOCK to ACC
to update the channel list.
Audio main operation
S35-D-110201-62364244-60D7-41AF-886E-4DC38A679472
Head unit: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically in both
radio reception and CD playback.
PWR/Volume GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and then push the PWR button while
the system is off to turn on the last audio source,
which was playing immediately before the
system was turned off. While the system is on,
pushing the PWR button turns the system off.
Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.
SETTINGGUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
button:
The settings screen will appear when pushing
the SETTING button.
The following items are available in the settings
4-49
 Black plate (210,1)

screen. the preferred level.

. Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade . Clock Adjust
Controls the sound of the audio system. Adjust the clock according to the following
Balance adjusts the sound between the left procedure.
and right speakers. Fade adjusts the sound
between the front and rear speakers.
Select the "Bass", "Treble", "Balance" or
"Fade" using the TUNE·SCROLL control
knob and then push the SETTING button.
Turn the TUNE·SCROLL control knob to
adjust the Bass, Treble, balance and Fade of
the screen to the preferred level.
. Speed Sens Vol. JVH0117X
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume
(Speed Sens Vol.) level from off (0) to 5, 1) Push the SETTING button * 1 until
turn the TUNE·SCROLL control knob. “Setting Clock” and “Clock Adjust”
. AUX Vol. appear on the display.
Controls the volume level of incoming sound 2) Turn the TUNE·SCROLL control knob
when an auxiliary device is connected to the *2 to adjust the hour.

system. Choose a setting between 1 and 3 3) Push the SETTING button * 1 .

or choose 0 to disable the feature entirely. 4) Turn the TUNE·SCROLL control knob
. Brightness and Contrast *2 to adjust the minute.

Adjust the brightness and contrast of the 5) Push the SETTING button * 1 .
screen. . On-Screen Clock
Select the "brightness" or "contrast" using When this item is turned on, a clock is
the TUNE·SCROLL control knob and then always displayed in the upper right corner of
push the SETTING button. Turn the TU- the screen.
NE·SCROLL control knob to adjust the Select the "On-Screen Clock" using the
brightness and contrast of the screen to TUNE·SCROLL control knob and then push
4-50 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 29 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (211,1)

the SETTING button. You can toggle be-
tween ON and OFF using the TUNE·SC-
ROLL control knob.
. RDS Display
When this has been set to ON, RDS (radio
data system) information will be shown on
the display. Select RDS Display and then
push the SETTING button. You can toggle
between ON and OFF using the TUNE·SC-
ROLL control knob.
. iPod Menu language
The iPod menu language can be set to
English, French or Spanish.
Select iPod menu language and then push
the SETTING button. Use the TUNE·SC-
ROLL control knob to select the preferred
language.
DISP button:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
displays as follows: If another audio source is playing when the radio
CD ? iPod®/USB ? AUX ? CD band select button is turned to ON, the audio
. Models without satellite radio source will automatically be turned off and the
last radio channel played will come on.
Pushing the AUX button will switch the
displays as follows: When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the
iPod®/USB ? AUX ? iPod®/USB radio will automatically change from stereo to
monaural reception.
FM-AM-SAT(if so equipped) radio op-
TUNE (Tuning):GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
eration S35-D-110201-60FFC3FC-9361-461B-81BC-20D3709F43CC
. For AM and FM radio
radio (FM/AM) band select: Turn the radio TUNE·SCROLL control knob
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
for manual tuning.
Pushing the radio band select button will
change the band as follows: . For XM Satellite Radio
Turn the radio TUNE·SCROLL control knob
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
to seek channels from all of the categories
when any category is not selected.
radio (SAT) band select (models with
satellite radio):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407 SEEK tuning/CAT (category)
Pushing the XM band select button will change (models with satellite radio):
the band as follows: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

Display of the screen can be canceled by . For AM and FM radio

XM1 ? XM2 ? XM3 ? XM1 Push the SEEK button or to tune
pushing the DISP button. You can then listen
to music that is being played back. If you want to When the XM band select button is pushed from low to high or high to low frequencies
display the screen again, either push the DISP while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON and to stop at the next broadcasting station.
button once more or push the FM·AM, XM or position, the radio will come on at the channel . For XM Satellite Radio
CD·AUX button. last played. Push the SEEK button or to tune
The last channel played will also come on when to the first channel of the next or previous
Switching the GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
display:
the PWR button is pushed to ON. category.
. Models with satellite radio
The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Pushing the CD·AUX button will switch the
Hawaii and Guam.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 29 Model: S35-D ]


SCAN tuning:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Push the Radio SCAN tuning button to tune
from low to high frequencies and stop at each
broadcasting station/channel for 5 seconds.
Pushing the button again during this 5 seconds
period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will
remain tuned to that station/channel.
If the Radio SCAN tuning button is not pushed
within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the
next station/channel.
*
1 to *6 Station memory operations:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
12 stations/channels can be set for the FM band
(6 each for FM1 and FM2), 12 for XM radio (6
each for XM1 and XM2) (if so equipped) and 6
stations can be set for the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band using the radio band
select button.
2. Tune to the desired station/channel using
the SEEK·CAT (models with satellite radio),
SEEK·TRACK (models without satellite
radio), SCAN button or the radio TUNE·SC-
ROLL control knob.
3. Push and hold the desired station preset
button *
1 to *6 until the radio mutes.
4. The station indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
complete.
4-52 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations/channels.
Compact Disc (CD) player operation
S35-D-110201-958C8E38-8A90-4269-B514-51CE021D428B
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) into
the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will
be guided automatically into the slot and start
playing.
After loading the CD, the number of tracks on
the CD and the play time will appear on the
display.
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
matically turn off and the CD will play.
If the system has been turned off while the CD
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start
the CD.
Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.
(models with satellite radio)
(models without satellite radio)PLAY:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the CD·AUX or CD button is pushed with
the system off and the CD loaded, the system
will turn on and the CD will start to play.
When the CD·AUX or CD button is pushed with
Black plate (212,1)
the CD loaded and the radio playing, the radio
will automatically be turned off and the CD will
start to play.
Next/Previous Track and Fast
Forward/Rewind: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the FF or REW button is pushed for more
than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,
the CD will play while fast forwarding or
rewinding. When the button is released, the
CD will return to normal play speed.
When the FF or REW button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,
the next track or the beginning of the current
track on the CD will be played.
REPEATGUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
(RPT):
When the RPT play button is pushed while the
CD is played, the play pattern can be changed
as follows:
(CD)
Normal Û 1 Track Repeat
(CD with compressed audio files)
Normal ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat ?
Normal
RANDOM (RDM):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the RDM play button is pushed while a

CD is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
(CD)
Normal Û 1 Disc Random
(CD with compressed audio files)
Normal ? 1 Disc Random ? 1 Folder Random
? Normal
CD EJECT:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.
When this button is pushed while the CD is
being played, the CD will be ejected.
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it
will be pulled back into the slot to protect
it.
AUX (Auxiliary) input
S35-D-110201-E0FF4825-DE84-48E0-9279-016D03B82FF0
AUX IN jack: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from a
portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or
laptop computer.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (213,1)
CD·AUX (models with satellite radio)
AUX (models without satellite radio)
button: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the AUX button is pushed with no device
plugged into the jack, the audio system does not
change to the AUX mode.
NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo
mini plug cable when connecting your music
device to the audio system. Music may not play
properly when a monaural cable is used.
SAA3434
USB memory operation
S35-D-110201-BBB7A1D4-6F01-42CB-BE51-82F827F232A4
Audio main operation:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The USB outlet connector is located in the
center console. Open the lid and connect a USB
memory as illustrated. Then, switch to the USB
memory mode automatically.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, pushing the PWR button
will start the USB memory.
(models with satellite radio)
(models without satellite radio) PLAY:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the AUX button is pushed with the system
off and the USB memory inserted, the system
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

will turn on.
If another audio source is playing and a USB
memory is inserted, push the AUX button
repeatedly until the center display changes to
the USB memory mode.
Next/Previous File and Fast
Forward/Rewind:GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the FF or REW button is pushed for more
than 1.5 seconds while a USB memory is being
played, the USB memory will play while for-
warding or rewinding. When the button is
released, the USB memory will return to normal
play speed.
When the FF or REW button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while the USB memory is
being played, the next track or the beginning of
the current track on the USB memory will be
played.
The multi-function controller can also be used to
select tracks when the USB memory is being
played.
Folder selection:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
To change to another folder in the USB memory,
turn the folder selector or choose a folder
displayed on the screen using the multi-function
controller.
4-54 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (214,1)
REPEATGUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
(RPT):
When the RPT button is pushed while the USB
memory is played, the play pattern can be
change as follows.
To change the play mode, push the RPT button
repeatedly and the mode will change as follows.
Normal ? 1 Folder Repeat ? 1 Track Repeat ?
Normal
RANDOM (RDM):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the RDM button is pushed while a USB
memory is being played, the play pattern can be JVH0121X
changed as follows.
To change the play mode, push the RDM button iPod® player operation
S35-D-110201-45FBF3C4-1CC5-4DB6-A3EE-952B17BC488A
repeatedly, and the mode will change as follows. ®
Connecting iPod :
Normal ? All Random ? 1 Folder Random ?
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The USB outlet connector is located in the
Normal center console. Open the lid and connect the
iPod® cable to the USB connector. The battery
BACK button: of the iPod® is charged while the connection to
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the BACK button is pushed, it returns to the vehicle.
the previous display. Depending on the version of the iPod®, the
display on the iPod® shows a NISSAN or
Accessory Attached screen when the connec-
tion is completed. When the iPod® is connected
to the vehicle, the iPod® music library can only
be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
* iPod® and iPhone® are a trademark of Apple

Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The following models are available:
. Third generation iPhone® (Firmware version
IOS4/4.0)
. Fourth generation iPhone® (Firmware ver-
sion IOS4/4.0)
. Fifth generation iPod® (Firmware version
1.3)
. First generation iPod Classic® (Firmware
version 1.1.1 or 1.1.2PC)
. Second generation iPod Classic® (Firmware
version 2.0.1)
. First generation iPod touch ® (Firmware
version 1.1.5 or 2.2.1)
. Second and third generation iPod touch®
(Firmware version 2.2.1 or IOS4/4.0.0)
. First generation iPod nano® (Firmware ver-
sion 1.3.1)
. Second generation iPod nano® (Firmware
version 1.1.3)
. Third generation iPod nano® (Firmware
version 1.1.2PC or 1.1.3PC)
. Fourth generation iPod nano® (Firmware
version 1.0.2 or 1.0.4)
. Fifth generation iPod nano® (Firmware ver-
sion 1.0.1 or 1.0.2)
The iPod touch® may not response quickly with
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
the system in some cases.
Make sure that the iPod® firmware is updated.
Audio main operation:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON
position. Then, push the CD·AUX button repeat-
edly to switch to the iPod® mode.
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start
the iPod®.
iPod® MENU button:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Then, push the iPod® button to switch
to the iPod® mode.
If another audio source is playing and the iPod
is connected, pushing the iPod® button changes
to the iPod® mode.
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
was playing, pushing the PWR button will start
the iPod®.
When the iPod® MENU button is pushed while
the iPod® is connected, the interface for iPod®
operation is shown on the audio display. The
items on the menu list can be scrolled by
pushing the or while the iPod® is
operational. To select an item, push ENTER.
Items in the iPod menu appear on the display in
the following order.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Black plate (215,1)
. Now playing
. Playlists
. Artists
. Albums
. songs
. Podcasts
. Genres
. Composers
. Audiobooks
. Shuffle songs
For more information about each item, see the
iPod® Owner’s Manual.
Next/Previous Track and Fast
® Forward/Rewind: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the FF or REW button is pushed for more
than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the
iPod® will play while fast forwarding or rewind-
ing. When the button is released, the iPod® will
return to the normal play speed.
When the FF or REW button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the
next track or the beginning of the current track
on the iPod® will be played.
The multi-function controller can also be used to
select tracks when the iPod® is playing.
4-55
 Black plate (216,1)

REPEATGUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
(RPT):
When the RPT play button is pushed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
Repeat Off ? 1 Track Repeat? All Repeat ?
Repeat Off

RandomGUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
(RDM):
When the RDM play button is pushed while a
track is being played, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
Shuffle Off ? Track Shuffle ? Albums Shuffle
? Shuffle Off

BACK button:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the BACK button is pushed, it returns to
the previous display.

4-56 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (217,1)

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type B)
S35-D-110201-A34993EA-D4E6-4D0E-A0D9-4178E013D125
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-
tion precautions” earlier in this section.
The satellite radio mode requires an active XM
Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
It may take some time to receive the activation
signal after subscribing the XM Satellite Radio.
After receiving the activation signal, an available
channel list will be automatically updated in the
radio. For XM, place the ignition switch from
LOCK to ACC to update the channel list.
Audio main operation
S35-D-110201-EC1E62D8-FD17-46CD-9549-AB5994BB95AB

Head unit: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

The auto loudness circuit enhances the low and
high frequency ranges automatically in both
radio reception and CD playback.
ON·OFF/Volume control:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
SAA3425
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
1. XM band select button 8. FF (forward)/REW (rewind) or SEEK/CATEGORY position, and then push the ON·OFF button
2. CD insert slot button while the system is off to turn on the last audio
3. CD EJECT button 9. CD button source, which was playing immediately before
4. TUNE/SCROLL and AUDIO control knob 10. FM·AM band select button the system was turned off. While the system is
5. Radio station preset buttons No satellite radio reception is available unless an on, pushing the ON·OFF button turns the system
6. AUX button XM Satellite Radio subscription is active. off.
7. ON·OFF/VOLUME control knob Turn the VOL control knob to adjust the volume.

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


Adjusting tone quality and speaker bal-
ance: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, push
the Audio control knob. When the display shows
the setting you want to change (Bass, Treble,
Balance and Fade), rotate the Audio control
knob to set the desired setting. For the other
setting methods, see “How to use touch screen”
earlier in this section.
This vehicle has some sound effect functions as
follows:
. Speed Volume
For more details, see “How to use the setup
button” earlier in this section.
Adjusting AUXGUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
level:
The volume level of incoming sound can be
selected from “Quiet”, “Medium” and “Loud”
when an auxiliary device is connected to the
system. For more details, see “How to use the
setup button” earlier in this section.
Switching the GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
display:
Pushing the AUX button will switch the displays
between USB/iPod® and AUX.
4-58 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
FM-AM-SAT radio operation
S35-D-110201-0C647E9F-E647-4371-8C51-BFF85FD6BA69
When the radio band select button is pushed
while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position, the radio will come on at the channel
last played.
The last channel played will also come on when
the ON·OFF button is pushed to ON.
If another audio source is playing when the radio
band select button is turned to ON, the audio
source will automatically be turned off and the
last radio channel played will come on.
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the
radio will automatically change from stereo to
monaural reception.
FM·AM radio band select:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Pushing the FM·AM radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
AM ? FM1 ? FM2 ? AM
XM radio band select:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Pushing the XM radio band select button will
change the band as follows:
XM1 ? XM2 ? XM3 ? XM1
The satellite radio is not available in Alaska,
Hawaii and Guam.
Black plate (218,1)
TUNE (Tuning):GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
. For AM and FM radio
Turn the TUNE knob for manual tuning.
. For XM Satellite Radio
Turn the TUNE knob to seek channels from
all of the categories when any category is
not selected.
SEEK tuning:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
. For AM and FM radio
Push the SEEK/CATEGORY button or
to tune from low to high or high to low
frequencies and to stop at the next broad-
casting station.
. For XM Satellite Radio
Push the SEEK/CATEGORY button or
to tune to the first channel of the next or
previous category.
Tuning with the touchscreen (AM and FM
radio): GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be
tuned using the touchscreen. To bring up the
visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the lower
right corner of the screen. A screen appears
with a bar running from low frequencies on the
left to high frequencies on the right. Touch the
screen at the location of the frequency you wish
to tune and the station will change to that

frequency. To return to the regular radio display
screen, touch the “OK” key.
to Station memory operations:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
12 stations/channels can be set for the FM band
(6 each for FM1 and FM2), 18 for XM radio (6
each for XM1, XM2 and XM3) and 6 stations
can be set for the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band using the radio band
select button.
2. Tune to the desired station/channel using
the SEEK/CATEGORY button or the TUNE
knob.
3. Push and hold the desired station preset
button to until the beep sound is
heard.
4. The station indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Memorizing is now
complete.
5. Other buttons can be set in the same
manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be erased. In that
case, reset the desired stations/channels.
Touchscreen (XM Satellite Radio):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the XM Satellite Radio is being played,
the following items are available with the
touchscreen operation.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
. Channels
Displays a list of channels. Touch a preferred
channel displayed on the list to change to
that channel.
. Categories
Displays a list of categories. Touch a
preferred channel displayed on the list to
display options within that category.
Compact Disc (CD) player operation
S35-D-110201-63B58E87-669C-4423-9305-86EC6AF5209B
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and insert the Compact Disc (CD) into
the slot with the label side facing up. The CD will
be guided automatically into the slot and start
playing.
If the radio is already operating, it will auto-
matically turn off and the CD will play.
If the system has been turned off while the CD
was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will
start the CD.
Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) discs.
PLAY: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the CD button is pushed with the system
off and the CD loaded, the system will turn on
and the CD will start to play.
When the CD button is pushed with the CD
loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Black plate (219,1)
automatically be turned off and the CD will start
to play.
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD,
certain text may be displayed (when a CD
encoded with text is being used). Depending on
how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the
text is displayed listing the artist, album and
song title.
Next/Previous Track and Fast
Forward/Rewind: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the or button is pushed for more
than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,
the CD will play while fast forwarding or
rewinding. When the button is released, the
CD will return to normal play speed.
When the or button is pushed for less
than 1.5 seconds while the CD is being played,
the next track or the beginning of the current
track on the CD will be played.
When the rewind button is pushed for less than
1.5 seconds within 3 seconds after the current
track starts playing, the previous track will be
played.
4-59

SAA3401
Random: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the CD. When the random mode is
active, the icon will be displayed to the left
of the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing,
touching “Random” alternates between ran-
domly playing songs within the current folder
and songs from the CD as a whole. The
icon is displayed to the left of the song title or
folder name to denote which pattern is applied.
To cancel Random mode, touch the “Random”
key until no icon is displayed.
4-60 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SAA3402
Repeat: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the CD. When the repeat mode is
active, the icon will be displayed to the left
of the song title. If an MP3 CD is playing,
touching “Repeat” alternates between repeating
the current song and repeating the current
folder. The icon is displayed to the left of
the song title or folder name to denote which
pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat mode,
touch the “Repeat” key until no icon is
displayed.
Browse: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on
the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in
Black plate (220,1)
the list to begin playing that song. If an MP3 CD
is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also
list the folders on the disc. Follow the procedure
for selecting a song with the touchscreen to
choose a folder.
CD EJECT:GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the
CD loaded, the CD will be ejected.
When this button is pushed while the CD is
being played, the CD will be ejected.
If the CD comes out and is not removed, it
will be pulled back into the slot to protect
it.
AUX (Auxiliary) input
S35-D-110201-BFB01D76-4C28-4AB6-9B76-289AAED6BAD3
AUX IN jack: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The AUX IN jack is located on the audio unit.
The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any
standard analog audio input such as from a
portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or
laptop computer.
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
To switch to the AUX mode, push the AUX
button when a compatible audio device is
connected into the AUX IN jack.
When the AUX button is pushed with no device

plugged into the jack, the audio system does not
change to the AUX mode.
NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo
mini plug cable when connecting your music
device to the audio system. Music may not play
properly when a monaural cable is used.
SAA3433
USB memoryGUID-D2715C02-97AF-46F9-A58E-16E8B12F9706
operation
Audio main operation:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The USB outlet connector is located in the
center console. Open the lid and connect a USB
memory as illustrated. Then, switch to the USB
memory mode automatically.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, pushing the ON·OFF/VOL
control knob will start the USB memory.
PLAY: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
When the AUX button is pushed with the system
off and the USB memory inserted, the system
will turn on.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (221,1)
If another audio source is playing and a USB
memory is inserted, push the AUX button
repeatedly until the center display changes to
the USB memory mode.
SEEK/CATEGORY button:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Push the SEEK/CATEGORY button while
an audio file on the USB device is playing to
return to the beginning of the current track. Push
the SEEK/CATEGORY button several
times to skip backward several tracks.
Push the SEEK/CATEGORY button while
an audio file on the USB device is playing to
advance one track. Push the SEEK/CATEGORY
button several times to skip forward several
tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB
device is skipped, the first track of the next folder
is played.
Push and hold the SEEK/CATEGORY button
or for 1.5 seconds while an audio file
on the USB device is playing to reverse or fast
forward the track being played. The track plays
at an increased speed while reversing or fast
forwarding. When the button is released, the
audio file returns to normal play speed.
Random and repeat play mode:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
While files on a USB device are playing, the play
pattern can be altered so that songs are
repeated or played randomly.
4-61

Random: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the USB device. When the random
mode is active, the icon is displayed to the
left of the song title or album name to denote
which random pattern is applied. To cancel
Random mode, touch the “Random” key until no
icon is displayed.
Repeat: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play
pattern to the USB device. When the repeat
mode is active, the icon is displayed to the
left of the song title or album name to denote
which repeat pattern is applied. To cancel
Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until no
icon is displayed.
4-62 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SAA3435
iPod® PLAYER OPERATION
S35-D-110201-14D49E3C-C854-4E06-9C60-5D7DEE8745DD
Connecting iPod®
S35-D-110201-F702AD69-87FB-414E-A23A-800BB74108DA
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the
iPod® can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located in the center console. Open the
protective cover on the USB jack in the center
console and then connect the iPod® specific
end of the cable to the iPod® and the USB end
of the cable to the USB jack on the vehicle * 1 .
If your iPod® supports charging via a USB
connection, its battery will be charged while
connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch
in the ACC or ON position.
Black plate (222,1)
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,
remove the USB end of the cable from the
USB jack on the vehicle, then remove the cable
from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
S35-D-110201-B15D6BAA-F1D6-4B74-A639-28BCAF163E6E
The following models are available:
. Fifth generation iPod® (version 1.2.3 or
later)
. iPod Classic (version 1.1.1 or later)
. First generation iPod touch® (version 2.0.0
or later)
. Second generation iPod touch® (version
1.2.3 or later)
. First generation iPod nano (version 1.3.1 or
later)
. Second generation iPod nano® (version
1.1.3 or later)
. Third generation iPod nano® (version 1.1 or
later)
. Fourth generation iPod nano® (version 1.0.2
or later)
This unit may not control/operate correctly when
connected to some iPod versions/firmware and
 Black plate (223,1)

iPhone. . Artists active, the icon is displayed to the left of the

Make sure that the iPod® version is updated. . Songs song title or album name to denote which repeat
. Composers pattern is applied. To cancel Repeat mode,
Audio main operation touch the “Repeat” key until no icon is
S35-D-110201-9868E466-2B93-409E-B8E2-AFFA33EE390A . Audiobooks
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON displayed.
. Podcasts
position. Then, push the button repeatedly
The following touch-panel buttons shown on the
to switch to the iPod® mode.
screen are also available:
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
. : returns to the previous screen.
was playing, pushing the ON·OFF button will
start the iPod®. . : plays/pauses the music selected.

PLAY: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407 SEEK/CATEGORY button:

GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

When the button is pushed with the system
off and the iPod® connected, the system will turn
on. If another audio source is playing and the
iPod® is connected, push the button
repeatedly to switch to the iPod® mode.
When the or button is pushed for more
than 1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the
iPod® will play while fast forwarding or rewind-
ing. When the button is released, the iPod® will
return to the normal play speed.

Interface: Random: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The interface for iPod® operation shown on the
vehicle center display is similar to the iPod®
interface. Use the touchscreen, BACK button or
the TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the menus
on the screen.
The following items can be chosen from the
menu list screen. For further information about
each item, see the iPod® Owner’s Manual.
Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play
pattern to the iPod. When the random mode is
active, the icon is displayed to the left of the
song title or album name to denote which
random pattern is applied. To cancel Random
mode, touch the “Random” key until no icon
is displayed.
Repeat: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407

. Playlists Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play

pattern to the iPod. When the repeat mode is

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


SAA0451
CD/DVD/USB MEMORY CARE AND
CLEANING
S35-D-110201-C75B0B69-DD75-43C0-A5F4-2CF949045946
CD/DVDS35-D-110201-7B256299-FD32-483A-BB5B-74544008F3F7
. Handle a CD/DVD by its edges. Never touch
the surface of the disc. Do not bend the
disc.
. Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
. To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
4-64 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (224,1)
. A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
USB memory (if so equipped)
S35-D-110201-05DDD64A-1C7F-49B9-9DCC-5BB6AEA55646
. Never touch the terminal portion of the USB
memory.
. Do not place heavy objects on the USB
memory.
. Do not store the USB memory in highly
humid locations.
. Do not expose the USB memory to direct
SAA1779
sunlight.
. Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory. 1. Tuning switch
Refer to the USB memory Owner’s Manual for 2. VOLUME control switch
the details. 3. SOURCE select switch
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIOS35-D-110201-C76F168B-0BEC-40AD-BD6D-4624D94C03CB
CONTROL (if so equipped)
The audio system can be operated using the
controls on the steering wheel.
SOURCE select switch
S35-D-110201-ED6F6E26-E9A5-48A8-986D-E10281EAFC60
With the ignition switch turned to the ACC or
ON position, push the SOURCE select switch
to turn the audio system on. Push the switch to
change the mode in the sequence of AM, FM,
SAT, CD, iPod®, USB and AUX.
If no CD is located or an AUX, iPod® or USB

memory are not connected, the CD, AUX, iPod®
or USB memory modes will be skipped.
VOLUME control switch
GUID-28FEC6B8-E1DE-41D8-B60B-C05C851D0868
Push up or down the VOLUME control switch to
increase or decrease the volume.
Tuning switch
S35-D-110201-5CA8CF8B-C0F5-481A-814C-213749094806
Memory change (radio):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Push up or down the tuning switch for less than
1.5 seconds to change the next or previous
radio preset.
SEEK tuning (radio):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Push up or down the tuning switch for more than
1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous radio
station.
APS (Automatic Program Search) FF, APS
REW (CD): GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Push up or down the tuning switch for less than
1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
present program or skip to the next program.
Push several times to skip back or skip through
programs.
This system searches for the blank intervals
between selections. If there is a blank interval
within one program or there is no interval
between programs, the system may not stop in
the desired or expected location.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (225,1)
FOLDER change (CD with MP3 or WMA):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Push up or down the tuning switch for more than
1.5 seconds to change the folders (if there are
any folders).
iPod®: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
will increase or decrease the track number.
USB: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
. Tilting up/down for less than 1.5 seconds
will increase or decrease the track number.
. Tilting up/down for more than 1.5 seconds
will increase/decrease the folder number SAA2102
ANTENNA
S35-D-110201-3A435C1C-B183-4681-AF7C-90168059490D
To remove the antenna, hold the bottom of the
antenna and turn it counterclockwise.
To install the antenna, turn the antenna clock-
wise and tighten.
CAUTION
. To avoid damaging or deforming the
antenna, be sure to remove the
antenna under the following condi-
tions.
— The vehicle enters an automatic
car wash.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

— The vehicle enters a garage with
a low ceiling.
— The vehicle is covered with a car
cover.
. Always properly tighten the antenna
rod during installation. Otherwise,
the antenna rod may break during
vehicle operation.
4-66 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (226,1)
CAR PHONE AND CB RADIO
S35-D-110201-DD1C2804-EB76-4872-9E54-AD4254F5BE6B
When installing a car phone or a CB radio in
your vehicle, be sure to observe the following CAUTION
cautions, otherwise the new equipment may
adversely affect the electronic control modules . Keep the antenna as far away as
and electronic control system harness. possible from the electronic control
modules.
WARNING . Keep the antenna wire more than 8
in (20 cm) away from the electronic
. A cellular phone should not be used control system harness. Do not
for any purpose while driving so full route the antenna wire next to any
attention may be given to vehicle harness.
operation. Some jurisdictions prohi- . Adjust the antenna standing-wave
bit the use of cellular phones while ratio as recommended by the man-
driving. ufacturer.
. If you must make a call while your . Connect the ground wire from the
vehicle is in motion, the hands-free CB radio chassis to the body.
cellular phone operational mode (if
. For details, consult a NISSAN deal-
so equipped) is highly recom-
er.
mended. Exercise extreme caution
at all times so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
. If a conversation in a moving vehicle
requires you to take notes, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle before doing so.

Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
S35-D-110201-FB011E63-8BB9-46BA-A060-2A16AA9BD9B1
WARNING
. Use a phone after stopping your
vehicle in a safe location. If you
have to use a phone while driving,
exercise extreme caution at all
times so full attention may be given
to vehicle operation.
. If you find yourself unable to devote
full attention to vehicle operation
while talking on the phone, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle before doing so.
CAUTION
To avoid draining the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (227,1)
vehicle.
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth®
cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
. Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System.
. Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
SAA3436 may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® com/bluetooth for a recommended phone
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a list and connecting.
compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone,
you can set up the wireless connection between
. You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, — Your vehicle is outside of the telephone
service area.
you can make or receive a hands-free telephone
call in your vehicle. — Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive radio waves; such as in
Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-
a tunnel, in an underground parking
vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-
garage, near a tall building or in a
ing procedure is required. Your phone is
mountainous area.
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
phone module when the ignition switch is — Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
placed in the ON position with the connected from being dialed.
cellular phone turned on and carried in the
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

. When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice
during a call.
. Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be
impossible to receive a call for a short
period of time.
. Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the in-
vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection dis-
ruption.
. While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
battery power of the cellular phone may
discharge quicker than usual. The Blue-
tooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot
charge cellular phones.
. If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
seems to be malfunctioning, see “Trouble-
shooting guide” later in this section. You can
also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for
troubleshooting help.
. Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers.
Storing the device in a different location
may reduce or eliminate the noise.
4-68 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
. Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding battery charging, cellular phone
antenna, etc.
. This wireless hands free car kit is based on
Bluetooth® technology,
— Frequency: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz
— Output Power: 7,94 dBm E.I.R.P
— Modulation: FHSS GFSK 8DPSK, p/
4DQPSK
— Number of Channel: 79
— This wireless equipment can’t be used
for any services related to safety because
there is the possibility of radio interfer-
ence.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
S35-D-110201-F1CF99FA-DF4D-4F1C-9382-2A9604425783
FCC Regulatory information
S35-D-110201-306DC0A5-A71E-4099-9669-8B17CC42CFDF
. CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only
the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1) this device may not cause interference
and
2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
Black plate (228,1)
undesired operation of the device
IC Regulatory information
S35-D-110201-5285DAB0-26CC-4E07-A0CA-271D322C0E42
. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
. This Class B digital apparatus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
Bluetooth trademark:
Bluetooth® is a trademark owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A.
and licensed to Visteon Cor-
poration.
USING S35-D-110201-13F73A63-B264-4FC2-B9BF-49C3E770A44E
THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.

Initialization
S35-D-110201-B6F81CD9-5344-4D85-A9DE-C284E952B6BB
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initia-
lized, which takes a few seconds. If the
button is pushed before the initialization com-
pletes, the system will accept any command.
Operating tips
S35-D-110201-2FD5B1C0-EB73-44DB-ACF2-D363384115D4
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the follow-
ing:
. Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
. Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
. Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
. Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Giving S35-D-110201-4F228DE0-FF8C-45CD-913D-E1D3ACE513CA
voice command
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, push
and release the button located on the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given when
the command is accepted.
. If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
. If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please say again.” Repeat the command in
a clear voice.
. If you want to go back to the previous
command, you can say “Go back” or
“Correction” anytime the system is waiting
for a response.
. You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
also push and hold the button for 5
seconds on the steering wheel at any time to
cancel the VR session. Whenever the VR
session is cancelled, a double beep is
played to indicate you have exited the
system.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Black plate (229,1)
. If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, push the volume control switch (+
or −) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
. In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pushing the button on the steering
wheel.
. To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example,
push the button and after the tone say,
“Call Redial.” Note: The combined com-
mand of Call and (a Name) cannot be used.
How toS35-D-110201-6424B4F4-E5FD-4CF0-88DD-02B9027CCC3D
say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands.
Refer to the rules and examples below.
. Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
— “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or
— “One eight zero zero six six two six two
oh oh”
. Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
4-69

— “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,
— NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
two hundred, and
— NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty
two hundred.
. Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continuing
entering digits, if desired.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
— “One eight zero zero”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
— “six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
— “six two zero zero”
. You can say “Star” for “*” and “Pound” for
“#” at any time in any position of the phone
number. (Available only when using the
“Special Dialing” command.)
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
— “One five five five one two one two star
one two three”
. Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*”
(available when using the “Special Dialing”
command and the “Send” command during
a call).
4-70 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (230,1)
. Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using Manual S35-D-110201-31E19BFD-30E3-47AD-B12A-3175F338B5EA
command selection
the “Special Dialing” command). Commands can be selected manually. While the
. Say “pause” for a 2 second pause (available commands are displayed on the audio screen,
only when storing a phone book number). select a command by operating the audio tuning
See “Making a call by entering a phone switch, and then push the switch. Once a
number” later in this section and “List of command is manually selected, the voice
voice commands” later in this section for command function is cancelled. To return to
more information. voice command mode, push the switch to
NOTE: cancel the current operation, and then perform
the first procedure of voice command.
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
The voice command “Help” is available at any
time. Please say the “Help” command to get
information about how to use the system.
INFO
. If you are controlling the telephone system
by voice command for the first time or do not
know the appropriate voice command,
speak “Help”. The system announces the
available commands.
. When you speak numbers, you can speak
both “zero” or “oh” for “0”.
 Black plate (231,1)

GETTING STARTED NOTE:

S35-D-110201-363B3716-4171-4E1D-92BB-B6C8C2F728AD
You must push the button or the
The following procedures will help you get button within 5 seconds to change
started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone the language.
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For
additional command options, refer to “List of Push
Push (TALK/
Current lan- (MODE/
voice commands” later in this section. PHONE SEND)
guage PHONE END)
to select
to select
Choosing a language
S35-D-110201-9ED1490B-F9A5-48AB-ADF8-DA6C6BE9BBA1 English Spanish French
You can interact with the Bluetooth® Hands-
Spanish English French
Free Phone System using English, Spanish or
French English Spanish
French.
To change the language, perform the following. 5. If you decide not to change the language, do
1. Push and hold the button for more than not push either button. After 5 seconds, the
SAA1782
5 seconds. VR session will end, and the language will
CONTROL BUTTONS not be changed.
S35-D-110201-703550E9-3DE2-433E-AB80-CD46939E5B53 2. The system announces: “Push the PHONE
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands- SEND ( ) button for the hands-free Connecting procedure
S35-D-110201-70B0342B-394D-4E2C-ACD1-017AECE46CD1
Free Phone System are located on the steering phone system to enter the speaker adapta- NOTE:
wheel. tion mode or push the PHONE END ( )
The connecting procedure must be per-
PHONE SEND button to select a different language.”
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If
Push the button to initiate a VR session or 3. Push the button. the vehicle starts moving during the pro-
answer an incoming call. For information on speaker adaptation, see cedure, the procedure will be cancelled.
You can also use the button to interrupt “Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” later in this
system feedback and give a command at once. section.
PHONE END 4. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the
While the voice recognition system is active,
language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French
push the button to go back one step. Push
(in French). Use the following chart to select NOS2623
and hold the button for 5 seconds to quit
the language.
the voice recognition system at any time.
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


1. Push the button on the steering wheel.
The system announces the available com-
mands.
2. Say: “Connect Phone” * A . The system
acknowledges the command and an-
nounces the next set of available commands.
3. Say: “Add phone” * B . The system acknowl-
edges the command and asks you to initiate
pairing from the phone handset * C .
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit www.
nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on
connecting NISSAN recommended cellular
phones.
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
4. The system asks you to say a name for the
phone *D .
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
Also, if more than one phone is connected
and the name sounds too much like a name
already used, the system tells you, then
4-72 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
prompts you for a name again.
Making a call by entering a phone
number S35-D-110201-48F3CC44-24F0-42A7-9ED8-7F516582EFF2
NOS2624
1. Push the button on steering wheel. A
tone will sound.
2. Say: “Call” *A . The system acknowledges
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.
3. Say: “Phone Number” * B . The system
acknowledges the command and an-
nounces the next set of available commands.
Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10
digits or any special characters.
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with
the area code in single digit format. If the
system has trouble recognizing the correct
phone number, try entering the number in
the following groups: 3-digit area code, 3-
digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For example,
555-121-3354 can be said as “five five five”
as the 1st group, then “one two one” as the
2nd group, and “three three five four” as the
3rd group. For dialing more than 10 digits or
Black plate (232,1)
any special characters, say “Special Dial-
ing”. See “How to say numbers” earlier in
this section, for more information.
5. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and
announces the available commands.
6. Say: “Dial” *
C . The system acknowledges
the command and makes the call.
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” later in this section.
Receiving a call
S35-D-110201-89DA9BAB-3811-45B1-8BA4-9FBB801C0C2A
When you hear the ring tone, push the
button on the steering wheel.
Once the call has ended, push the button
on the steering wheel.
NOTE:
If you do not wish to take the call when you
hear the ring tone, push the button on
the steering wheel to reject the call.

LIST OFS35-D-110201-89D632E4-E213-49DE-B708-658FF60A7E12
VOICE COMMANDS
NOS2625
When you push and release the button on
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the
commands in each sub-menu.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
You can say “Help” to hear the list of commands
currently available anytime the system is waiting
for a response.
A menu item can also be selected by scrolling
the display with the SEEK switch and entering
by pushing the button.
If you want to end an action without completing
it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at anytime the
system is waiting for a response. The system will
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session
is cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
you have exited the system.
If you want to go back to the previous command,
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” anytime
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
the system is waiting for a response.
Call S35-D-110201-0463C046-75B9-4CA6-8393-19E851C13897
NOS2638
Name (speak name) *
A ends the VR session.
If there are entries stored in the phonebook, a
number associated with a name and location
can be dialed.
See “Phonebook (phones without automatic
phonebook download function)” later in this
section to learn how to store entries.
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phonebook entry to call. The system
acknowledges the name.
If there are multiple locations associated with
the name, the system asks the user to choose
the location.
Once the name and location are confirmed, the
system begins the call.
Phone Number (speak digits) *
B
When prompted by the system, say the number
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Black plate (233,1)
to call. Refer to “Making a call by entering a
phone number” earlier in this section for more
details.
“Redial” *
C
Use the Redial command to call the last number
that was dialed.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
“Call back” *
D
Use the Call Back command to dial the number
of the last incoming call within the vehicle.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
If a call back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back”
and ends the VR session.
Special Dialing
To dial more than 10 digits or any special
characters, please say “Special Dialing”. When
the system acknowledges the command, the
system will prompt you to speak the number.
During a call
During a call there are several command options
available. Push the button on the steering
4-73

wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter
commands.
. “Help” — The system announces the avail-
able commands.
. “Go back/Correction” — The system an-
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session
and returns to the call.
. “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
to the call.
. “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers, “*” or “#”
during a call. For example, if you were
directed to dial an extension by an auto-
mated system:
Say: “Send one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the VR
session and returns to the call. Say “star” for
“*”, say “pound” for “#”.
. “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call
command to transfer the call from the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to
the cellular phone when privacy is desired.
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
To reconnect a call from the cellular phone
4-74 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone sys-
tem, push the button.
. “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
NOTE:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the Mute
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
to “off” for the next call so the other party
can hear your voice.
Phonebook (phones without automatic
phonebook download function)
S35-D-110201-26A48EEF-193A-4F7A-A722-CFA61BDF26C6
NOS2627
“Transfer Entry” *
A
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name
you would like to give the new entry.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
Black plate (234,1)
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
To enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one
two.” See “How to say numbers” earlier in this
section for more information.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Say: “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the
transfer from the phone handset. The new
contact phone number will be transferred from
the cellular phone via the Bluetooth® commu-
nication link.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit www.
nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on
transferring phone numbers from NISSAN re-
commended cellular phones.
The system repeats the number and prompts
you for the next command. When you have
finished entering numbers or transferring an
entry, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location and
number.
“Delete Entry” *
B entries to the vehicle phonebook. You can say
Use the Delete Entry command to delete one
entry from the phonebook. After the system
acknowledges a command, say the name to
delete or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
“List Names” *
C
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook. The system recites the
phonebook entries but does not include the
actual phone numbers. When playback of the
list is complete, the system returns to the main
menu.
Playback of the list can be stopped at any time
by pushing the button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session.
Phonebook (phones with automatic
phonebook download function)
S35-D-110201-A16A631F-548A-4D41-AD75-635CD3062E55
NOTE:
Phonebook commands are not available
when the vehicle is moving.
NOS2637
For phones that support automatic download of
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth profile), the
“Phonebook” command is used to manage
the name of an entry at this menu to initiate
dialing of that entry.
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for
each phone paired with the system. Each name
can have up to 4 locations/phone numbers
associated with it.
When a phone is connected to the system, the
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
phonebook from the Bluetooth® system and call
contacts by name. You can record a custom
voice tag for contact names that the system has
difficulty recognizing. For more information see
“Record Name” in this section.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
“List names” *
A
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Black plate (235,1)
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pushing the button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the
“Record Name” command in this section for
information about recording custom voice tags
for list entries that the system has difficulty
pronouncing.
“Record name” *
B
The system allows you to record custom voice
tags for contact names in the phonebook that
the vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This
feature can also be used to record voice tags
to directly dial an entry with multiple numbers.
Up to 40 voice tags can be recorded to the
system.
Recent S35-D-110201-A0FE88D4-B4CA-4E30-A7EC-6924630DE801
Calls
NOS2628
Use the Recent Calls command to access
outgoing, incoming or missed calls.
“Outgoing” *
A
4-75
 Black plate (236,1)

Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing in this section for more information. SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
S35-D-110201-6F97B5D3-401C-46AD-9389-BD952ABFFFE3
calls made from the vehicle. “Select Phone” *
B Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of
“Incoming” *
B Use the Select Phone command to select from a dialect users to train the system to improve
Use the Incoming command to list the incoming list of phones connected to the vehicle. The recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
calls made from the vehicle. system will list the names assigned to each commands, the users can create a voice model
phone and then prompt you for the phone you of their own voice that is stored in the system.
“Missed” *
C
The system is capable of storing a different
wish to select. Only one phone can be active at
Use the Missed command to list the missed speaker adaptation model for each connected
a time.
calls made to the vehicle that were not phone.
answered. “Delete Phone” *
C

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a Training S35-D-110201-4BFA4231-662E-46CF-B928-4A1945741EA8

procedure
ConnectS35-D-110201-DAF56654-BA68-4C50-89BF-A865A302EB6F
Phone phone that is connected to the vehicle. The 1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
NOTE: system will list the names assigned to each outdoor location.
Add Phone command is not available phone and then prompt you for the phone you 2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine
when the vehicle is moving. wish to delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle running, the parking brake on, and the
will also delete that phonebook for that phone. transmission in Park.
“Turn Bluetooth Off” *
D
3. Push and hold the button for more than
Use the Bluetooth Off command to prevent a 5 seconds.
wireless connection to your phone. 4. The system announces: “Push the PHONE
SEND ( ) button for the hands-free
phone system to enter the speaker adapta-
NOS2629 tion mode or push the PHONE END ( )
button to select a different language.”
Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to 5. Push the button.
enable the Bluetooth® function on the vehicle. For information on selecting a different
language, see “Choosing a language” earlier
“Add Phone” *
A
in this section.
Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” earlier
4-76 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (237,1)

6. If the connected phone is already in use, the . delete call back number . delete redial number
system will prompt you to overwrite. Follow . Incoming . phonebook list names
the instructions provided by the system. . Transfer entry . call 8 0 5 4 1
7. When preparation is complete and you are . 8 pause 9 3 2 pause 7 . correction
ready to begin, push the button. . delete all entries . connect phone
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the . call 7 2 4 0 9 . dial 7 4 0 1 8
instructions provided by the system. . phonebook delete entry . previous entry
9. When training is finished, the system will tell . next entry . delete
you an adequate number of phrases have . dial star 2 1 7 0 . dial 9 7 2 6 6
been recorded.
. yes . call 7 6 3 0 1
10. The system will announce that speaker . no . go back
adaptation has been completed and the
. select . call 5 6 2 8 0
system is ready.
. Missed . dial 6 6 4 3 7
The SA mode will stop if:
. dial 8 5 6 9 2
. The button is pushed for more than 5 . Bluetooth on
seconds in SA mode.
. Outgoing
. The vehicle is driven during SA mode.
. call 3 1 9 0 2
. The ignition switch is turned to the OFF or
. 9 7 pause pause 3 0 8
LOCK position.
. cancel
TrainingS35-D-110201-A9BBF6B8-DFC7-4F2F-9DC8-78DC45C7C45F
phrases . call back number
During the SA mode, the system instructs you to . call star 2 0 9 5
say the following phrases. . delete phone
(The system will prompt you for each phrase.) . dial 8 3 0 5 1
. phonebook transfer entry . Record Name
. dial 3 0 4 2 9 . 4 3 pause 2 9 pause 0

Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (238,1)

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
S35-D-110201-3D8483FA-076C-40CB-8565-9B227BA85009
The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
System fails to interpret the command correctly. 4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to
improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.
1. Ensure that the phonebook entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook (phones without automatic phonebook download function)”
the phonebook. earlier in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

4-78 Center display, heater, air conditioner, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (239,1)

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ................................

... 5-2 Break-in schedule .................................................................
... 5-20
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ......................................
... 5-2 Increasing fuel economy ......................................................
... 5-21
Three-way catalyst ..............................................................
... 5-3 Sonar system (if so equipped) ..........................................
... 5-21
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .................... ... 5-3 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ........................ ... 5-22
Avoiding collision and rollover .........................................
... 5-5 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) lock switch operations ..... ... 5-23
On-pavement and off-road driving precautions .......... ... 5-6 AWD warning light ........................................................
... 5-24
Off-road recovery ................................................................
... 5-6 Parking/parking on hills ........................................................
... 5-25
Rapid air pressure loss ......................................................
... 5-6 Electric power steering system .........................................
... 5-26
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving .................................
... 5-7 Brake system ..........................................................................
... 5-27
Driving safety precautions .................................................
... 5-7 Braking precautions ......................................................
... 5-27
Ignition switch .........................................................................
... 5-10 Parking brake break-in ..................................................
... 5-27
Intelligent Key system (if so equipped) ...................... ... 5-10 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...............................
... 5-27
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ................ ... 5-11 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ......................... ... 5-29
Key positions .....................................................................
... 5-12 Cold weather driving ............................................................
... 5-30
Before starting the engine ...................................................
... 5-12 Freeing a frozen door lock ...........................................
... 5-30
Starting the engine ................................................................
... 5-13 Anti-freeze ........................................................................
... 5-30
Driving the vehicle .................................................................
... 5-13 Battery ...............................................................................
... 5-30
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ................ ... 5-13 Draining of coolant water .............................................
... 5-30
Parking brake ..........................................................................
... 5-18 Tire equipment ................................................................
... 5-31
Cruise control .........................................................................
... 5-19 Special winter equipment ............................................
... 5-31
Precautions on cruise control .......................................
... 5-19 Driving on snow or ice .................................................
... 5-31
Cruise control operations ...............................................
... 5-19 Engine block heater (if so equipped) ....................... ... 5-32

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
S35-D-110201-172B5694-002F-4BAC-A54F-244D93B08401
EXHAUST
WARNING
. Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the support
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should not be left alone either. They
could accidentally injure themselves
or others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a
closed vehicle could quickly become
high enough to cause severe or
possibly fatal injuries to people or
animals.
. Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from
sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unse-
cured cargo could cause personal
injury.
5-2 Starting and driving
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
GAS (carbon monoxide)
S35-D-110201-422D581A-51A9-4E2E-9E55-85BD97561D40
WARNING
. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless car-
bon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is
dangerous. It can cause uncon-
sciousness or death.
. If you suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering the vehicle, drive with
all windows fully open, and have the
vehicle inspected immediately.
. Do not run the engine in closed
spaces such as a garage.
. Do not park the vehicle with the
engine running for any extended
length of time.
. Keep the lift gate closed while
driving, otherwise exhaust gases
could be drawn into the passenger
compartment. If you must drive with
the lift gate open, follow these
precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the air recirculation to off
and the fan control to high to
Black plate (240,1)
circulate the air.
. If electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass to a trailer
through the seal on the lift gate or
the body, follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation to prevent carbon
monoxide entry into the vehicle.
. If a special body, camper or other
equipment is added for recreational
or other usage, follow the manufac-
turer’s recommendation to prevent
carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle
appliances such as stoves, refrig-
erators, heaters, etc. may also gen-
erate carbon monoxide.)
. The exhaust system and body
should be inspected by a qualified
mechanic whenever:
— The vehicle is raised for service.
— You suspect that exhaust fumes
are entering into the passenger
compartment.
— You notice a change in the
sound of the exhaust system.
— You have had an accident invol-
ving damage to the exhaust

system, underbody, or rear of
the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
S35-D-110201-6C684C77-26EF-469E-8CDF-33CAC09CE017
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
. The exhaust gas and the exhaust
system are very hot. Keep people,
animals or flammable materials
away from the exhaust system com-
ponents.
. Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
. Do not use leaded gasoline. Depos-
its from leaded gasoline will ser-
iously reduce the three-way
catalyst’s ability to help reduce ex-
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
haust pollutants.
. Keep your engine tuned up. Mal-
functions in the ignition, fuel injec-
tion, or electrical systems can cause
overrich fuel flow into the three-way
catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do
not keep driving if the engine mis-
fires, or if noticeable loss of perfor-
mance or other unusual operating
conditions are detected. Have the
vehicle inspected promptly by a
NISSAN dealer.
. Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, dama-
ging the three-way catalyst.
. Do not race the engine while warm-
ing it up.
. Do not push or tow your vehicle to
start the engine.
Black plate (241,1)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)
S35-D-110201-5238C45C-5543-4990-B1F7-2C79DFC38991
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
Starting and driving 5-3

pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction indi-
cator is illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
Additional information
GUID-1EB521A7-B20A-476D-B8B6-0AE64B1EF469
. The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
. The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect
a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
5-4 Starting and driving
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
flat tire while driving).
. The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning (if
so equipped) appears in the vehicle infor-
mation display when the low tire pressure
warning light is illuminated and low tire
pressure is detected. The CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE warning (if so equipped) turns
off when the low tire pressure warning light
turns off.
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning (if
so equipped) does not appear if the low tire
pressure warning light illuminates to indicate
a TPMS malfunction.
. Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in
low ambient temperature, check the tire
Black plate (242,1)
pressure for all four tires.
For additional information, see “Low tire pres-
sure warning light” in the “2. Instruments and
controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)” in the “6. In case of emer-
gency” section.
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
ble. Driving with under-inflated tires
may permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire
failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD
tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label to turn
the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as possi-

ble. (See “Flat tire” in the “6. In case
of emergency” section for changing
a flat tire.)
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
. Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
. Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors.
CAUTION
. The TPMS may not function properly
when the wheels are equipped with
tire chains or the wheels are buried
in snow.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
. Do not place metalized film or any
metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the
windows. This may cause poor re-
ception of the signals from the tire
pressure sensors, and the TPMS will
not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to
illuminate. Some examples are:
. Facilities or electric devices using similar
radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
. If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
. If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/
AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not ex-
Black plate (243,1)
pressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL-
OVER GUID-8CC33DA4-1AF0-4342-B809-19CE1354D01B
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss
of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering
maneuvers, because these driving practices
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, a loss of control could
result in a collision with other vehicles or
objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover,
Starting and driving 5-5

particularly if the loss of control causes the
vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all
times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive
when under the influence of alcohol or drugs
(including prescription or over-the-counter
drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always
wear your seat belt as outlined in the “Seat
belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do
so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in
collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an
unbelted or improperly belted person is
significantly more likely to be injured or
killed than a person properly wearing a
seat belt.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD
DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
S35-D-110201-200796C5-D538-48BF-A739-570F1F9B79A1
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than pas-
senger cars to make them capable of performing
in a variety of on-pavement and off-road
applications. This gives them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary cars. An advantage of
higher ground clearance is a better view of the
road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
However, they are not designed for cornering
5-6 Starting and driving
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
at the same speeds as conventional passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover. Seat belts help
reduce the risk of injury in collisions and
rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or
improperly belted person is significantly more
likely to be injured or killed than a person
properly wearing a seat belt.
Be sure to read “Driving safety precautions”
later in this section.
OFF-ROAD GUID-8AE1A9CD-5285-4296-880C-280D2FA43FBA
RECOVERY
If the right side or left side wheels leave the road
surface, maintain control of the vehicle by
following the procedure below. Please note that
this procedure is only a general guide. The
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
Black plate (244,1)
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the
vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle
speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle back onto the road surface until
vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the
appropriate driving lane.
. If you decide that it is not safe to return
the vehicle to the road surface based on
vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradu-
ally slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe
place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
GUID-6FF196AC-FF92-483D-9FE2-BD46481D5F0A
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can
occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due
to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure
loss can also be caused by driving on under-
inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by main-
taining the correct air pressure and visually

inspect the tires for wear and damage. See
“Wheels and tires” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out”
while driving maintain control of the vehicle by
following the procedure below. Please note that
this procedure is only a general guide. The
vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on
the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air
pressure. Losing control of the vehicle
may cause a collision and result in
personal injury.
. The vehicle generally moves or pulls
in the direction of the flat tire.
. Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
. Do not rapidly release the accelera-
tor pedal.
. Do not rapidly turn the steering
wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
either contact a roadside emergency service
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat
tire” in the “6. In case of emergency” section
of this Owner’s Manual.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING GUID-0C2FCF2D-F6C9-49A3-8519-5AED7405747D
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of
alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the blood-
stream reduces coordination, delays
reaction time and impairs judgement.
Driving after drinking alcohol increases
the likelihood of being involved in an
accident injuring yourself and others.
Additionally, if you are injured in an
accident, alcohol can increase the se-
Black plate (245,1)
verity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents.
Although the local laws vary on what is
considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is
that alcohol affects all people differently and
most people underestimate the effects of
alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter,
prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if
your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by
alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
S35-D-110201-E7A06B68-B9DA-4F86-B811-CCB6BF916820
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and
off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep
water or mud as your NISSAN is mainly
designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional
off-road vehicle.
Remember that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) mod-
els are less capable than All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) models for rough road driving and
extrication when stuck in deep snow, mud, or
the like.
Please observe the following precautions:
Starting and driving 5-7
 Black plate (246,1)

. If your engine stalls or you cannot your vehicle to roll over.

WARNING
. Drive carefully when off the road
and avoid dangerous areas. Every
person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should be seated with their
seat belt fastened. This will keep
you and your passengers in position
. Heavy braking going down a hill
when driving over rough terrain.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead drive either straight up or
straight down the slopes. Off-road
vehicles can tip over sideways much
more easily than they can forward or
. Unsecured cargo can be thrown
backward.
. Many hills are too steep for any
vehicle. If you drive up them, you
may stall. If you drive down them,
you may not be able to control your
speed. If you drive across them, you
. To avoid raising the center of gravity
may roll over.
. Do not shift ranges while driving on
downhill grades as this could cause
loss of control of the vehicle.
. Stay alert when driving to the top of
a hill. At the top there could be a
drop-off or other hazard that could
cause an accident.
make it to the top of a steep hill,
never attempt to turn around. Your
vehicle could tip or roll over. Always
back straight down in R (Reverse)
range. Never back down in N (Neu-
tral), using only the brake, as this
could cause loss of control.
could cause your brakes to overheat
and fade, resulting in loss of control
and an accident. Apply brakes
lightly and use a low range to
control your speed.
around when driving over rough
terrain. Properly secure all cargo
so it will not be thrown forward
and cause injury to you or your
passengers.
excessively, do not exceed the rated
capacity of the roof rack (if so
equipped) and evenly distribute the
load. Secure heavy loads in the
cargo area as far forward and as
low as possible. Do not equip the
vehicle with tires larger than speci-
fied in this manual. This could cause
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of
the steering wheel when driving off-
road. The steering wheel could
move suddenly and injure your
hands. Instead drive with your fin-
gers and thumbs on the outside of
the rim.
. Before operating the vehicle, ensure
that the driver and all passengers
have their seat belts fastened.
. Always drive with the floor mats in
place as the floor may became hot.
. Lower your speed when encounter-
ing strong crosswinds. With a higher
center of gravity, your NISSAN is
more affected by strong side winds.
Slower speeds ensure better vehicle
control.
. Do not drive beyond the perfor-
mance capability of the tires, even
with AWD engaged.
. For AWD equipped vehicles, do not
attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with
the engine running. Doing so may
result in drivetrain damage or un-

5-8 Starting and driving

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


expected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle da-
mage or personal injury.
. Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy-
namometer (such as the dynam-
ometers used by some states for
emissions testing), or similar equip-
ment even if the other two wheels
are raised off the ground. Make sure
you inform test facility personnel
that your vehicle is equipped with
AWD before it is placed on a
dynamometer. Using the wrong test
equipment may result in drivetrain
damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
. When a wheel is off the ground due
to an unlevel surface, do not spin
the wheel excessively. (AWD mod-
els)
. Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
maneuvers or sudden braking may
cause loss of control.
. If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
maneuvers, particularly at high
speeds. Your vehicle has a higher
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (247,1)
center of gravity than a conventional . Spinning the front wheels on slip-
passenger car. The vehicle is not pery surfaces may cause the AWD
designed for cornering at the same warning light to flash and the AWD
speeds as conventional passenger system to automatically switch from
cars. Failure to operate this vehicle the AWD mode to the 2WD mode.
correctly could result in loss of This could reduce traction. Be espe-
control and/or a rollover accident. cially careful when towing a trailer.
. Always use tires of the same type, (AWD models)
size, brand, construction (bias, bias-
belted or radial), and tread pattern
on all four wheels. Install traction
devices on the front wheels when
driving on slippery roads and drive
carefully.
. Be sure to check the brakes imme-
diately after driving in mud or water.
See “Brake system” later in this
section for wet brakes.
. Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
hills. If you get out of the vehicle
and it rolls forward, backward or
sideways, you could be injured.
. Whenever you drive off-road
through sand, mud or water as deep
as the wheel hub, more frequent
maintenance may be required. See
the maintenance information in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide”.
Starting and driving 5-9
 Black plate (248,1)

IGNITION SWITCH
S35-D-110201-5700BCBC-6DD7-45B8-832F-13606871BC4B

. Never leave the Intelligent Key in-

side the vehicle when you leave the
vehicle.
. If the vehicle battery is discharged,
the ignition switch cannot be moved
from the LOCK position. Charge the
battery as soon as possible. See
“Jump starting” in the “6. In case of
emergency” section.

SSD0669 SSD0436

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if so Operating range

S35-D-110201-E7BEEF8F-362F-4C60-AE3A-079EA87D5DB5
equipped)
S35-D-110201-5BE72C3A-D258-4669-AB4A-70E75CB4440F The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
The Intelligent Key system can operate the for starting the engine when the Intelligent Key is
ignition switch without taking the key out from within the specified operating range * 1 .
your pocket or purse. The operating environment
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key
discharged or strong radio waves are present
system operation.
near the operating location, the Intelligent Key
system’s operating range becomes narrower
CAUTION and may not function properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
with you when operating the vehi- who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to turn
cle. the ignition switch to start the engine.

5-10 Starting and driving

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (249,1)

. The cargo area is not included in the CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-

operating range, but the Intelligent Key may MISSION (CVT)
S35-D-110201-7E60201D-5BC1-4A77-B022-2EB741764885
function. The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
. If the Intelligent Key is placed on the switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position
instrument panel, inside the glove box or until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)
door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not position.
function.
. When turning the ignition switch to the
. If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door LOCK position, make sure that the selector
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent lever is in the P (Park) position.
Key may function.
. When removing the key from the ignition
Some indicators and warnings for operation are switch (if it is inserted), make sure that the
displayed on the vehicle information display selector lever is in the P (Park) position.
between the speedometer and tachometer.
SSD0392 When the ignition switch cannot be turned to
(See “Vehicle information display” in the “2.
Without Intelligent Key system the LOCK position:
Instruments and controls” section.)
1. The SHIFT P warning (if so equipped)
appears on the vehicle information display
and a chime sounds.
2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
3. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ON
direction.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
5. Remove the key, if it is inserted in the ignition
switch.
If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
SSD0437A
position, the selector lever cannot be moved
With Intelligent Key system
from the P (Park) position. The selector lever can
Starting and driving 5-11

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


be moved if the ignition switch is in the ON
position with the foot brake pedal depressed.
The OFF position * 1 is between the LOCK and
ACC positions, although it is not marked on the
ignition switch.
KEY POSITIONS
S35-D-110201-06396A46-A2D1-4669-9D84-BF9FD54D3642
LOCK (0)
S35-D-110201-3766F96D-1AD8-4926-9BF6-89EEF00D4EE3
Except for the Intelligent Key equipped
model:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
The key can only be removed from the ignition
switch at this position.
For the Intelligent Key equipped model:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
PUSH OFF -
The ignition switch is locked at this position.
PUSH ON -
The ignition switch will be unlocked while
carrying the Intelligent Key.
OFF (1) S35-D-110201-B63E5331-2F3F-4787-8587-50D4072E5971
The power supply is turned off.
ACC (2)
S35-D-110201-A6FC5348-7C27-49D0-A408-EB98CE521FDB
The electrical accessory power activates without
the engine turned on.
5-12 Starting and driving
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
ON (3) S35-D-110201-9D3A8F96-70AB-4768-80FB-4789116DD6AD
The ignition system and the electrical accessory
power activate without the engine turned on.
START S35-D-110201-79ACFB24-9ADC-4251-AB1C-2447A8767855
(4)
The engine starter activates and the engine will
start. The ignition switch, when released, will
automatically turn to the ON position.
CAUTION
As soon as the engine has started,
release the ignition switch immediately.
Black plate (250,1)
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
S35-D-110201-EFA61046-21C4-4AD9-9C39-10A435B04B96
. Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
. Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid as
frequently as possible, or at least whenever
you refuel.
. Check that all windows and lights are clean.
. Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
. Lock all doors.
. Position seat and adjust head restraints.
. Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
. Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
. Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition key is turned to the ON position.
(See “Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders” in the “2. Instruments and con-
trols” section.)

STARTING THE ENGINE
S35-D-110201-87C2625E-B819-4174-914B-BC526532BA90
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position. (P is recommended.)
The starter is designed so that it does not
operate unless the selector lever is in either
of the above positions.
3. Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition
switch to START. Release the switch when
the engine starts. If the engine starts, but
fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
. If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold weather or when restart-
ing, depress the accelerator pedal a little
(approximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold
it and then crank the engine. Release the
accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
. If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Crank the engine for 5 - 6 seconds. After
cranking the engine, release the accel-
erator pedal. Crank the engine with your
foot off the accelerator pedal by
turning the ignition switch to START.
Release the ignition switch when the
engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails
to run, repeat the above procedure.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more
than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine
does not start, turn the ignition switch
off and wait 10 seconds before cranking
again, otherwise the starter could be
damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
seconds after starting. Do not race the
engine while warming it up. Drive at
moderate speed for a short distance first,
especially in cold weather. In cold weather,
keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 -
3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and
stopping the engine over a short period of
time may make the vehicle more difficult to
start.
Black plate (251,1)
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
S35-D-110201-B37603AF-ECB2-481C-A92E-035B1AB0690B
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANS-
MISSION (CVT)
S35-D-110201-5418F86B-BA47-41F8-8576-D09AB3751BAF
The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
in your vehicle is electronically controlled to
produce maximum power and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this
transmission are shown on the following pages.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
Engine power may be automatically re-
duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.
StartingS35-D-110201-09A6574C-D46F-4EF2-9E5A-FADC6C34FAE0
the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the selector
lever out of the P (Park) position.
This CVT is designed so that the foot
brake pedal must be depressed before
shifting from P (Park) to any driving
position while the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
The selector lever cannot be moved out
of the P (Park) position and into any of
the other positions if the ignition
switch is turned to the LOCK, OFF or
ACC position or if the key is removed.
Starting and driving 5-13
 Black plate (252,1)

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed, push
the selector lever button and move the
selector lever to a driving position.
3. Release the parking brake and foot brake
pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in
motion.
of engine braking which may result
in a collision, serious personal in-
jury or death. In addition, coasting
with the transmission in the N
(Neutral) position may cause ser-
ious damage to the transmission.

WARNING
. Do not depress the accelerator
pedal while shifting from P (Park)
or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D
(Drive), L (Low). Always depress
the brake pedal until shifting is
completed. Failure to do so could
cause you to lose control and have
an accident.
. Cold engine idle speed is high, so
use caution when shifting into a
forward or reverse gear before the
engine has warmed up.
. Never shift to P (Park) or R (Re-
verse) while vehicle is moving. Fail-
ure to do so could cause you to lose
control and have an accident.
. Except in an emergency, do not shift
to the N (Neutral) position while
driving. Doing so can cause a loss
CAUTION
. When stopping the vehicle on an
uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle
by depressing the accelerator pedal.
The foot brake should be used for
this purpose.
. Do not downshift abruptly on slip-
pery roads. This may cause a loss of
control.
SSD0665
Shifting S35-D-110201-06F074F0-546E-4865-A769-64F3F1CC3D96
To move the selector lever,
: *
Push the button A while depressing the
brake pedal.
: Push the button.
: Just move the selector lever.
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal, push the selector lever button and move
the selector lever from the P (Park) position to
any of the desired shift positions.

5-14 Starting and driving

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the selector
lever is in any position while the engine
is not running. Failure to do so could
cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly
or roll away and result in serious
personal injury or property damage.
If the ignition switch is turned to the OFF or
ACC position for any reason while the selector
lever is in any positions other than the P (Park),
the ignition switch cannot be turned to the
LOCK position.
If the ignition switch cannot be turned to the
LOCK position, perform the following steps:
1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is
stopped.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
while depressing the foot brake pedal.
3. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (253,1)
The engine can be started in this position. You
CAUTION may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled
engine while the vehicle is moving.
To prevent transmission damage, use D (Drive): GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
when the vehicle is completely stopped.
L (Low) (if so equipped):
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
P (Park): Use this position for maximum engine braking on
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes
Use this selector position when the vehicle is
and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not
parked or when starting the engine. Make sure
use the L position in any other circumstances.
the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake
pedal must be depressed and the selector
lever button pushed in to move the selec-
tor lever from N (Neutral) or any drive
position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
first, then move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
R (Reverse): GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Use this position to back up. Make sure the
vehicle is completely stopped before selecting
the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal
must be depressed and the selector lever
button pushed in to move the selector
lever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any
driving position to R (Reverse).
N (Neutral): GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged.
Starting and driving 5-15
 Black plate (254,1)

turned on, the switch or system may have a

malfunction. In this case, contact your NISSAN
dealer. Even if there is a malfunction in the
switch or system, this will not affect normal
driving.
. The SPORT mode automatically turns off if a
malfunction occurs.
. The SPORT mode only operates at speeds
of above 20 MPH (30km/h).
. If the engine is switched off with the SPORT
mode on, the SPORT mode resets to off
when the engine is restarted.
JVS0100X JVS0097X
CAUTION
SPORT mode switch
GUID-99239937-893E-4CAC-B84A-6159150240EC
Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch
S35-D-110201-6B915A43-9062-4BFB-A3D9-25A6FE35E78C
In the SPORT mode, the engine and transmis- . In the SPORT mode, fuel economy When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the
sion are controlled to set the engine speed may be reduced. selector lever in the D (Drive) position, the
higher than in the D (Drive) position. This . If the overdrive off mode is set when indicator light in the instrument panel illuminates.
enhances throttle response for a “sporty” driving the SPORT mode is on, the overd- Use the overdrive off mode when you need
feeling. rive off mode will take priority. improved engine braking.
To turn on the SPORT mode, push the SPORT To turn off the overdrive off mode, push the O/D
mode switch. The SPORT mode indicator light OFF switch again. The indicator light will
in the instrument panel illuminates. To turn off turn off.
the SPORT mode, push the SPORT mode
Each time the engine is started, or when the
switch again. The SPORT mode indicator light
selector lever is shifted to any position other
on the instrument panel turns off.
than the D (Drive) position, the overdrive off
If the SPORT mode indicator light does not mode will be automatically turned off.
illuminate when the SPORT mode switch is

5-16 Starting and driving

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


Accelerator downshift — In D position —
S35-D-110201-F9EEE14F-5BF2-4256-B19A-D9E9E24F5809
For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the
accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the
transmission down into a lower gear, depending
on the vehicle speed.
High fluid temperature protection mode
S35-D-110201-481FB4B1-F6C4-49B8-8504-1DFAEEA834E0
This transmission has a high fluid temperature
protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-
comes too high (for example, when climbing
steep grades in high temperature with heavy
loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine
power and, under some conditions, vehicle
speed will be decreased automatically to reduce
the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
speed can be controlled with the accelerator
pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be
limited.
Fail-safeS35-D-110201-A143CA3E-686B-4C25-9A61-E13835FDD47C
If the vehicle is driven under extreme
conditions, such as excessive wheel spin-
ning and subsequent hard braking, the
fail-safe system may be activated. The MIL
may illuminate to indicate the fail-safe
mode is activated. (See “Malfunction In-
dicator Light (MIL)” in the “2. Instruments
and controls” section.) This will occur even
if all electrical circuits are functioning
properly. In this case, turn the ignition
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (255,1)
switch to the OFF position and wait for 10
seconds. Then turn the switch back to the
ON position. The vehicle should return to
its normal operating condition. If it does
not return to its normal operating condi-
tion, have a NISSAN dealer check the
transmission and repair if necessary.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature pro-
tection mode or fail-safe operation
occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually SSD0667
reduced. The reduced speed may be
lower than other traffic, which could Shift lock release
S35-D-110201-E065713F-F36B-486B-97B3-054CF9D629B7
increase the chance of a collision. Be
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
especially careful when driving. If ne-
selector lever may not be moved from the P
cessary, pull to the side of the road at a
(Park) position even with the brake pedal
safe place and allow the transmission
depressed and the selector lever button pushed.
to return to normal operation, or have it
repaired if necessary. To move the selector lever, release the shift lock.
The selector lever can be moved to the N
(Neutral) position. This allows the vehicle to be
moved if the battery is discharged.
To release the shift lock, perform the following
procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position, and remove the key if it is inserted.
Starting and driving 5-17

PARKING BRAKE
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the shift lock release cover *
A WARNING
using a suitable tool.
4. Push down the shift lock release *
B using a
suitable tool.
5. Push the selector lever button *C and move
the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position
*D while holding down the shift lock
release.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. The
vehicle may be moved to the desired location.
Replace the removed shift lock release cover
after the operation.
If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the
P (Park) position, have a NISSAN dealer check
the CVT system as soon as possible.
WARNING
If the selector lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position while the
engine is running and the brake pedal
is depressed, the stop lights may not
work. Malfunctioning stop lights could
cause an accident injuring yourself and
others.
5-18 Starting and driving
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (256,1)
S35-D-110201-37FB1B7F-A7C8-447C-BDCE-AF83216954D5
. Be sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving. Failure to
do so can cause brake failure and
lead to an accident.
. Do not release the parking brake
from outside the vehicle.
. Do not use the gear shift in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully
engaged. SPA2331
. Do not leave children unattended in
To apply: Fully depress the parking brake pedal
a vehicle. They could release the
parking brake and cause an acci- *1 .
dent. To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake *
2 .
2. Depress the parking brake pedal *
1 and
the parking brake will be released.
3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
 Black plate (257,1)

CRUISE CONTROL
S35-D-110201-6BA0E60E-E6DD-4377-9F64-19E20F97589F
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON- . on winding or hilly roads
TROL S35-D-110201-E4BDAA6A-ABCA-43DB-9AF9-129EFB44F8C2 . on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,
. If the cruise control system malfunctions, it etc.)
will cancel automatically. The SET indicator . in very windy areas
on the vehicle information display will then
blink to warn the driver. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
. If the engine coolant temperature becomes
excessively high, the cruise control system
will cancel automatically.
. If the SET indicator on the vehicle informa-
tion display blinks, turn the cruise control
main switch off and have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer. SSD0668
. The SET indicator on the vehicle information
1. ACCEL/RES switch
display may blink when the cruise control
2. COAST/SET switch
main switch is turned ON while pushing the
3. CANCEL switch
ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET or CANCEL
4. MAIN (ON·OFF) switch
switch. To properly set the cruise control
system, perform the following procedures. CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
S35-D-110201-B1AAA37C-0645-4382-B965-6CDA161EFC80
The cruise control allows driving at a speed
between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)
WARNING without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving under the following conditions: To turn on the cruise control, push the MAIN
switch on. The CRUISE indicator on the vehicle
. when it is not possible to keep the information display will illuminate.
vehicle at a set speed
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle
. in heavy traffic or in traffic that to the desired speed, push the COAST/SET
varies in speed switch and release it. (The SET indicator light on
Starting and driving 5-19

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


the vehicle information display will illuminate.)
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your
vehicle will maintain the set speed.
. To pass another vehicle, depress the
accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously
set speed.
. The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
on winding or hilly roads. If this happens,
drive without the cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following methods:
. Push the CANCEL switch. The SET indica-
tor on the vehicle information display will
turn off.
. Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicator on
the vehicle information display will turn off.
. Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the CRUISE
and SET indicator on the vehicle information
display will turn off.
— If you depress the brake pedal while
pushing the ACCEL/RES or COAST/
SET switch and reset at the cruising
speed, the cruise control will disengage.
Turn the MAIN switch off once and then
turn it on again.
— The cruise control will automatically
cancel if the vehicle slows more than 8
MPH (12 km/h) below the set speed.
5-20 Starting and driving
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
— If you move the selector lever to the N
(Neutral) position, the cruise control will
be canceled.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
. Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the desired speed,
release the switch.
. Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed
will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following methods:
. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
. Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle slows
down to the desired speed.
. Push, then quickly release the COAST/SET
switch. Each time you do this, the set speed
will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and
release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle
will resume the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
Black plate (258,1)
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
S35-D-110201-5AF1C016-DF79-45EE-9EC9-6B7A1E7369A1
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to ob-
tain maximum engine performance and
ensure the future reliability and econo-
my of your new vehicle. Failure to
follow these recommendations may
result in shortened engine life and
reduced engine performance.
. Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.
. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
. Avoid quick starts.
. Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
. Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
GUID-08316153-E8EB-4B1D-A83C-780DAE9E7643
. Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
position.
. Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.
. Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
Keep a safe distance behind other vehicles.
. Select a gear range suitable to road condi-
tions.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep your engine tuned up.
. Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire
wear and lowers fuel economy.
. Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
. Air conditioner operation lowers fuel econ-
omy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
. Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
(See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-
tion” in the “9. Technical and consumer
information” section.)
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (259,1)
SONAR SYSTEM (if so equipped)
S35-D-110201-490E89DD-C779-4DC2-9A67-AD666DE770E4
SSD0723
. This system is not designed to
WARNING prevent contact with small or mov-
ing objects.
. The sonar system is a convenience
. The system is designed as an aid to
but it is not a substitute for proper
the driver in detecting large station-
parking. Always look around and
ary objects to help avoid damaging
check that it is safe to do so before
the vehicle. The system will not
parking. Always move slowly.
detect small objects below the
. Read and understand the limita- bumper, and may not detect objects
tions of the sonar system as con- close to the bumper or on the
tained in this section. Inclement ground.
weather may affect the function of
. If your vehicle sustains damage to
the sonar system; this may include
the bumper fascia, leaving it mis-
reduced performance or a false
aligned or bent, the sensing zone
activation.
Starting and driving 5-21

may be altered causing inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false
alarms.
CAUTION
Excessive noise will interfere with the
warning chime sound and the chime
may not be heard.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the sonar system is operational.
The sonar system sounds a tone to warn the
driver of obstacles near the bumper. The system
detects rear obstacles when the selector lever is
in the R (Reverse) position. The system may not
detect objects at speeds above 6 MPH (10
km/h) and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The sonar system detects obstacles up to 3.3 ft
(1 m) from the rear bumper with a decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the rear
bumper. Refer to the illustration for approximate
zone coverage areas. As you move closer to the
obstacle, the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 11.8 in (30 cm) away,
the tone will sound continuously.
5-22 Starting and driving
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so
equipped)
Keep the sonar sensors (located on the bumper
fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumula-
tions of dirt (do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects). If the sensors are covered, it will affect
the accuracy of the sonar system.
If the sonar system malfunctions, the beep
sounds for 3 seconds when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. Have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Black plate (260,1)
S35-D-110201-720F0BC2-3B55-4DBD-B301-E1E82EFAD720
WARNING
. For AWD equipped vehicles, do not
attempt to raise two wheels off the
ground and shift the transmission to
any drive or reverse position with
the engine running. Doing so may
result in drivetrain damage or un-
expected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle da-
mage or personal injury.
. Do not attempt to test an AWD
equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dy-
namometer (such as the dynam-
ometers used by some states for
emissions testing) or similar equip-
ment even if the other two wheels
are raised off the ground. Make sure
that you inform the test facility
personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with AWD before it is
placed on a dynamometer. Using
the wrong test equipment may re-
sult in drivetrain damage or unex-
pected vehicle movement which
could result in serious vehicle da-
mage or personal injury.
 Black plate (261,1)

LOCK mode *3: LOCK mode will automatically be cancelled when

S35-D-110201-52FD59B2-DFA7-49E6-842D-D91CD91B8135 the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
The AWD LOCK indicator light will
. If the AWD LOCK switch is operated while
illuminate.
accelerating or decelerating, or if the ignition
AUTO mode
S35-D-110201-F8749644-00DD-4275-920B-A9BD3EAB4EC8
switch is turned off, you may feel a jolt. This
The AWD LOCK indicator light will turn off. is normal.
. The oil temperature of power train parts will
AWD increase if the vehicle is continuously
LOCK Use
AWD operated under conditions where the differ-
Wheel driven indica- condi-
mode ence in rotation between the front and rear
tor tions
light wheels is large (wheel slip), such as when
Distribution of torque driving the vehicle on rough roads through
to the front and rear sand, mud or freeing a stuck vehicle. In
SSD0418 wheels changes auto- these cases, the AWD warning light blinks
For driv-
matically, depending
ing on rapidly and the AWD mode changes to
on road conditions en- Turns
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) LOCK AUTO
countered [100:0] ↔ off.
paved or 2WD to protect the powertrain parts. If you
SWITCH OPERATIONS slippery
[50:50]. stop driving with the engine idling and wait
S35-D-110201-E7D4937A-2081-4CEB-9B79-163753F74E25 roads
The AWD LOCK switch located on the lower This results in im- until the warning light stops blinking, the
proved driving stability.
side of the instrument panel. This switch is used *1 AWD returns to the AUTO mode.
to select the AUTO or LOCK mode depending For driv-
on the driving conditions. AWD ing on
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
Each time you push the lower part of the switch
LOCK
*2, *3
LOCK rough WARNING
roads
*A , the AWD mode will switch:
. When driving straight, shift the AWD
AUTO ? LOCK ? AUTO. *1: When the rotation difference between the front
LOCK switch to AUTO. Do not oper-
and rear wheels is large, the AWD mode may
change from AUTO to LOCK for a while, however,
ate the AWD LOCK switch when
this is not a malfunction. making a turn or backing up.
*2: LOCK mode will change to AUTO mode auto- . Do not operate the AWD LOCK
matically when the vehicle has been driven at a switch with the front wheel spin-
high speed. The AWD LOCK indicator light turns ning.
off.
Starting and driving 5-23

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


. Engine idling speed is high while
warming up the engine. Be espe-
cially careful when starting or driv-
ing on slippery surfaces.
. When turning the vehicle in LOCK
mode on paved roads, you may feel
a braking effect. This is a normal
condition of the AWD model.
SSD0336B
AWD WARNING LIGHT
S35-D-110201-3BC7286A-1220-41F9-A284-3DEC13D72208
The AWD warning light is located in the meter.
The AWD warning light illuminates when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It
turns off soon after the engine is started.
If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system
5-24 Starting and driving
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (262,1)
while the engine is running, the warning light will
come on.
The warning light may blink rapidly (about twice
per second) while trying to free a stuck vehicle
due to high powertrain oil temperature. The
driving mode may change to 2WD. AUTO mode
may change to LOCK mode before the warning
light blinks. If the warning light blinks rapidly
during operation, stop the vehicle with the
engine idling in a safe place immediately. Then
if the light turns off after a while, you can
continue driving.
A large difference between the diameters of
front and rear wheels will make the warning light
blink slowly (about once per two seconds). Pull
off the road in a safe area, and idle the engine.
Check that all tire sizes are the same, tire
pressure is correct and tires are not worn.
CAUTION
. If the warning light remains on after
the above operation, have your
vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
as soon as possible.
. If the warning light comes on while
driving there may be a malfunction
in the AWD system. Reduce the
vehicle speed and have your vehicle
 Black plate (263,1)

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
GUID-DF673D76-EF6A-4032-840A-C9929934DE7D

checked by a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible.
. The powertrain may be damaged if
you continue driving with the warn-
ing light blinking rapidly.
. Never drive on dry hard surface
roads in the LOCK mode, as this
will overload the powertrain and
may cause a serious malfunction.

SSD0488

go and cannot be moved without

WARNING
. Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags. They
may ignite and cause a fire.
. Safe parking procedures require
that both the parking brake be set
and the transmission placed into P
(Park). Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or
roll away and result in an accident.
Make sure the selector lever has
been pushed as far forward as it can
depressing the foot brake pedal.
. Never leave the engine running
while the vehicle is unattended.
. Do not leave children unattended
inside the vehicle. They could un-
knowingly activate switches or con-
trols. Unattended children could
become involved in serious acci-
dents.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park)
position.
Starting and driving 5-25

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
. HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: *
Turn the wheels into the curb and move
the vehicle forward until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
. HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: * 2
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
. HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB: * 3
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away from
the center of the road if it moves.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the key, if inserted.
5-26 Starting and driving
Black plate (264,1)
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
SYSTEM
S35-D-110201-5655C900-7810-4966-B711-3C0BA783C55E
wheel operations that could cause the electric
WARNING power steering system to overheat.
You may hear a sound when the steering wheel
1 . If the engine is not running or is is operated quickly. However, this is not a
turned off while driving, the power malfunction.
assist for the steering will not work.
If the electric power steering warning light
Steering will be harder to operate. illuminates while the engine is running, it may
. When the electric power steering indicate the electric power steering system is
warning light illuminates with the not functioning properly and may need servicing.
engine running, the power assist for Have the electric power steering system
the steering will cease operation. checked by a NISSAN dealer. (See “Electric
You will still have control of the power steering warning light” in the “2. Instru-
vehicle but the steering will be ments and controls” section.)
harder to operate.
When the electric power steering warning light
illuminates with the engine running, the power
The electric power steering system is designed assist for the steering will cease operation. You
to provide power assist while driving to operate
will still have control of the vehicle. However,
the steering wheel with light force. greater steering effort is needed, especially in
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly sharp turns and at low speeds.
or continuously while parking or driving at a very
low speed, the power assist for the steering
wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent
overheating of the electric power steering
system and protect it from getting damaged.
While the power assist is reduced, steering
wheel operation will become heavy. When the
temperature of the electric power steering
system goes down, the power assist level will
return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

BRAKE SYSTEM
S35-D-110201-3275E820-EF43-446C-84CA-9CC25DE76F9B
BRAKING PRECAUTIONS
S35-D-110201-36A420DF-DDD9-4970-91D6-6FDB3410EA51
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at two wheels.
You may feel a small click and hear a sound
when the brake pedal is fully depressed slowly.
This is not a malfunction and indicates that the
brake assist mechanism is operating properly.
VacuumS35-D-110201-127E404B-D271-4E47-9AAA-019A819737A5
assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and the stopping
distance will be longer.
Using the brakes
S35-D-110201-EB326E31-0F05-490F-9A4D-C49C106D08C5
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will cause overheating of the
brakes, wearing out the brake and pads faster
and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
WARNING
. While driving on a slippery surface,
be careful when braking, accelerat-
ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking
or accelerating could cause the
wheels to skid and result in an
accident.
. If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
Braking will be harder.
Wet brakes
S35-D-110201-8FADFC38-A56F-4709-966C-E2E9C1A22C2C
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up
the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to
normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds
until the brakes function correctly.
Black plate (265,1)
PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN
S35-D-110201-22F565D3-8BC6-45BD-8717-77912EC9319F
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual and can be performed by a
NISSAN dealer.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
S35-D-110201-BADDA557-0F21-4253-B08D-550F96292928
WARNING
. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
is a sophisticated device, but it
cannot prevent accidents resulting
from careless or dangerous driving
techniques. It can help maintain
vehicle control during braking on
slippery surfaces. Remember that
stopping distances on slippery sur-
faces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping
distances may also be longer on
rough, gravel or snow covered
roads, or if you are using tire chains.
Always maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Ultimately, the driver is responsible
Starting and driving 5-27

for safety.
. Tire type and condition may also
affect braking effectiveness.
— When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
— When installing a spare tire,
make sure that it is the proper
size and type as specified on the
Tire and Loading Information
label. See “Tire and loading
information label” in the “9.
Technical and consumer infor-
mation” section of this manual.
— For detailed information, see
“Wheels and tires” in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls
the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to
prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on
5-28 Starting and driving
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (266,1)
slippery surfaces. If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
Using the system
S35-D-110201-EECE86D6-FF8F-42C2-B139-BF05AF32B3BE checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady Normal S35-D-110201-3C7B8B73-5F7B-44E6-B702-4024AAD51CEB
operation
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH
ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from (5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to
locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles. road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels
WARNING are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly
applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so action is similar to pumping the brakes very
may result in increased stopping dis- quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake
tances. pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or
feel a vibration from the actuator when it is
operating. This is normal and indicates that the
Self-testS35-D-110201-B89EE4B7-4EC0-42A0-AAC9-0035053E8A9B
feature ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsa-
tion may indicate that road conditions are
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
hazardous and extra care is required while
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
driving.
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward
or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may
hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the
brake pedal. This is normal and does not
indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses
a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and
illuminates the ABS warning light on the
instrument panel. The brake system then oper-
ates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
S35-D-110201-D6FDB021-412C-46AD-9A43-77A8616112D0
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs
and vehicle motion. Under certain driving con-
ditions, the VDC system helps to perform the
following functions.
. Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.
. Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).
. Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following
conditions:
— understeer (vehicle tends to not follow
the steered path despite increased
steering input)
— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions).
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss
of vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the VDC
warning light in the instrument panel flashes
so note the following:
. The road may be slippery or the system may
determine some action is required to help
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
VDC system is working properly.
. Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning
light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC
warning light illuminates in the instrument
panel. The VDC system automatically turns off.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
system. The VDC off indicator illuminates to
indicate the VDC system is off. When the VDC
switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC
system still operates to prevent one drive wheel
from slipping by transferring power to a non
slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning light
flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions
are off, and the VDC warning light will not
flash. The VDC system is automatically reset to
on when the ignition switch is placed in the off
position then back to the on position.
See“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning
light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
off indicator light” in the “2. Instruments and
Black plate (267,1)
controls” section.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in
reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test
occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel
a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and
is not an indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
. The VDC system is designed to help
the driver maintain stability but
does not prevent accidents due to
abrupt steering operation at high
speeds or by careless or dangerous
driving techniques. Reduce vehicle
speed and be especially careful
when driving and cornering on slip-
pery surfaces and always drive care-
fully.
. Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-
sion. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs,
stabilizer bars, bushings and
wheels are not NISSAN recom-
mended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC
system may not operate properly.
Starting and driving 5-29

This could adversely affect vehicle
handling performance, and the VDC
warning light may illuminate.
. If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extre-
mely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and the
VDC warning light may illumi-
nate.
. If engine control related parts are
not NISSAN recommended or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC
warning light may illuminate.
. When driving on extremely inclined
surfaces such as higher banked
corners, the VDC system may not
operate properly and the VDC warn-
ing light may illuminate. Do not
drive on these types of roads.
. When driving on an unstable sur-
face such as a turntable, ferry,
elevator or ramp, the VDC warning
light may illuminate. This is not
a malfunction. Restart the engine
after driving onto a stable surface.
. If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are
5-30 Starting and driving
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
used, the VDC system may not
operate properly and the VDC warn-
ing light may illuminate.
. The VDC system is not a substitute
for winter tires or tire chains on a
snow covered road.
Black plate (268,1)
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
S35-D-110201-BFC9DC49-B18B-4547-B2C1-822B40D3C815
FREEING A GUID-141B6DB3-B5C0-4E7F-8EE0-2A7622AB28C6
FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply
deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the
key hole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob.
ANTI-FREEZE
GUID-2773CB71-40A2-443B-9552-B7F45AAB30D8
In the winter when it is anticipated that the
outside temperature will drop below 328F (08C),
check the anti-freeze to assure proper winter
protection. For additional information, see “En-
gine cooling system” in the “8. Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section.
BATTERY
S35-D-110201-690C952E-7BC1-479E-B70E-6C8A62F3BCC3
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the battery
fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To
maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should
be checked regularly. For additional information,
see “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
GUID-8A3AE603-5D83-49FC-9E8F-A09867045DAD
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the
“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
S35-D-110201-61BC6CE8-E002-4E5F-AC61-F13F41A296A1
SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide
superior performance on dry pavement. How-
ever, the performance of these tires will be
substantially reduced in snowy and icy condi-
tions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy
roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD &
SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size,
speed rating and availability information.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before
installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
Tire chains may be used. For details, see “Tire
chains” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) model
GUID-EE61DD03-84FE-4464-93B4-F693BED61CE7
If you install snow tires, they must also be the
same size, brand, construction and tread pattern
on all four wheels.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (269,1)
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
S35-D-110201-08727745-6DB3-41EB-A116-4A77713528D6 . Allow more stopping distance under
It is recommended that the following items be these conditions. Braking should be
carried in the vehicle during winter: started sooner than on dry pave-
. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ment.
ice and snow from the windows and wiper . Allow greater following distances
blades. on slippery roads.
. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the . Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
jack to give it firm support. These may appear on an otherwise
. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow- clear road in shaded areas. If a
drifts. patch of ice is seen ahead, brake
before reaching it. Try not to brake
. Extra window washer fluid to refill the
while on the ice, and avoid any
reservoir tank.
sudden steering maneuvers.
DRIVING ONGUID-95DB7CAC-A319-4B34-942B-E334028E4579
SNOW OR ICE
. Do not use cruise control on slip-
pery roads.
WARNING
. Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
. Wet ice (328F, 08C and freezing rain), gases under your vehicle. Keep
very cold snow or ice can be slick snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
and very hard to drive on. The from around your vehicle.
vehicle will have much less traction
or “grip” under these conditions. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until the
road is salted or sanded.
. Whatever the condition, drive with
caution. Accelerate and slow down
with care. If accelerating or down-
shifting too fast, the drive wheels
will lose even more traction.
Starting and driving 5-31

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
S35-D-110201-BD5F9528-DB57-4ECE-BF7C-C0FA0439CFC3
Engine block heaters are used to assist in cold
temperature starting.
The engine block heater should be used when
the outside temperature is 208F (−78C) or lower.
To use the engine block heater
GUID-B8AF2CAF-E6EA-4CB7-964D-6D7EAF0F901E
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine
block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on
outside temperatures, to properly warm the
engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to
turn the engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and
properly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.
5-32 Starting and driving
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (270,1)
WARNING
. Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical sys-
tem or a 2-pronged adapter. You can
be seriously injured by an electrical
shock if you use an ungrounded
connection.
. Disconnect and properly store the
engine block heater cord before
starting the engine. Damage to the
cord could result in an electrical
shock and can cause serious injury.
. Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged
extension cord rated for at least
10A. Plug the extension cord into a
Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) pro-
tected, grounded 110-VAC outlet.
Failure to use the proper extension
cord or a grounded outlet can result
in a fire or electrical shock and
cause serious personal injury.
 Black plate (271,1)

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire .........................................................................................

... 6-2 If your vehicle overheats ......................................................
... 6-11
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .................... ... 6-2 Towing your vehicle ..............................................................
... 6-12
Changing a flat tire .............................................................
... 6-2 Towing recommended by NISSAN ...........................
... 6-13
Jump starting ..............................................................................
... 6-9 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ............... ... 6-14
Push starting ...........................................................................
... 6-10

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


FLAT TIRE
S35-D-110201-EF2663AC-5667-4F76-8F00-52984A4E59BC
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYS-
TEM (TPMS)GUID-0C5C2AE1-3515-4587-A5FA-5B3AD2913F9D
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When
the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning (if so
equipped) appears on the vehicle information
display, one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with
low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and
warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning
light. This system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h). For more details, see “Warning/indicator
lights and audible reminders” in the “2. Instru-
ments and controls” section and “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “5. Starting
and driving” section.
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sud-
den steering maneuvers or abrupt
braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull
off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possi-
ble. Driving with under-inflated tires
6-2 In case of emergency
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
may permanently damage the tires
and increase the likelihood of tire
failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an
accident and could result in serious
personal injury. Check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires. Adjust the tire
pressure to the recommended COLD
tire pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label to turn
the low tire pressure warning light
OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as possi-
ble.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
. Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
. Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
Black plate (272,1)
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors.
CHANGING GUID-7F502885-999B-4F16-9B7A-9469FE323A90
A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions
below.
Stopping the vehicle
S35-D-110201-DA918CAE-0F67-4558-BF28-3DEF851F78D5
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Move the selector lever to the P
(Park) position.
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
. Make sure the parking brake is
securely applied and the transmis-
sion is shifted into the P (Park)
position.
 Black plate (273,1)

. Never change tires when the vehicle

is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.
This is hazardous.
. Never change tires if oncoming
traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait
for professional road assistance.

MCE0001A SCE0958

Blocking wheels
S35-D-110201-ED4AAED5-0B0B-4094-B7EA-EC3CABAC1551
Getting S35-D-110201-00B2E6C6-F5E9-434D-8DD3-1F7939362975
the spare tire and tools
Place suitable blocks * 1 at both the front and 1. Open the lift gate.
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat 2. Remove the cargo cover (if so equipped).
tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is (See “Cargo cover” in the “2. Instruments
jacked up. and controls” section.)
3. Lift up the luggage floor board *
1 (foldable
WARNING or separate type).

Be sure to block the wheel as the

vehicle may move and result in personal
injury.

In case of emergency 6-3

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (274,1)

SCE0858 SCE0699
Jacking tools
4. Remove the lids of the luggage side boxes.
6. Remove the jacking tools and the spare tire.
Jacking tools: Remove the jack by turning it,
then remove the other tools.

SCE0859

5. Remove the luggage floor box (Type A or B)

by turning the clips counterclockwise.

6-4 In case of emergency

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


JVE0026X
Spare tire
Type A:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Rotate the clamp until it can be removed then
remove the spare tire.
Type B: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Rotate the clamp until it can be removed then
relocate the subwoofer to a side of the cargo
area and remove the spare tire.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SCE0630
Removing wheel cover (if so equipped)
S35-D-110201-4604A27A-FD46-4A3C-8D40-A151EC14119E
WARNING
Never use your hands to remove the
wheel cover. This may cause personal
injury.
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod
as illustrated.
Apply cloth *2 between the wheel and jack rod
to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.
Black plate (275,1)
Jacking up the vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
S35-D-110201-BC3D3D5D-920C-496B-A55B-07519536C45F
WARNING
. Never get under the vehicle while it
is supported only by the jack. If it is
necessary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.
. Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle
on other vehicles. The jack is de-
signed for lifting only your vehicle
during a tire change.
. Use the correct jack-up points.
Never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
. Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
. Never use blocks on or under the
jack.
*
1
. Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack, as it may
cause the vehicle to move.
. Do not allow passengers to stay in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
In case of emergency 6-5
 Black plate (276,1)

Carefully read the caution label attached

to the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.

SCE0572
Jack-up point
1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.
The jack should be used on level firm
ground.

6-6 In case of emergency

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (277,1)

SCE0039
SCE0751

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by InstallingS35-D-110201-B06784D0-8D13-49D1-B9F2-0F787FEEAEAE

the spare tire
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut The spare tire is designed for emergency
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts use. (See specific instructions under the
until the tire is off the ground. heading “Wheels and tires” in the “8.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.)
and rod with both hands as shown above. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears between the wheel and hub.
the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
then remove the tire. the wheel nuts finger tight. Check that all the
wheel nuts contact the wheel surface
horizontally.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence
as illustrated (*
1 ,*2 ,* 3 ,* 4 ,* 5 ), more

In case of emergency 6-7

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


than 2 times, until they are tight.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the
vehicle completely.
WARNING
. Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
. Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts. This could
cause the nuts to become loose.
. Retighten the wheel nuts when the
vehicle has been driven for 600
miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a
flat tire, etc.).
. As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened
to specification at all times. It is
6-8 In case of emergency
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (278,1)
recommended that wheel nuts be tigh- become dangerous projectiles in an
tened to specifications at each lubrica- accident or sudden stop.
tion interval.
. Adjust tire pressure to the COLD
. The T-type spare tire and small size
spare tire are designed for emer-
pressure.
gency use. See specific instructions
COLD pressure: under the heading “Wheels and
After the vehicle has been parked for tires” in the “8. Maintenance and
three hours or more or driven less than do-it-yourself” section.
1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label
affixed to the driver side center pillar.
StowingS35-D-110201-46E8664C-3342-4146-A970-F78203D4273A
the damaged tire and the tools
1. Securely store the damaged tire, jack and
tools in the storage area.
2. Replace the luggage floor box.
3. Replace the lids on the luggage side boxes.
4. Close the luggage floor board.
5. Replace the cargo cover (if so equipped).
6. Close the lift gate.
WARNING
. Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly
secured after use. Such items can

JUMP STARTING
S35-D-110201-48EEB8C9-1FF6-4C57-8DA2-F37CAF5AD9D0
To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be
followed.
WARNING
. If done incorrectly, jump starting
can lead to a battery explosion,
resulting in severe injury or death.
It could also damage your vehicle.
. Explosive hydrogen gas is always
present in the vicinity of the battery.
Keep all sparks and flames away
from the battery.
. Do not allow battery fluid to come
into contact with eyes, skin, clothing
or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is
a corrosive sulfuric acid solution
which can cause severe burns. If
the fluid should come into contact
with anything, immediately flush the
contacted area with water.
. Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.
. The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (279,1)
. Whenever working on or near a
battery, always wear suitable eye
protectors (for example, goggles or
industrial safety spectacles) and
remove rings, metal bands, or any
other jewelry. Do not lean over the
battery when jump starting.
. Do not attempt to jump start a
frozen battery. It could explode
and cause serious injury.
. Your vehicle has an automatic en-
gine cooling fan. It could come on at
any time. Keep hands and other SCE0707
objects away from it.
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage
to the charging system and cause
personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle
* B , position the two vehicles (* A and * B )
to bring their batteries into close proximity to
each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
In case of emergency 6-9

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the selector
lever to the P (Park) position. Switch off all
unnecessary electrical systems (lights, hea-
ter, air conditioner, etc.).
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with a firmly
wrung out moist cloth to reduce explosion
hazard.
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as
illustrated (*
1 ? *
2 ? * 3 ? * 4 ).
For the vehicle equipped with Intelli-
gent Key system:
If the battery is discharged, the ignition
switch cannot be moved from the LOCK
position. Connect the jumper cables to
the booster vehicle * B before turning
the ignition switch.
CAUTION
. Always connect positive (+) to posi-
tive (+) and negative (−) to body
ground (for example, as illustrated),
not to the battery.
. Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine
compartment and that the cable
clamps do not contact any other
6-10 In case of emergency
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (280,1)
PUSH STARTING
S35-D-110201-00D470C0-9627-4316-B628-96D5F00345E5
Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.
metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle *
B CAUTION
and let it run for a few minutes.
Continuously Variable Transmission
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster
(CVT) models cannot be push-started
vehicle *B at about 2,000 rpm, and start
or tow-started. Attempting to do so may
the engine of the vehicle *
A being jump
cause transmission damage.
started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged
for more than 10 seconds. If the engine
does not start right away, turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position
and wait 10 seconds before trying
again.
7. After starting your engine, carefully discon-
nect the negative cable and then the positive
cable (*4 ? * 3 ? * 2 ? * 1 ).
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
S35-D-110201-15996538-EB26-41A2-862D-02017A39A8B4
CAUTION
. Do not continue to drive if your
vehicle overheats. Doing so could
cause engine damage or a vehicle
fire.
. To avoid the danger of being
scalded, never remove the radiator
cap while the engine is still hot.
When the radiator cap is removed,
pressurized hot water will spurt out,
possibly causing serious injury.
. Do not open the hood if steam is
coming out.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc., take the following steps:
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the selector
lever to the P (Park) position.
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (281,1)
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for cooling fan can start at any time.
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or
6. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.)
coolant level in the reservoir tank with the
Do not open the hood further until no steam
engine running. Add coolant to the reservoir
or coolant can be seen.
tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired
4. Open the engine hood. at a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the
engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the
engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or
the engine cooling fan. The engine
In case of emergency 6-11
 Black plate (282,1)

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

S35-D-110201-E458A21E-F522-446E-AD11-E06DD9EFDDFC
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in . Always attach safety chains before
Canada) and local regulations for towing must towing.
be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could
damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are For information about towing your vehicle behind
available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service a recreational vehicle (RV), see “Flat towing” in
operators are familiar with the applicable laws the “9. Technical and consumer information”
and procedures for towing. To assure proper section of this manual.
towing and to prevent accidental damage to
your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you
have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is
advisable to have the service operator carefully
read the following precautions.

WARNING
. Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
. Never get under your vehicle after it
has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION
. When towing, make sure that the
transmission, axles, steering system
and powertrain are in working con-
dition. If any unit is damaged, dol-
lies must be used.

6-12 In case of emergency

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (283,1)

SCE0439
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSANS35-D-110201-F96AC8F4-98D2-4F10-B053-82D6761A1F0F
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
S35-D-110201-CED1A0D8-ADC3-4F6F-8821-518167544489
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be
used when towing your vehicle or place the
vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION
Never tow AWD models with any of the
wheels on the ground as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to the
powertrain.

In case of emergency 6-13

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models
S35-D-110201-E21C6C94-BCE3-4ED2-8CE3-1E4014D701BF
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off the
ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as
illustrated.
. When towing CVT models with the
CAUTION
. Never tow Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with
the front wheels on the ground or
four wheels on the ground (forward
or backward), as this may cause
serious and expensive damage to
6-14 In case of emergency
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (284,1)
. When towing a CVT model with the
rear wheels on the ground (if you do
not use towing dollies): Always
release the parking brake.
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)S35-D-110201-67C46576-6ABB-4C45-8C09-13FC485C5DFA
WARNING
. Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
. Do not spin your tires at high speed.
SCE0438
This could cause them to explode
and result in serious injury. Parts of
your vehicle could also overheat
the transmission. If it is necessary to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels and be damaged.
raised, always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
front wheels on towing dollies:
— Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position, and secure the
steering wheel in a straight-
ahead position with a rope or
similar device.
— Move the selector lever to the N
(Neutral) position.

SCE0701
Front Rear
Pulling a stuck vehicle Rear: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
GUID-241C46D0-D4CF-4356-A55F-CB3B28F345C7
Do not use the tie down hooks for towing or Do not use the tie down hook to pull the vehicle.
vehicle recovery.
Front: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407 CAUTION
Securely install the recovery hook * 1 (stored in
the luggage room) as illustrated. . Tow chains or cables must be at-
Make sure that the hook is properly secured in tached only to the main structural
the original place after use. members of the vehicle or the
recovery hook. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle body will be damaged.
. Do not use the vehicle tie down
hooks to free a vehicle stuck in
sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow a
vehicle using the vehicle tie down
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (285,1)
hooks.
. Always pull the cable straight out
from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull on the vehicle at an angle.
. Pulling devices should be routed so
they do not touch any part of the
suspension, steering, brake or cool-
ing systems.
. Pulling devices such as ropes or
canvas straps are not recommended
for use in vehicle towing or recov-
ery.
SCE0678
Rocking a stuck vehicle
GUID-B828A8FE-C292-4C20-9C57-2AEA4FCB8CE2
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive).
In case of emergency 6-15
 Black plate (286,1)

. Apply the accelerator as little as possible

to maintain the rocking motion.
. Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D.
. Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.

6-16 In case of emergency

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (287,1)

MEMO

In case of emergency 6-17

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (288,1)

MEMO

6-18 In case of emergency

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (289,1)

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior .......................................................................

... 7-2 Cleaning interior .......................................................................
... 7-4
Washing .................................................................................
... 7-2 Air fresheners .....................................................................
... 7-4
Waxing ...................................................................................
... 7-2 Floor mats ...........................................................................
... 7-5
Removing spots ...................................................................
... 7-3 Seat belts ............................................................................
... 7-6
Underbody .............................................................................
... 7-3 Corrosion protection ................................................................
... 7-6
Glass ......................................................................................
... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to
Wheels ...................................................................................
... 7-3 vehicle corrosion ...............................................................
... 7-6
Chrome parts .......................................................................
... 7-3 Environmental factors influence the rate
Tire dressing .........................................................................
... 7-4 of corrosion ........................................................................
... 7-6
To protect your vehicle from corrosion ....................... ... 7-6

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


CLEANING EXTERIOR
S35-D-110201-97E652FB-6FC1-4CAF-A36B-BA819E8B9785
In order to maintain the appearance of your
vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle
as soon as you can:
. after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain
. after driving on coastal roads
. when contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs
get on the paint surface
. when dust or mud builds up on the surface
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
WASHING
S35-D-110201-F8B4AFF1-6753-4718-95B3-A25D459BF1B1
Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and
plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly
using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or
general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with
clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
7-2 Appearance and care
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
CAUTION
. Do not use car washes that use acid
in the detergent. Some car washes,
especially brushless ones, use some
acid for cleaning. The acid may react
with some plastic vehicle compo-
nents, causing them to crack. This
could affect their appearance, and
also could cause them not to func-
tion properly. Always check with
your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
. Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical
detergents, gasoline or solvents.
. Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or while the vehicle body is
hot, as the surface may become
water-spotted.
. Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Black plate (290,1)
water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be regularly cleaned. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface
by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.
WAXING
S35-D-110201-7B44DE95-705F-4A49-ACA1-F7408FA91BFA
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing
is recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
reapplying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
. Wax your vehicle only after a thorough
washing. Follow the instructions supplied
with the wax.
. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compound or aggressive polishing on a
base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS
S35-D-110201-AF18F2E1-E555-466D-9323-0EAEAC5C0420
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage
or staining. Special cleaning products are
available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive
accessory stores.
UNDERBODY
S35-D-110201-F3F949ED-94FF-4B80-A59C-E2371D129B96
In areas where road salt is used in winter, the
underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will
prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the
underbody and suspension. Before the winter
period and again in the spring, the underseal
must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASSS35-D-110201-E54A40AE-67AC-4FD4-B3EA-7A763A8EA337
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust
film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass
to become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the win-
dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,
abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based
disinfectant cleaners. They could da-
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
mage the electrical conductors, radio
antenna elements or rear window
defroster elements.
WHEELS
S35-D-110201-00E2038C-B5F0-4782-A428-93796F0E20A8
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to
maintain their appearance.
. Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
. NISSAN recommends that the road wheels
be waxed to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.
CAUTION
Do not use abrasive cleaners when
washing the wheels.
Black plate (291,1)
Aluminum alloy wheels
S35-D-110201-EB480337-BFBD-4E83-93DC-ACC1E16621EF
Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a
mild soap solution, especially during winter
months in areas where road salt is used. Salt
could discolor the wheels if not removed.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
. Do not use a cleaner that uses
strong acid or alkali contents to
clean the wheels.
. Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The
wheel temperature should be the
same as ambient temperature.
. Rinse the wheel to completely re-
move the cleaner within 15 minutes
after the cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
S35-D-110201-7E5A50BC-120C-4BD7-B2A8-3446E4E5284F
Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
Appearance and care 7-3

TIRE DRESSING
GUID-AAEE2877-2189-40B9-920D-DCBC9F09133D
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the
rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it
may react with the coating and form a com-
pound. This compound may come off the tire
while driving and stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
. Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
ing on the tire dissolves more easily with an
oil-based tire dressing.
. Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire tread/
grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
. Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is
completely removed from the tire tread/
grooves.
. Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by tire dressing manufacturer.
7-4 Appearance and care
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
CLEANING INTERIOR
S35-D-110201-587845C9-6398-4952-B930-68C63A2662F7
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dam-
pened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean
with a dry soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric
protectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and
result in serious personal injury.
Black plate (292,1)
CAUTION
. Never use benzine, thinner, or any
similar material.
. Small dirt particles can be abrasive
and damaging to the leather sur-
faces and should be removed
promptly. Do not use saddle soap,
car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents or am-
monia-based cleaners as they may
damage the leather’s natural finish.
. Never use fabric protectors unless
recommended by the manufacturer.
. Do not use glass or plastic cleaner
on meter or gauge lens covers. It
may damage the lens cover.
AIR FRESHENERS
GUID-C3B241D4-0516-4BEC-97AC-5483C90DD06D
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could
affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air
freshener, take the following precautions:
. Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they contact
vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air
freshener in a location that allows it to hang
free and not contact an interior surface.
 Black plate (293,1)

. Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on easier to clean the interior. Mats should be
the vents. These products can cause maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if
immediate damage and discoloration when they become excessively worn.
spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions before using air fresheners.
FLOORS35-D-110201-B2E74394-B3E1-4495-9910-3041A54BCA20
MATS

WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference
that may result in a collision or injury:
SAI0038
. NEVER place a floor mat on top of
another floor mat in the driver front
Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s side
position.
only) S35-D-110201-6BE4BC91-9348-4906-A18E-C294E0C5E93A
. Use only genuine NISSAN floor
This vehicle includes front floor mat brackets to
mats specifically designed for use
act as floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
in your vehicle model. See your
mats have been specially designed for your
NISSAN dealer for more informa-
vehicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has
tion.
grommet holes in it. To install, position the mat
. Properly position the mats in the by placing the floor mat bracket hook through
floorwell using the floor mat posi- the floor mat grommet hole while centering the
tioning aid. See “Floor mat posi- mat in the floorwell.
tioning aid (driver’s side only)” later
Periodically check to make certain that the mats
in this section.
are properly positioned.
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can
extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
Appearance and care 7-5

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


SEAT BELTS
S35-D-110201-C770D13E-C383-46EE-A06C-46D1543B0A62
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap
solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in
the shade before using them.
See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” sec-
tion.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or
chemical solvents to clean the seat
belts, since these materials may se-
verely weaken the seat belt webbing.
7-6 Appearance and care
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
CORROSION PROTECTION
S35-D-110201-F44B796D-CF5C-45AD-A73C-62C26924B2AF
MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRI-
BUTINGS35-D-110201-445B63E4-1AAA-434C-9044-B3020018D404
TO VEHICLE CORROSION
. The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
. Damage to paint and other protective coat-
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLU-
ENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION
S35-D-110201-69B386BA-615F-4B49-A4C8-910975B562E2
Moisture
S35-D-110201-B65B2839-2AB8-424B-AB21-FD3BD4D02E89
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the
vehicle body underside can accelerate corro-
sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely
inside the vehicle, and should be removed for
drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.
RelativeS35-D-110201-A7199B6A-97DE-4938-84D8-1900B1E54AB3
humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing where
atmospheric pollution exists, or where road salt
is used.
Black plate (294,1)
Temperature
S35-D-110201-661832A3-A326-4D3F-8EC4-669D839F9197
A temperature increase will accelerate the rate
of corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.
Air pollution
S35-D-110201-7FC55DDC-7BED-4DB0-B4B7-1A27762C50A3
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will
accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will
also accelerate the disintegration of paint
surfaces.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION
S35-D-110201-A8AB3EBD-C334-46B0-9E9A-F382191A3E60
. Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
. Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
. Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
. Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
CAUTION
. NEVER remove dirt, sand or other
debris from the passenger compart-
ment by washing it out with a hose.
 Black plate (295,1)

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

. Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic
components inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some areas,
consult a NISSAN dealer.

Appearance and care 7-7

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (296,1)

MEMO

7-8 Appearance and care

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (297,1)

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirement ........................................................

... 8-2 Air cleaner ...............................................................................
... 8-16
Scheduled maintenance ....................................................
... 8-2 Windshield wiper blades .....................................................
... 8-17
General maintenance .........................................................
... 8-2 Cleaning ...........................................................................
... 8-17
Where to go for service ....................................................
... 8-2 Replacing .........................................................................
... 8-17
General maintenance ...............................................................
... 8-2 Rear window wiper blade ...................................................
... 8-18
Explanation of maintenance items ...................................
... 8-2 Brakes ......................................................................................
... 8-18
Maintenance precautions ........................................................
... 8-5 Self-adjusting brakes ....................................................
... 8-18
Engine compartment check locations ..................................
... 8-6 Brake pad wear indicators ..........................................
... 8-18
QR25DE engine ..................................................................
... 8-6 Fuses ........................................................................................
... 8-19
Engine cooling system .............................................................
... 8-7 Engine compartment .....................................................
... 8-19
Checking engine coolant level .........................................
... 8-8 Passenger compartment ..............................................
... 8-20
Changing engine coolant ..................................................
... 8-8 Battery replacement ..............................................................
... 8-22
Engine oil ....................................................................................
... 8-9 Keyfob ...............................................................................
... 8-22
Checking engine oil level ..................................................
... 8-9 Intelligent Key battery ....................................................
... 8-23
Changing engine oil and filter ..........................................
... 8-9 Lights ........................................................................................
... 8-25
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid ............ ... 8-11 Headlights ........................................................................
... 8-25
Brake fluid ................................................................................
... 8-11 Exterior and interior lights ............................................
... 8-27
Window washer fluid ............................................................
... 8-12 Wheels and tires ...................................................................
... 8-31
Battery .......................................................................................
... 8-13 Tire pressure ...................................................................
... 8-31
Jump starting .....................................................................
... 8-14 Tire labeling .....................................................................
... 8-34
Drive belts ................................................................................
... 8-15 Types of tires ...................................................................
... 8-36
Spark plugs .............................................................................
... 8-15 Tire chains .......................................................................
... 8-37
Replacing spark plugs ....................................................
... 8-16 Changing wheels and tires ..........................................
... 8-38

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT
S35-D-110201-308D6977-4CEB-447B-A914-761AA0FAFDCB
Your new NISSAN has been designed to have
minimum maintenance requirements with long
service intervals to save you both time and
money. However, some day-to-day and regular
maintenance is essential to maintain your
NISSAN’s fine mechanical condition, as well
as its emission and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the main-
tenance chain.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
S35-D-110201-3A1DEF4E-C7A4-410C-B164-394507FB9145
For your convenience, both required and op-
tional scheduled maintenance items are de-
scribed and listed in your “NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide”. You must refer to that
guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is
performed on your NISSAN at regular intervals.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
S35-D-110201-EA45D551-31FD-45AC-84C7-86A06265D252
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal day-
to-day operation. They are essential for proper
vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to
perform these procedures regularly as pre-
scribed.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Performing general maintenance checks re-
quires minimal mechanical skill and only a few
general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by
yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a
NISSAN dealer.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
S35-D-110201-2F655382-40D8-4EAD-859C-6E05E2D5CEAC
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and serviced by a NISSAN dealer.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
and are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips, and in-dealership information systems.
They are completely qualified to work on
NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to
meet the maintenance requirements on your
vehicle — in a reliable and economical way.
Black plate (298,1)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
S35-D-110201-D843A8B9-8AAA-4A7A-A67E-0EE527CB549A
During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smell, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, see “Maintenance precautions” later in
this section.
EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE
ITEMS S35-D-110201-3BC260BA-690D-477C-91AC-4BE39984F115
Additional information on the following
items with “*” is found later in this section.
OutsideS35-D-110201-BEFBD842-6721-4232-85DD-4674C0605138
the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors
and the engine hood operate properly. Also
ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate
hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if
necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the primary
latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If
necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires,
including the spare, to the pressure specified.
Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive
wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components: Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for
wheel alignment.
If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal
highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
For additional information regarding tires, refer
to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War-
ranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a
damaged windshield repaired by a qualified
repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks
or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
S35-D-110201-CC243554-AEAC-47F1-92F5-9C00AD8195A2
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when
performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning
the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for
smooth operation and make sure the pedal
does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep
the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth
operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes
down further than normal, the pedal feels
spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to
stop, see a NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep
the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Black plate (299,1)
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly
steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely
with the selector lever in the P (Park) position
without applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake
operation regularly. The vehicle should be
securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the
parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs
adjusted, see a NISSAN dealer.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt
webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure
they operate smoothly and that all latches lock
securely in every position. Check that the head
restraints move up and down smoothly and that
the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all
latched positions.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the
steering conditions, such as excessive free play,
hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that
all warning lights and chimes are operating
properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and
in sufficient quantity when operating the heater
or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
S35-D-110201-72861ABE-E4F3-407B-92C6-F64761D7062A
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.
It should be between the MAX and MIN lines.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe condition require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake
fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on
the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts*: Make sure that the drive
belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface and turning off the
engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to
drain back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (300,1)
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exterior” in the “7. Appearance and care”
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of section.
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. (See adequate fluid in the reservoir.
“Precautions when starting and driving” in the
“5. Starting and driving” section for exhaust gas
(carbon monoxide).)
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,
oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected
immediately.
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-
posed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances, other-
wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
lines and around the exhaust system. At the end
of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly
flushed with plain water, being careful to clean
those areas where mud and dirt may accumu-
late. For additional information, see “Cleaning

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
S35-D-110201-B74F7695-55EC-4CC1-AF27-7617EC3FC97C
When performing any inspection or mainte-
nance work on your vehicle, always take care
to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or
damage to the vehicle. The following are general
precautions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
. Park the vehicle on a level surface,
apply the parking brake securely
and block the wheels to prevent
the vehicle from moving. Move the
selector lever to P (Park).
. Be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF or LOCK position when per-
forming any parts replacement or
repairs.
. If you must work with the engine
running, keep your hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from moving
fans, belts and any other moving
parts.
. It is advisable to secure or remove
any loose clothing and remove any
jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc.
before working on your vehicle.
. Always wear eye protection when-
ever you work on your vehicle.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
. If you must run the engine in an
enclosed space such as a garage, be
sure there is proper ventilation for
exhaust gases to escape.
. Never get under the vehicle while it
is supported only by a jack. If it is
necessary to work under the vehicle,
support it with safety stands.
. Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from fuel tank and the
battery.
. The fuel filter or fuel lines should be
serviced by a NISSAN dealer be-
cause the fuel lines are under high
pressure even when the engine is
off.
CAUTION
. Do not work under the hood while
the engine is hot. Turn the engine
off and wait until it cools down.
. Avoid direct contact with used en-
gine oil and coolant. Improperly
disposed engine oil, and engine
coolant and/or other vehicle fluids
can damage the environment. Al-
Black plate (301,1)
ways conform to local regulations
for disposal of vehicle fluid.
. Never leave the engine or the CVT
related component harnesses dis-
connected while the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
. Never connect or disconnect the
battery or any transistorized com-
ponent while the ignition switch is
in the ON position.
. Your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic engine cooling fan. It may
come on at any time without warn-
ing, even if the ignition key is in the
OFF position and the engine is not
running. To avoid injury, always
disconnect the negative battery
cable before working near the fan.
This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also
available. (See “Owner’s Manual/Service Man-
ual order information” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section.)
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
 Black plate (302,1)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS
S35-D-110201-0FD69969-98CF-4B76-993A-772AC6053520

difficulties or excessive emissions, and could

affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about
any servicing, we recommend that it be
done by a NISSAN dealer.

SDI2127

QR25DE ENGINE
S35-D-110201-CE045E86-1FAB-4B03-A2FF-59AEDA4CE682
1. Engine oil filler cap 7. Engine oil dipstick
2. Brake fluid reservoir 8. Radiator filler cap
3. Air cleaner 9. Battery
4. Engine coolant reservoir 10. Fuse/fusible link holder
5. Window washer fluid reservoir
6. Drive belt location

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
S35-D-110201-5F27817E-CC25-4EF8-A3FD-71BAFE2E41C5
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and
50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze
and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution
contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional
engine cooling system additives are not neces-
sary.
WARNING
. Never remove the radiator or cool-
ant reservoir cap when the engine is
SDI2128
hot. Wait until the engine and
radiator cool down. Serious burns
Removing the air duct
S35-D-110201-F68DC4EA-FB8C-4D98-9C23-A8AED598CAE0 could be caused by high pressure
Remove the air duct *A if necessary.
fluid escaping from the radiator.
1. Remove the clips *B with a suitable tool. See precautions in “If your vehicle
2. Pull the air duct upward * 1 and then overheats” in the “6. In case of
sideways *2 . emergency” section of this manual.
. The radiator is equipped with a
Install the air duct securely after any inspection
pressure type radiator cap. To pre-
or maintenance work is performed.
vent engine damage, use only a
genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (303,1)
CAUTION
. Never use any cooling system ad-
ditives such as radiator sealer. Ad-
ditives may clog the cooling system
and cause damage to the engine,
transmission and/or cooling sys-
tem.
. When adding or replacing coolant,
be sure to use only Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-
ant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-
ant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide
antifreeze protection to −348F
(−378C). If additional freeze protec-
tion is needed due to weather where
you operate your vehicle, add Gen-
uine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) concentrate follow-
ing the directions on the container.
If an equivalent coolant other than
Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-
freeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-
low the coolant manufacturer’s
instructions to maintain minimum
antifreeze protection to −348F
(−378C). The use of other types of
coolant solutions other than Genu-
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

ine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) or equivalent may
damage the engine cooling system.
. The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000
km) or 7 years. Mixing any other
type of coolant other than Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-
ant (blue) , including Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Cool-
ant (green), or the use of non-
distilled water will reduce the life
expectancy of the factory-fill cool-
ant. Refer to the NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide for more
details.
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
SDI2100
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
S35-D-110201-38BC8B2D-EDD2-4248-AF5D-D2E2CA096255
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
the MIN level * 2 , open the reservoir cap and
add coolant up to the MAX level * 1 . If the
reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level * 1 .
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Black plate (304,1)
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
S35-D-110201-39600194-EC4B-4B12-A3A0-C8B0B7FE6BFC
Major cooling system repairs should be per-
formed by a NISSAN dealer. The service
procedures can be found in the appropriate
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.
WARNING
. To avoid the danger of being
scalded, never change the coolant
when the engine is hot.
. Never remove the radiator cap when
the engine is hot. Serious burns
could be caused by high pressure
fluid escaping from the radiator.
. Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made,
wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
. Keep coolant out of reach of chil-
dren and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.

ENGINE OIL
S35-D-110201-513ADAA0-E81C-4358-9E9B-247C261AFF68
SDI2129
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
S35-D-110201-E85752C2-C790-4D7B-A1A7-889A7C325F8D
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Run the engine until it reaches operating
temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
Reinsert it all the way.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
level. It should be within the range * 1 . If the
oil level is below *2 , remove the oil filler cap
and pour recommended oil through the
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (305,1)
opening. Do not overfill *
3 . 4. Raise and support the vehicle using a
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.
. Place the safety jack stands under the
It is normal to add some oil between oil
vehicle jack-up points.
maintenance intervals or during the break-
. A suitable adapter should be attached to
in period, depending on the severity of
operating conditions. the jack stand saddle.
CAUTION CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Make sure the correct lifting and sup-
Operating the engine with an insuffi- port points are used to avoid vehicle
cient amount of oil can damage the damage.
engine, and such damage is not cov-
ered by warranty.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
S35-D-110201-EB3C8F8D-B9A5-464F-9C14-F73939411A2E
Change the engine oil and filter according to the
maintenance log shown in the NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide.
VehicleS35-D-110201-953D6A28-DEB2-4D1C-858B-690A9ECD35C6
set-up
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

. Waste oil must be disposed of
properly.
. Check your local regulations.
Perform steps 4 to 9 when the engine oil
filter change is needed.
4. Remove the plastic cover over the oil filter
location by removing the small plastic clips.
5. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.
Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
6. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface
with a clean rag.
SDI2120
CAUTION
1. Oil filler cap
2. Oil drain plug Be sure to remove any old gasket
3. Oil filter material remaining on the mounting
surface of the engine. Failure to do so
Engine oil and filter
S35-D-110201-EE672A53-2059-4431-9900-0CB4AB10F8FC could lead to engine damage.
1. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.
2. Remove the oil filler cap. 7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
3. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and engine oil.
completely drain the oil. 8. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until a slight
resistance is felt, then tighten additionally
more than 2/3 turn.
CAUTION
Oil filter tightening torque:
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the 11 to 15 ft-lb
engine oil is hot. (14.7 to 20.5 N·m)
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (306,1)
9. Install the plastic cover.
10. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a
new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug
with a wrench.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 to 29 ft-lb
(29 to 39 N·m)
Do not use excessive force.
11. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, and install the oil filler
cap securely.
See “Capacities and recommended fuel/
lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-
sumer information” section for drain and refill
capacity. The drain and refill capacity
depends on the oil temperature and drain
time. Use these specifications for reference
only. Always use the dipstick to determine
the proper amount of oil in the engine.
12. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the drain plug and the oil filter.
Correct as required.
13. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Add engine oil if necessary.

After theS35-D-110201-60B8C37E-A45B-4E36-943D-A11F3FFE110B
operation
1. Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
2. Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
WARNING
. Prolonged and repeated contact
with used engine oil may cause skin
cancer.
. Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made,
wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
. Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
S35-D-110201-7025907A-6A12-49EB-839B-E4EDBE85FD64
CAUTION
. Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.
. Using transmission fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2
will damage the CVT, which is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle
limited warranty.
When checking or replacement is required, we
recommend a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
Black plate (307,1)
BRAKE FLUID
S35-D-110201-7E9EAFC0-0C1F-4352-8FF8-CF6DE7EAF643
For additional brake fluid information, see
“Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants”
in the “9. Technical and consumer information”
section of this manual.
WARNING
. Use only new fluid from a sealed
container. Old, inferior or contami-
nated fluid may damage the brake
system. The use of improper fluids
can damage the brake system and
affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
. Clean the filler cap before removing.
. Brake fluid is poisonous and should
be stored carefully in marked con-
tainers out of the reach of children.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted
surfaces. This will damage the paint. If
fluid is spilled, immediately wash the
surface with water.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
 Black plate (308,1)

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

S35-D-110201-08AB7E18-0AB2-4479-9BCC-2BAE1A25E985

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodi-

cally. Add window washer fluid when the low
window washer fluid warning light illuminates (if
so equipped).
To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the
cap and pour the window washer fluid into the
reservoir opening.
Add a washer solvent to the water for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
SDI2130 SDI2131 conditions require an increased amount of
Type A window washer fluid.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is
Recommended fluid:
below the MIN line * 1 or the brake warning
light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Super Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concen-
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 trate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent
fluid up to the MAX line * 2 . If fluid must be
added frequently, the system should be checked
by a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
. Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for window washer solution.
This may result in damage to the
paint.
. Do not fill the window washer
reservoir tank with washer fluid
SDI2132 concentrates at full strength. Some
Type B methyl alcohol based washer fluid
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (309,1)

BATTERY
S35-D-110201-9895A1BD-E620-4124-903A-FD652172A3E7
. Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
concentrates may permanently stain . When working on or near a battery,
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
the grille if spilled while filling the always wear suitable eye protection
soda and water.
window washer reservoir tank. and remove all jewelry.
. Make certain the terminal connections are
. Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates clean and securely tightened. . Battery posts, terminals and related
with water to the manufacturer’s accessories contain lead and lead
. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
recommended levels before pouring compounds. Wash hands after
longer, disconnect the negative (−) battery
the fluid into the window washer handling.
terminal cable to prevent discharging it.
reservoir tank. Do not use the . Keep the battery out of the reach of
window washer reservoir tank to children.
mix the washer fluid concentrate WARNING
and water.
. Do not expose the battery to flames
or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas
generated by the battery is explo-
sive. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or
painted surfaces. After touching a
battery or battery cap, do not touch
or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash
your hands. If the acid contacts your
eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15
minutes and seek medical attention.
. Do not operate the vehicle if the
fluid in the battery is low. Low
battery fluid can cause a higher load
on the battery which can generate
heat, reduce battery life, and in
some cases lead to an explosion.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (310,1)

JUMP STARTING
S35-D-110201-FDDC2196-BE20-4DFF-95B0-75BBB4535EF5
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “6. In case of emergency” section. If the
engine does not start by jump starting, the
battery may have to be replaced. Contact a
NISSAN dealer.

DI0137MA SDI1480C

Check the fluid level in each cell. (Remove the 1. Remove the cell plugs *
A .
battery cover if it is necessary.) It should be 2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL
between the UPPER LEVEL * 1 and LOWER
*1 line.
LEVEL * 2 lines.
If the side of the battery is not clear, check
If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled the distilled water level by looking directly
water to bring the level to the indicator in each above the cell; the condition * 1 indicates
filler opening. Do not overfill. OK and the conditions * 2 needs more to
be added.
3. Tighten cell plugs *
A .

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (311,1)

DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS

S35-D-110201-32D18337-FF6D-4A43-A930-F2B2207ED3E2 S35-D-110201-0266E778-F80C-4CAC-8AC5-A90E6EFC3894

the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it

replaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.
2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-
tion.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch
are off and that the parking brake is
engaged securely.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to
remove the spark plugs. An incorrect
SDI2090 socket can damage the spark plugs.
1. Alternator
2. Water pump
3. Drive belt auto-tensioner
4. Crankshaft pulley
5. Air conditioner compressor

WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position before servicing drive
belts. The engine could rotate unex-
pectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of

unusual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


SDI2020
REPLACINGGUID-416121F9-5467-47CE-A990-CE8202B7CEDD
SPARK PLUGS
If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer
for servicing.
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
S35-D-110201-A5BBA1E7-8DC0-4A27-A0A1-0258FE0396B7
It is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped
spark plugs as frequently as the conventional
type spark plugs since they will last much longer.
Follow the maintenance log shown in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do
not reuse spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.
Always replace spark plugs with recom-
mended or equivalent ones.
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (312,1)
AIR CLEANER
S35-D-110201-FC8F2C69-51BD-4F6C-93D0-AFC7BAF9651D
flame if the engine backfires. If it
isn’t there, and the engine backfires,
you could be burned. Do not drive
with the air cleaner removed, and be
careful when working on the engine
with the air cleaner removed.
. Never pour fuel into the throttle
body or attempt to start the engine
with the air cleaner removed. Doing
so could result in serious injury.
SDI2106
Push the tabs *
1 and pull out the filter element
*2 .
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned and
reused. Replace it according to the maintenance
log shown in the “NISSAN Service and Main-
tenance Guide”. When replacing the filter, wipe
the inside of the air cleaner housing and the
cover with a damp cloth.
WARNING
. Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it stops
 Black plate (313,1)

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

S35-D-110201-53E17982-E39E-49B7-A947-15ED15FB35C8
CLEANING
S35-D-110201-73406825-1B4C-487C-8E06-80AA8D836FC2
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
washer solution or a mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with clear water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth
soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent.
Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your
windshield is still not clear after cleaning the SDI2048
blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.
REPLACING
S35-D-110201-4CA420D3-F635-4329-9322-56E2AF5BBC2A
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. CAUTION
CAUTION 1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
. After wiper blade replacement, re-
Worn windshield wiper blades can 2. Push and hold the release tab *A , and
turn the wiper arm to its original
damage the windshield and impair move the wiper blade down the wiper arm
position; otherwise it may be da-
driver vision. *1 .
maged when the hood is opened.
3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
. Make sure the wiper blades contact
arm until a click sounds.
the glass; otherwise the arm may be
4. Rotate the wiper blade so that the dimple is damaged from wind pressure.
in the groove.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (314,1)

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE BRAKES

S35-D-110201-1FC3D998-09C7-4922-B13A-8E5CB6338E4A
Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or
replacement is required.
S35-D-110201-B17410A9-2500-4B28-BA04-D63D7380523C
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES
S35-D-110201-028DE896-EA01-45A9-899A-FB7698AAB5E4
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the
brake pedal is applied.

WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake
system check if the brake pedal height
does not return to normal.

BRAKE S35-D-110201-8E781783-BE59-4675-AE08-8F80EAB3AD6D
PAD WEAR INDICATORS
The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-
ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
will make a high pitched scraping sound when
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will
SDI1865
first occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,
Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle * A . the sound will always be heard even if the brake
This may cause improper windshield washer pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
operation. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any checked as soon as possible if the wear warning
objects with a needle or small pin * B . Be sound is heard.
careful not to damage the nozzle. Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise
may be heard. Occasional brake noise during
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (315,1)

FUSES
S35-D-110201-72D2AD23-7C13-452F-9C08-5ED0D5BC2474

light to moderate stops is normal and does not 2. Open the engine hood.
affect the function or performance of the brake 3. Remove the air cleaner duct. (See “Engine
system. compartment check locations” earlier in this
Proper brake inspection intervals should section.)
be followed. For additional information, see the 4. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover
maintenance log section of your “NISSAN using a suitable tool *
1 and pushing the tab
Service and Maintenance Guide”. *2 .

5. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller located

in the passenger compartment fuse box.

SDI2107

ENGINES35-D-110201-EF7088A6-CC7C-4081-9EF3-60446453E90D
COMPARTMENT

CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are turned off.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (316,1)

SDI1753 SDI2133

6. If the fuse is open *

A , replace it with a new
fuse * B .
7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
Fusible S35-D-110201-236AFFF2-6A85-4D86-8CB6-6A361FB7E742
links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 2. Pull to remove the fuse box cover *
1 .
S35-D-110201-ADA929EC-C7B9-4E8D-B793-60C0DEBB37E3
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller * 2 .
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on
the fuse box cover. This could damage
the electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are turned off.

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (317,1)

How to remove the extended storage

switch: GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
1. To remove the extended storage switch, be
sure the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or
“LOCK” position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the “OFF”
position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Pinch the storage switch and pull it in the
direction illustrated.

SDI1753 JVM0089X

4. If the fuse is open *

A , replace it with a new
Extended storage switch (if so equipped)
fuse * B . GUID-C7B28862-47E7-4FAE-A01A-DE7370C1F373
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical remove the extended storage switch and check
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN for an open fuse.
dealer.
NOTE:
If the extended storage switch malfunc-
tions, or if the fuse is open, it is not
necessary to replace the switch. In this
case, remove the extended storage switch
and replace it with a new fuse of the same
rating.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


BATTERY REPLACEMENT
S35-D-110201-0DEB0410-1191-4FAE-9DC8-B9019D7525D8
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to
swallow the battery and removed parts.
SDI2134
KEYFOB
GUID-A56F8FC6-0D6C-4580-A2AB-B2756D83072F
Replace the battery in the keyfob as follows:
1. Remove the screw.
2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the
corner and twist it to separate the upper part
from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (318,1)
the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery:
CR1620 or equivalent
. Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
. Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
. Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom case.
4. Close the lid securely and install the screw.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance
for replacement.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible
 Black plate (319,1)

for compliance could void the user’s 2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of the
authority to operate the equipment. corner and twist it to separate the upper part
For Canada: from the lower part. Use a cloth to protect
the casing.
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to 3. Replace the battery with a new one.
the following two conditions: (1) this Recommended battery:
device may not cause interference, and CR2025 or equivalent
(2) this device must accept any interfer- . Do not touch the internal circuit and
ence, including interference that may electric terminals as doing so could
cause undesired operation of the device. cause a malfunction.
. Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
. Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom case.

SDI2451

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY

S35-D-110201-6334A362-2949-483B-8BD4-808E92561299
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as
follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the In-
telligent Key.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (320,1)

may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence, including interference that may
SDI2452 cause undesired operation of the device.

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts

* 1 , and then push them together *
2 until it
is securely closed.
5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance
for replacement.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (321,1)

LIGHTS
S35-D-110201-DD4272B1-CED8-4C46-8F26-0A48F1D0C89C
1. Headlight (high-beam)
2. Front turn signal/park/side marker light
3. Front map light
4. Ceiling light
5. Front fog light
6. Headlight (low-beam)
7. High-mounted stop light
8. Cargo light
9. License plate light
10. Back-up light
11. Rear combination light (stop/tail/side marker light)
12. Rear turn signal light
HEADLIGHTS
S35-D-110201-FA3BA1AA-EEA0-42B6-9AC0-27B2DC9FEC37
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is
not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

SDI2668

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (322,1)

Replacing
S35-D-110201-88130121-CB19-405B-AC32-F8B7A74D8318
Halogen headlight model:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
High beam:
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which Wattage: 60
Xenon headlight model:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Bulb no.: HB3

WARNING
CAUTION
HIGH VOLTAGE
. Do not leave the bulb out of the
When xenon headlights are on, they
headlight reflector for a long period
produce a high voltage. To prevent an
of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc.
electric shock, never attempt to modify
entering the headlight body may
or disassemble. Always have your xe-
affect bulb performance.
non headlights replaced at a NISSAN
dealer. For additional information, see . High pressure halogen gas is sealed
“Headlight and turn signal switch” in inside the halogen bulb. The bulb
the “2. Instruments and controls” sec- may break if the glass envelope is
tion. scratched or the bulb is dropped.
. Only touch the plastic base when
If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer. handling the bulb. Never touch the
glass envelope.
Use the same number and wattage as originally
installed: . Aiming is not necessary after repla-
Low beam: cing the bulb. When aiming adjust-
Wattage: 35 ment is necessary, contact a
Bulb no.: D2R NISSAN dealer.
High beam:
Wattage: 60 Use the same number and wattage as originally
Bulb no.: HB3 installed:
Low beam:
Wattage: 55
Bulb no.: H11

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (323,1)

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

S35-D-110201-57CCB661-474F-4B16-A4E0-FA7B38594BB2

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Front turn signal/parking/side marker light 27/8 S25
Front fog light (if so equipped) 35 H8
Rear combination light
back-up 18 W16W
turn signal 21 W21W
stop/tail/side marker 21/5 W21/5W
License plate light 5 W5W
Front map light 8 —
Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) 2 —
High-mounted stop light* LED —
SDI2137
Ceiling light (if so equipped) 8 —
Disconnect the battery negative cable before Cargo light 8 —
replacing bulbs. Glove box light* 3.4 —
*
A High-beam bulb *: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
*
B Low-beam bulb NOTE: Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest information about parts.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (324,1)

SDI2141
Front turn signal/park/side marker light (Halogen
headlight model)
Xenon headlight model: See a NISSAN dealer
for replacement.
Halogen headlight model: Remove the bulb as
illustrated.

SDI2306 SDI2170
Front fog light
Replacement procedures
S35-D-110201-CFA652EC-DF34-4605-85FA-A4F826DD3B31
: REMOVE
: INSTALL

All other lights are either type A, B, C, D or E.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens
and/or cover.
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (325,1)

SDI2138 SDI2139 SDI2140

Rear combination light (stop/tail/side marker/turn) Back-up light License plate light
Open the lift gate to remove the rear combina- Open the lift gate to remove the back-up light The license plate light bulb can be accessed by
tion light assembly. assembly. One screw is located behind the removing the cover on the inside of the lift gate.
*
A : Clip cover on the lift gate.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (326,1)

SDI2030 SDI1500B
Front map light Cargo light

SDI1499A SDI2032
Ceiling light Vanity mirror light

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (327,1)

WHEELS AND TIRES

S35-D-110201-6C8A2EEE-8AF1-45BF-BAF6-930A9AF115CD
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the
“6. In case of emergency” section.
TIRE PRESSURE
GUID-4D963F91-4B9F-407E-9917-79DCDB9F655A
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
GUID-FB5E4DC6-E8CB-41DC-8DD9-88899CEDDA08
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When
the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning (if so
equipped) appears on the vehicle information
display, one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h).
Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop
in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while
driving).
For more details, see “Low tire pressure warning
light” in the “2. Instruments and controls”
section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
in the “6. In case of emergency” section.
Tire inflation pressure
S35-D-110201-90006E03-60AC-4BB9-8393-6BE63790C1B6
Check the pressure of the tires (including
the spare) often and always prior to long
distance trips. The recommended tire
pressure specifications are shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label under
the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire
and Loading Information label is affixed to
the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures
should be checked regularly because:
. Most tires naturally lose air over time.
. Tires can lose air suddenly when driven
over potholes or other objects or if the
vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect tire
life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
. Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
. The Gross Vehicle Weight rating
(GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.
S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-
bel. The vehicle weight capacity
is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do
not load your vehicle beyond
this capacity. Overloading your
vehicle may result in reduced
tire life, unsafe operating condi-
tions due to premature tire fail-
ure, or unfavorable handling
characteristics and could also
lead to a serious accident. Load-
ing beyond the specified capa-
city may also result in failure of
other vehicle components.
. Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure
gauge to ensure that the tire
pressures are at the specified
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (328,1)

level.
. For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.

SDI2340

Tire and Loading Information label

GUID-32B0B905-F78C-48F3-BB13-5DB6877F5C98
*
1 Seating capacity: The maximum number
of occupants that can be seated in the
vehicle.
*
2 Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle loading
information” in the “9. Technical and
consumer information” section.
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
*
3 Original size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at the
factory.
*
4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (329,1)

hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 tion shown on the Tire and Loading
km) at moderate speeds. The recom- Information label.
mended cold tire inflation is set by the 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
manufacturer to provide the best bal- much air is added, press the core of the
ance of tire wear, vehicle handling, valve stem briefly with the tip of the
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the gauge stem to release pressure. Re-
vehicle’s GVWR. check the pressure and add or release
*
5 Tire size — see “Tire labeling” later in air as needed.
this section.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
*
6 Spare tire size or compact spare tire
size (if so equipped) 7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
SDI1949
COLD TIRE
Checking theGUID-35F5460B-53F3-48BD-8D36-DF9B4793C040
tire pressure SIZE INFLATION
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the PRESSURE
tire. P215/70- 230 kPa,
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto R16 99H 33 PSI
the valve stem. Do not press too hard or P225/60- 230 kPa,
force the valve stem sideways, or air will FRONT
R17 98H 33 PSI
escape. If the hissing sound of air ORIGINAL
TIRE 230 kPa,
escaping from the tire is heard while
P225/55- 33 PSI*1
checking the pressure, reposition the
R18 97V 260 kPa,
gauge to eliminate this leakage.
38 PSI*2
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare it to the specifica-
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (330,1)

P215/70- 230 kPa,

R16 99H 33 PSI
P225/60- 230 kPa,
REAR
R17 98H 33 PSI
ORIGINAL
TIRE 230 kPa,
P225/55- 33 PSI*1
R18 97V 260 kPa,
38 PSI*2
230 kPa,
33 PSI
Original tire
SPARE 260 kPa,
SDI1575 SDI1606
TIRE 38 PSI*3
Example Example
T155/90- 420 kPa,
TIRE LABELING *1 Tire size (example: P215/60R16 94H)
D16 60 PSI GUID-6492823C-D518-40D7-BE6F-A88DD582F0F3
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
*1: 2WD models place standardized information on the side- for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires
*2: AWD models wall of all tires. This information identifies have this information.)
*3: AWD models with 18 inch tires
and describes the fundamental character- 2. Three-digit number (215): This number
istics of the tire and also provides the tire gives the width in millimeters of the tire
identification number (TIN) for safety stan- from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
dard certification. The TIN can be used to 3. Two-digit number (60): This number,
identify the tire in case of a recall. known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (16): This number is
the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


6. Two- or three-digit number (94): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight each
tire can support. You may not find this
information on all tires because it is not
required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
SDI1607
Example
*
2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department
of Transportation”. The symbol can be
placed above, below or to the left or
right of the Tire Identification Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifi-
cation mark
3. Two-digit code: Tire size
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-
tional)
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (331,1)
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture
6. Four numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 3103 means the 31st week of
2003. If these numbers are missing,
then look on the other sidewall of the
tire.
*3 Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-
coated fabric in the tire.
Tire manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
*4 Maximum permissible inflation pressure
This number is the greatest amount of
air pressure that should be put in the
tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure.
*5 Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that can
be carried by the tire. When replacing
the tires on the vehicle, always use a
tire that has the same load rating as the
factory installed tire.
*6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires an
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tube-
less”).
*7 The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown, if the tire
has radial structure.
*8 Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other tire-related terminology:
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model
name molding that is higher or deeper than
the same molding on the other sidewall of
the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
TYPES S35-D-110201-C5EB9331-8635-4B71-B5C5-812F94ED321F
OF TIRES
WARNING
. When changing or replacing tires,
be sure all four tires are of the same
type (Example: Summer, All Season
or Snow) and construction. A
NISSAN dealer may be able to help
you with information about tire type,
size, speed rating and availability.
. Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory
equipped tires, and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum
speed rating of the tire.
. Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
. For additional information regard-
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire
Safety Information” (Canada) in the
Warranty Information Booklet.
Black plate (332,1)
All season tires
S35-D-110201-46ECD967-CB74-4693-95E3-7177E1F912AF
NISSAN specifies all season tires on some
models to provide good performance all year,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All
Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON
and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction
than All Season tires and may be more appro-
priate in some areas.
SummerS35-D-110201-A515578D-1814-444A-A9E9-89BC82BB1F27
tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior performance on dry
roads. Summer tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire
sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or
icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
Snow tires
S35-D-110201-71AE78AE-072F-4EA0-8789-54B9B210A22B
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires will have lower speed
ratings than factory equipped tires and may not

match the potential maximum vehicle speed.
Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the
tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S. states
and Canadian provinces prohibit their use.
Check local, state and provincial laws before
installing studded tires. Skid and traction cap-
abilities of studded snow tires, on wet or dry
surfaces, may be poorer than that of non-
studded snow tires.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models
GUID-A4E89E8F-8195-4A57-BA99-CD357C8FF81B
CAUTION
. Always use tires of the same type,
size, brand, construction (bias, bias-
belted or radial), and tread pattern
on all four wheels. Failure to do so
may result in a circumference differ-
ence between tires on the front and
rear axles which will cause exces-
sive tire wear and may damage the
transmission, transfer case and dif-
ferential gears.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
. ONLY use spare tires specified for
the AWD model.
If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-
mended that all four tires be replaced with tires
of the same size, brand, construction and tread
pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment
should also be checked and corrected as
necessary. Contact a NISSAN dealer.
TIRE CHAINS
S35-D-110201-B43663A4-F981-4F85-8D61-36021FFAD0E3
CAUTION
NISSAN recommends using the follow-
ing tire cables made by Peerless Chain
Company for this vehicle due to limited
tire clearance. Call 800-533-8056 to
order tire chains for your vehicle.
. 215/70R16 - Sno-trac1000 part num-
ber 0103855 with chain tightener
part number 2007020
. 225/60R17, 225/55R18 - Sno-
trac1000 part number 0103855 with
chain tightener part number
2007190
Failure to use the correct traction
device will cause damage to the brakes,
suspension or other vehicle parts.
Black plate (333,1)
The tire chain part numbers and Peerless Chain
Company phone number are correct at the time
of printing that is shown on the back cover of
this Owner’s Manual. Always confirm the correct
part numbers with Peerless Chain Company
before ordering.
Only use other types of traction devices if the
traction device manufacturer recommends it for
use on your specific vehicle and the tire and
wheel installed on your vehicle.
Use of traction devices may be prohibited
according to location. Check the local laws
before installing traction devices. When instal-
ling traction devices, make sure they are the
proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are
installed according to the traction device man-
ufacturer’s suggestions. When using traction
devices, avoid fully loading your vehicle and
drive at reduced speeds. Failure to do so may
cause damage to the brakes and suspension
and adversely affect handling and performance.
Traction devices must be installed only on
the front wheels and not on the rear
wheels.
Do not drive with traction devices on paved
roads that are clear of snow. Driving with
traction devices in such conditions can cause
damage to the various mechanisms of the
vehicle due to some overstress.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
 Black plate (334,1)

It is recommended that wheel nuts be

CAUTION
. Do not use traction devices on dry
roads.
. Never install traction devices on a T-
type spare tire as doing so could
damage the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts.
SDI1662
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
S35-D-110201-D6074349-60FC-438B-BCE0-C84E9A3E862C
Tire rotation
S35-D-110201-9D3D3FB2-8299-4665-A8E2-B8657B8A1F32
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). (See “Flat
tire” in the “6. In case of emergency”
section for tire replacing procedures.)
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel
nuts to the specified torque with a
torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
80 ft-lb (108 N·m)
tightened to the specification at each
tire rotation interval.
WARNING
. After rotating the tires, check
and adjust the tire pressure.
. Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
. Do not include the spare tire or
any other small size spare tire in
the tire rotation.
. For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
da) in the Warranty Information
Booklet.

The wheel nuts must be kept tigh-

tened to the specification at all times.
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


. The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
. Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician, because
some tire damage may not be
obvious. Replace the tires as
necessary to prevent tire failure
SDI1663 and possible personal injury.
1. Wear indicator . Improper service of the spare
2. Wear indicator location mark tire may result in serious perso-
Tire wear and damage nal injury. If it is necessary to
S35-D-110201-2E6D7DC3-0C7F-4E12-A774-F3C188570BD7
repair the spare tire, contact a
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
. For additional information re-
. Tires should be periodically in- garding tires, refer to “Important
spected for wear, cracking, bul- Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Cana-
ging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks, da) in the Warranty Information
bulging or deep cuts are found, Booklet.
the tire(s) should be replaced.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (335,1)
Replacing wheels and tires
GUID-5F49021B-1D68-4060-A4C5-6D4AD42F0837
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. (See “Specifications” in
the “9. Technical and consumer information”
section for recommended types and sizes of
tires and wheels.)
WARNING
. The use of tires other than those
recommended or the mixed use of
tires of different brands, construc-
tion (bias, bias-belted or radial), or
tread patterns can adversely affect
the ride, braking, handling, ground
clearance, body-to-tire clearance,
tire chain clearance, speedometer
calibration, headlight aim and bum-
per height. Some of these effects
may lead to accidents and could
result in serious personal injury.
. If the wheels are changed for any
reason, always replace with wheels
which have the same off-set dimen-
sion. Wheels of a different off-set
could cause premature tire wear,
degrade vehicle handling character-
istics and/or interference with the
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

brake discs/drums. Such interfer-
ence can lead to decreased braking
efficiency and/or early brake pad/
shoe wear. See “Wheels and tires”
in the “9. Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual
for wheel off-set dimensions.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not
function and the low tire pressure
warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will
remain on after 1 minute. Contact
your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/
or system resetting.
. Replacing tires with those not ori-
ginally specified by NISSAN could
affect the proper operation of the
TPMS.
. Do not install a damaged or de-
formed wheel or tire even if it has
been repaired. Such wheels or tires
could have structural damage and
could fail without warning.
. The use of retread tire is not re-
commended.
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
. For additional information regard-
ing tires, refer to “Important Tire
Safety Information” (US) or “Tire
Safety Information” (Canada) in the
Warranty Information Booklet.
CAUTION
Always use tires of the same type, size,
brand, construction (bias, bias-belted
or radial), and tread pattern on all four
wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
circumference difference between tires
on the front and rear axles which will
cause excessive tire wear and may
damage the transmission, transfer case
and differential gears (AWD models).
Wheel S35-D-110201-8E10EC16-9CEC-43D7-A91E-D33EB97AE66C
balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can
get out of balance. Therefore, they should be
balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
Black plate (336,1)
For additional information regarding tires, refer
to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the War-
ranty Information Booklet.
Care of S35-D-110201-0B8C9CF9-E364-45F1-8AD3-5412738974BF
wheels
See “Cleaning exterior” in the “7. Appearance
and care” section for details about care of the
wheels.
Spare tire
S35-D-110201-E74B415C-3AFD-4581-B7A9-3FD301380EE5
When a spare tire is mounted (TEMPORARY
USE ONLY or conventional), the TPMS will not
function.
Observe the following precautions if the TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used,
otherwise your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident.
WARNING
. The TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire should be used for emergency
use. It should be replaced with the
standard tire at the first opportunity
to avoid possible tire or differential
damage.
. Drive carefully while the TEMPOR-
ARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-
 Black plate (337,1)

stalled. Avoid sharp turns and . Do not use the spare tire on other
abrupt braking while driving. vehicles.
. Periodically check spare tire infla- . Do not use more than one spare tire
tion pressure. Always keep the at the same time.
pressure of the TEMPORARY USE . Do not tow a trailer while the
ONLY spare tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
4.2 bar). Always keep the pressure is installed.
of the full size spare tire (if so
equipped) at the recommended
pressure for standard tires, as in-
dicated on the Tire and Loading CAUTION
Information label.
. Do not use tire chains on a TEM-
. With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire
spare tire installed do not drive your
chains will not fit properly and may
vehicle at speeds faster than 50
cause damage to the vehicle.
MPH (80 km/h).
. Because the TEMPORARY USE
. When driving on roads covered with
ONLY spare tire is smaller than the
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
original tire, ground clearance is
ONLY spare tire should be used on
reduced. To avoid damage to the
the rear wheels and original tire
vehicle, do not drive over obstacles.
used on the front wheels (drive
Also do not drive the vehicle
wheels). Use tire chains only on
through an automatic car wash
the front (original) tires.
since it may get caught.
. Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster
rate than the standard tire. Replace
the spare tire as soon as the tread
wear indicators appear.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (338,1)

MEMO

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (339,1)

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................... ... 9-2 Vehicle loading information .................................................
... 9-12
Fuel recommendation .........................................................
... 9-3 Terms .................................................................................
... 9-12
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ....................... ... 9-5 Vehicle load capacity ....................................................
... 9-13
Air conditioning system refrigerant and Securing the load ..........................................................
... 9-14
lubricant recommendations ...............................................
... 9-6 Loading tips .....................................................................
... 9-15
Specifications .............................................................................
... 9-7 Measurement of weights ..............................................
... 9-15
Engine ....................................................................................
... 9-7 Towing a trailer .......................................................................
... 9-16
Wheels and tires .................................................................
... 9-7 Maximum load limits ......................................................
... 9-16
Dimensions and weights ...................................................
... 9-8 Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/maximum
When traveling or registering your vehicle in Gross Axle Weight (GAW) .........................................
... 9-18
another country ..........................................................................
... 9-8 Towing load/specification ............................................
... 9-20
Vehicle identification .................................................................
... 9-8 Towing safety ..................................................................
... 9-20
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate ..................... ... 9-8 Flat towing .......................................................................
... 9-24
Vehicle identification number (chassis number) .......... ... 9-9 Uniform tire quality grading .................................................
... 9-25
Engine serial number ..........................................................
... 9-9 Treadwear ........................................................................
... 9-25
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ....................... ... 9-9 Traction AA, A, B and C ..............................................
... 9-25
Emission control information label ...............................
... 9-10 Temperature A, B and C ..............................................
... 9-25
Tire and loading information label ................................
... 9-10 Emission control system warranty .....................................
... 9-26
Air conditioner specification label ................................
... 9-10 Reporting safety defects .....................................................
... 9-26
Installing front license plate .................................................
... 9-11 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ......... ... 9-27
Event Data Recorders (EDR) .............................................
... 9-28
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information ..... ... 9-28

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (340,1)

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS
S35-D-110201-7D21A931-27C1-4A22-AAA3-BC246AE0D4F9
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure
instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) Recommended specifications

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 15-7/8 gal 13-1/4 gal 60 See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.
Engine oil*1
Drain and refill
With oil filter change 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6 . Engine oil with API Certification Mark*2
Without oil filter change 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.3 . Viscosity SAE 5W-30
Cooling system
With reservoir 7-3/4 qt 6-3/8 qt 7.3
Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
Reservoir 3/4 qt 5/8 qt 0.75
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2*3
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5 Viscosity SAE
Differential gear oil — — —
80W-90*4
Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5 Viscosity SAE
Transfer oil — — —
80W-90
Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the “8.
Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*6
Air conditioning system lubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or exact equivalent
Window washer fluid 1-1/4 gal 1 gal 4.5 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

*1: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.
*2: For additional information, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” later in this section.
*3: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle
limited warranty.
*4: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 328F (08C).
*5: Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer.
*6: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” later in this section for air conditioner specification label.

9-2 Technical and consumer information

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


FUEL RECOMMENDATION
S35-D-110201-A221234C-A924-408C-86C4-B0AED0C6451C
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
number (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
. Using a fuel other than that speci-
fied could adversely affect the emis-
sion control system, and may also
affect warranty coverage.
. Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because
this will damage the three-way cat-
alyst.
. Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can
damage the fuel system compo-
nents and is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Gasoline specifications
GUID-FB0FC0E7-207A-41F4-86F5-B3D4696C057C
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) speci-
fications where it is available. Many of the
automobile manufacturers developed this spe-
cification to improve emission control system
and vehicle performance. Ask your service
station manager if the gasoline meets the
WWFC specifications.
ReformulatedGUID-7B630239-6E8B-4DD6-A634-A7A85BD8A7F4
gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing refor-
mulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
GUID-ACAFD4CF-3803-48B3-AB06-1F34D57C0C20
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing
oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha-
nol with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels
of which the oxygenate content and the fuel
compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily
determined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
Black plate (341,1)
and/or fuel system damage.
. The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
. If an oxygenate-blend, other than
methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
. If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol) . It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not
available to ensure that all methanol
blends are suitable for use in NISSAN
vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine
stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced
after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during
Technical and consumer information 9-3

refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates
can cause paint damage.
E-85 fuel GUID-2E4CD94E-1192-45B9-916B-3787F129BF0E
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. govern-
ment regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square,
orange and black label with the common
abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
Aftermarket fuel additives
GUID-CEC1B382-6E18-485F-958A-F75011934C34
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel
injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve
deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commer-
cially. Many of these additives intended for gum,
varnish or deposit removal may contain active
solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful
to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
GUID-A306B15B-DFEF-40B6-A7F5-D6B25890AAD6
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock”. (Spark
knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If
severe, this can lead to engine damage. If
you detect a persistent heavy spark knock
9-4 Technical and consumer information
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (342,1)
even when using gasoline of the stated warranty.
octane rating, or if you hear steady spark
knock while holding a steady speed on . E-85 is a mixture of approximately
level roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded
the condition. Failure to correct the condi- gasoline.
tion is misuse of the vehicle, for which . U.S. government regulations require
NISSAN is not responsible. ethanol dispensing pumps to be
identified by a small, square, orange
Incorrect ignition timing will result in spark
and black label with the common
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
abbreviation or the appropriate per-
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
centage for that region.
damage. If any of the above symptoms are
encountered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
CAUTION
. Your vehicle is not designed to run
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a
vehicle not specifically designed for
E-85 fuel can damage fuel system
components and is not covered by
the NISSAN new vehicle limited

1. API certification mark
2. API service symbol
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE-
COMMENDATION
S35-D-110201-511B0564-AE50-4334-B6D3-9D8F4C034698
Selecting theGUID-8D4FD86D-A2DA-4341-81D4-4CF7B1865601
correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade,
quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure
satisfactory engine life and performance, see
“Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants”
earlier in this section. NISSAN recommends the
use of an energy conserving oil in order to
improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
STI0505
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
cosity standard. These oils have the API
certification mark on the front of the container.
Oils which do not have the specified quality
label should not be used as they could cause
engine damage.
Oil additivesGUID-0A3C4262-C7F8-4C22-9C20-79A9670C31D8
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not
necessary when the proper oil type is used and
maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has
been previously used should not be used.
Black plate (343,1)
Oil viscosity GUID-E4195374-9D10-473F-BA7C-56E3D3B9F144
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be
operated before the next oil change. Choosing
an oil viscosity other than that recommended
could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
GUID-4C0A1D71-5F5E-490A-B551-48CAC8DBB8CE
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When
replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals”.
ChangeS35-D-110201-7567B092-EA86-43AA-AC44-4953DDF10C88
intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using an engine oil and
filter other than the specified quality, or exceed-
ing recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of
incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is
not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
Technical and consumer information 9-5
 Black plate (344,1)

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend system components.

upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
require more frequent oil and filter changes. NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone
. repeated short distance driving at cold layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect
outside temperatures the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental
. driving in dusty conditions regulations require the recovery and recycling of
. extensive idling any refrigerant during automotive air condition-
ing system service. A NISSAN dealer has the
. towing a trailer
trained technicians and equipment needed to
. stop and go commuting recover and recycle your air conditioning system
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance refrigerant.
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE- air conditioning system.
FRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT RE-
COMMENDATIONS
S35-D-110201-8DF95390-B1EC-4255-9F4F-34D8A19F0BCB
The air conditioning system in your
NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the
refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil,
NISSAN A/C system oil Type S or the exact
equivalents.

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil
will cause severe damage to the air
conditioning system and will require
the replacement of all air conditioner

9-6 Technical and consumer information

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (345,1)

SPECIFICATIONS
GUID-8D91DA47-BD49-4680-9F48-4B76244A0ADA
ENGINE WHEELS AND TIRES
S35-D-110201-933AA0E8-B3B1-4A14-92D7-9E7B142878DE
S35-D-110201-F2DD8848-CCBE-4E88-B6DA-6C4908AB37E8

Model QR25DE Road wheel GUID-44AC539A-3F91-448E-A4D5-CA65C640823B

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Type Size Offset in (mm)
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, in-line Steel 16 6 6-1/2JJ
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.5 6 3.9 (89.0 6 100.0) Aluminum 16 6 6-1/2J
Displacement cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488) 1.57 (40)
17 6 7J
Firing order 1-3-4-2
18 6 7J
Idle speed rpm
No adjustment is necessary. Conventional 1.57 (40)
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm Spare
16 6 4T 1.18 (30)
Spark plug Standard DILKAR6A-11
Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) Tire GUID-BB534AE7-3A12-455C-A852-BB5320A123EC
Camshaft operation Timing chain
Pressure PSI
Type Size
(kPa) [Cold]
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
P215/70R16
99H
33 (230)
P225/60R17
Conventional
98H
P225/55R18 33 (230)*1
97V 38 (260)*2
T155/90D16 60 (420)
Spare 33 (230)
Conventional
38 (260)*3

*1: 2WD models

*2: AWD models
*3: AWD models (P225/55R18 97V)

Technical and consumer information 9-7

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (346,1)

WHEN TRAVELING OR
REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
ANOTHER COUNTRY
S35-D-110201-97696DB0-9FA1-454C-9A54-75CB658B4436
S35-D-110201-AF2DD131-9602-439B-9C4F-B002B286C468
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS When planning to travel in another coun-
S35-D-110201-C0BD9505-CF16-45D9-ADC2-03F9DD3B48B2
try, you should first find out if the fuel available is
Overall length in (mm) 183.3 (4,655)*1
183.9 (4,670)*2
suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
Overall width in (mm) 70.9 (1,800) Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
Overall height in (mm) 65.3 (1,658) may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
66.3 (1,683)*3 must be operated with unleaded gasoline.
Front tread in (mm) 60.6 (1,540) Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas
Rear tread in (mm) 61.0 (1,550) where appropriate fuel is not available.
Wheelbase in (mm) 105.9 (2,690) When transferring the registration of your
Gross Vehicle vehicle to another country, state, province
Weight Rating lb (kg) or district, it may be necessary to modify the
(GVWR)
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
Gross Axle See the F.M.V.S.S. or
Weight Rating C.M.V.S.S. certification The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
label on the driver’s STI0457
(GAWR) emission control and safety standards vary
side center pillar.
Front lb (kg) according to the country, state, province or VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
district; therefore, vehicle specifications may (VIN) PLATE
Rear lb (kg) S35-D-110201-3F76E755-25B1-43D9-AFCF-FF5F50E32C88
differ.
The vehicle identification number plate is at-
*1: Without front license plate bracket When any vehicle is to be taken into tached as shown. This number is the identifica-
*2: With front license plate bracket another country, state, province or district tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
*3: With roof rail and registered, its modifications, transpor- registration.
tation, and registration are the responsi-
bility of the user. NISSAN is not
responsible for any inconvenience that
may result.

9-8 Technical and consumer information

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (347,1)

STI0553 SDI2121 STI0448

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

(chassisS35-D-110201-859767E6-F86B-4A5A-B7CB-B6320904327E
number)
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
Remove the cover to access the number.
S35-D-110201-CB8324CE-1974-419D-AC72-4A30E1369F8B
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION
LABEL S35-D-110201-12E3C8D7-CF92-4ECA-8F69-6F7ACEA8B044
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification
label is affixed as shown. This label contains
valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross
Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of
manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

Technical and consumer information 9-9

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


STI0554
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
LABEL GUID-66B2F781-E0EB-479C-AB4A-981653668323
The emission control information label is at-
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
9-10 Technical and consumer information
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
STI0494
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL S35-D-110201-A6628635-F2F6-406F-8A41-BB648265F3A3
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label affixed to the pillar as
illustrated.
Black plate (348,1)
STI0555
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL S35-D-110201-AD318A46-F994-493D-A23F-30C24E4DCD3D
The air conditioner specification label is at-
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
 Black plate (349,1)

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

GUID-8C7B3EDE-5B46-4444-AAEA-39E13F6CC646
Use the following steps to mount the license
plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that
the following parts are enclosed in the plastic
bag.
. License plate bracket
. J-nut 6 2
. Screw 6 2
. Screw grommet 6 2
1. Temporarily place the license plate bracket
by aligning the lower part *
A of it with the
lines *B on the bumper.

2. Mark the pilot hole points with a felt-tip pen

through the holes of the license plate
bracket.
3. Remove the license plate bracket.
4. Carefully drill two pilot holes using a 0.39 in
(10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations. (Be
sure that the drill only goes through the
fascia, or damage to the nut may
occur.)
5. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.
6. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the
STI0599
grommet hole to add 908 turn onto the part
*C .

7. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket

before placing the license plate bracket on

Technical and consumer information 9-11

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
GUID-BB9A5124-3B7E-4C93-AAB5-7F52C2C592B1
the fascia.
8. Install the license plate bracket with screws. WARNING
9. Install the license plate with bolts that are no
longer than 0.55 in (14 mm). . It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside the vehi-
cle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
. Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
. Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
TERMS GUID-D054302B-C9E3-4215-B3F5-DCA601494CB0
It is important to familiarize yourself with the
following terms before loading your vehicle:
. Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment,
fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not in-
clude passengers and cargo.
9-12 Technical and consumer information
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (350,1)
. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
- maximum total combined weight of the
unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other
optional equipment. This information is
located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
label.
. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This informa-
tion is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.
S.S. label.
. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rat-
ing) - The maximum total weight rating
of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and
trailer.
. Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load
(passengers and cargo) for the vehicle.
This is the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is
 Black plate (351,1)

used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue

weight must be included as part of the
cargo load. This information is located
on the Tire and Loading Information
label.
. Cargo capacity - permissible weight of
cargo, the subtracted weight of occu-
pants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
GUID-38380F31-0804-401A-AFE8-18E1DA7E686D
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle
shown as “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo” on the Tire and Loading
Information label. Do not exceed the
number of occupants shown as “Seating
Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants
and cargo”, add the weight of all occu-
pants, then add the total luggage weight.
Examples are shown in the following
illustration.
STI0445

Technical and consumer information 9-13

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


Steps for determining correct load limit
GUID-6705079D-CAFB-42C4-8404-44D73E33B351
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the XXX
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) or
(640 − 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
9-14 Technical and consumer information
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (352,1)
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
(See “Measurement of weights” later in this
section.)
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. See the Tire and Loading Information
label.
SIC3504
SECURING GUID-C5ADB899-0DC1-4071-8A50-14EE85DD830D
THE LOAD
There are tie down hooks located in the cargo
area as shown. The tie down hooks can be used
to secure cargo with ropes or other types of
straps.
Do not apply a total load of more than 22
lb. (98 N) to a single hook *
A or 7 lb. (31 N)

to a single hook *
B (if so equipped) when
securing cargo.
WARNING
. Properly secure all cargo with ropes
or straps to help prevent it from
sliding or shifting. Do not place
cargo higher than the seatbacks. In
a sudden stop or collision, unse-
cured cargo could cause personal
injury.
. The child restraint top tether strap
may be damaged by contact with
items in the cargo area. Secure any
items in the cargo area. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
. Do not load your vehicle any heavier
than the GVWR or the maximum
front and rear GAWRs. If you do,
parts of your vehicle can break, tire
damage could occur, or it can
change the way your vehicle han-
dles. This could result in loss of
control and cause personal injury.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
LOADING TIPS
GUID-CCF58CFF-D49E-4D69-894F-4222D9AD3A99
. The GVW must not exceed GVWR or
GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./
C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
. Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING
. Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the
seatbacks. In a sudden stop or
collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
. Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear
GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
vehicle can break, tire damage
could occur, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This
could result in loss of control
and cause personal injury.
Black plate (353,1)
. Overloading not only can short-
en the life of your vehicle and
the tire, but can cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer
braking distances. This may
cause a premature tire failure,
which could result in a serious
accident and personal injury.
Failures caused by overloading
are not covered by the vehicle’s
warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
GUID-C42BDC9B-1E48-4CC9-93DD-223E72FBF0D1
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts
that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle loads.
Individual axle loads should not exceed
either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR). The total of the axle loads should
not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given
on the vehicle certification label. If weight
ratings are exceeded, move or remove
items to bring all weights below the ratings.
Technical and consumer information 9-15

TOWING A TRAILER
GUID-6E94EE6F-56CB-48E7-B357-BC00A3528549
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and perfor-
mance and may lead to accidents.
CAUTION
. Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy
load for the first 500 miles (800 km).
Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
. For the first 500 miles (800 km) that
you tow a trailer, do not drive over
50 MPH (80 km/h) and do not make
starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of your
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used
primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Re-
member that towing a trailer places additional
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, steer-
ing, braking and other systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
9-16 Technical and consumer information
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (354,1)
guide includes information on trailer towing
capability and the special equipment required
for proper towing.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
GUID-95037A34-60C5-433B-A9E7-A5C73E63EA40
Maximum trailer loads
GUID-FCEF4CF4-ACB1-4803-8234-31949C25EEFC
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the
value specified in the “Towing Load/Specifica-
tion” chart. The total trailer load equals trailer
weight plus its cargo weight.
. When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system MUST be used.
STI0541
The maximum GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) should not exceed the value specified in The GCWR equals the combined weight of the
the following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)
plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater
than these or using improper towing equipment
could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking
and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but
also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights
appropriate for level highway driving may have to
be reduced on very steep grades or for low
traction situations (for example, on slippery boat
ramps).
Temperature conditions can also affect towing.
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high
 Black plate (355,1)

outside temperatures on graded roads can

affect engine performance and cause overheat- CAUTION
ing. The transmission high fluid temperature
protection mode, which helps reduce the Vehicle damage resulting from impro-
chance of transmission damage, could activate per towing procedures are not covered
and automatically decrease engine power. by NISSAN warranties.
Vehicle speed may decrease under high load.
Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and
vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced en- STI0542
gine power and vehicle speed. The
reduced speed may be lower than other Tongue loadGUID-C04C8C9B-DDE9-4EED-8127-6EE524310929
traffic, which could increase the chance
When using a weight carrying or a weight
of a collision. Be especially careful
distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between
when driving. If the vehicle cannot
10 to 15% of the total trailer load within the
maintain a safe driving speed, pull to
maximum tongue load limits shown in the
the side of the road in a safe area.
following “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If
Allow the engine to cool and return to
the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange
normal operation. See “If your vehicle
cargo to allow for proper tongue load.
overheats” in the “6. In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual.

Technical and consumer information 9-17

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


TI1012M
MAXIMUM GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
(GVW)/MAXIMUM GROSS AXLE
WEIGHT (GAW)
GUID-6D781F5A-F0FA-449E-936D-90A62CF6E861
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options
9-18 Technical and consumer information
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
required to achieve the rating. Additional pas-
sengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such
as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle
and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing
capacity and trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured
using platform type scales commonly found at
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
supply centers or salvage yards.
To determine the available payload capacity for
tongue load, use the following procedure.
1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.
S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-
able maximum tongue load.
To determine the available towing capacity, use
the following procedure.
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
“Towing Load/Specification” chart found
later in this section.
Black plate (356,1)
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-
able maximum towing capacity.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is
towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating
shown on the trailer and is not more than the
calculated available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale
to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and
Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified
ratings.
Example:
. Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo
and hitch - 4,133 lb. (1,874 kg).
. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -
4,233 lb. (1,920 kg).
. Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
from “Towing Load/Specification” chart -
5,136 lb. (2,329 kg).
 Black plate (357,1)

. Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow- Always verify that available capacities are within
ing Load/Specification” chart - 1,000 lb. the required ratings.
(453 kg).
4,233 lb. (1,920 kg) GVWR
− 4,133 lb. (1,874 kg) GVW
Available for tongue
= 100 lb. (45 kg) weight

5,136 lb. (2,329 kg) GCWR

− 4,133 lb. (1,874 kg) GVW
Capacity available for
= 1,003 lb. (455 kg) towing

100 lb. (45 kg) / Available tongue weight

1,003 lb. (455 kg) Available capacity
= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less than

the maximum towing capacity due to the
passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-
tween 10 to 15% of the trailer weight. If the
tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the
cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not
exceed the 10 to 15% tongue weight specifica-
tion even if the calculated available tongue
weight is greater than 15%. If the calculated
tongue weight is less than 10%, reduce the total
trailer weight to match the available tongue
weight.

Technical and consumer information 9-19

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (358,1)

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
GUID-B033984C-63D9-4226-9FF9-57007EB506CD
TOWING SAFETY
GUID-13068A2D-BD0C-46FD-BF4B-C8803F5A7767

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART Trailer hitch GUID-24230511-31D0-447D-B7C9-FF8558A7B458

Except for S grade (for US)
SV premium grade (for Canada)
SL grade (for Canada)
MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT*1 1,500 (680)
MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD 150 (68)
GROSS COMBINED WEIGHT RATING
5,636 (2,556)
(GCWR)
RECOMMENDED EQUIPMENT*2 Sway Control Device (SCD)
Unit: lb (kg) Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
S grade (for US) trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is
S grade (for Canada)
SV grade (for Canada)
available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure the
trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to
1,000 (453)
help avoid personal injury or property damage
due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road
surfaces or passing trucks.
5,136 (2,329)
Hitch ball GUID-8AF788A7-F693-4EDE-9E1F-4BC7CB890262

1: All towing above 1,000 lb (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes. Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and
2: Sway control devices are not offered by NISSAN. See a professional trailer/hitch outlet for a properly weight rating for your trailer:
designed sway control device for your trailer. . The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
have the size printed on top of the ball.
. Choose the proper class hitch ball based on
the trailer weight.
. The diameter of the threaded shank of the
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should
be no more than 1/16´´ smaller than the hole
in the ball mount.
. The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be
long enough to be properly secured to the
ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.

9-20 Technical and consumer information

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


Sway controlGUID-CA43C3C2-6AFA-4A0F-945D-1C0EEDB8B5F8
device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts and buffeting
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer
handling. Sway control devices may be used to
help control these affects. If you choose to use
one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to
make sure the sway control device will work with
the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake
system. Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the sway
control device.
Class I hitchGUID-8755D6BA-3FF5-44C8-AAA8-87A25DC7A9B5
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).
CAUTION
. The hitch should not be attached to
or affect the operation of the im-
pact-absorbing bumper.
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
. Do not modify the vehicle exhaust
system, brake system, etc. to install
a trailer hitch.
. To reduce the possibility of addi-
tional damage if your vehicle is
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
struck from the rear, where practi-
cal, remove the hitch and/or recei-
ver when not in use. After the hitch
is removed, seal the bolt holes to
prevent exhaust fumes, water or
dust from entering the passenger
compartment.
. Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting bolts are securely
mounted.
Tire pressures
GUID-24AC9370-4921-4DCC-A994-22A3A4903D8D
. When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle
tires to the recommended cold tire pressure
indicated on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label.
. Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer and tire manu-
facturers’ specifications.
Safety chainsGUID-C6AFFF2D-3488-4102-BC8F-7EB7C5A9DF69
Always use a suitable chain between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety
chains can be attached to the bumper if the
hitch ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to
leave enough slack in the chains to permit
Black plate (359,1)
turning corners.
Trailer lights GUID-A29FE40B-6D31-4369-84A4-A3AB91FE8E44
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available
power-type module/converter must be
used to provide power for all trailer
lighting. This unit uses the vehicle
battery as a direct power source for all
trailer lights while using the vehicle tail
light, stoplight and turn signal circuits
as a signal source. The module/con-
verter must draw no more than 15
milliamps from the stop and tail lamp
circuits. Using a module/converter that
exceeds these power requirements may
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain
the proper equipment and to have it
installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or
reputable trailer dealer.
Technical and consumer information 9-21

Trailer brakesGUID-8900FB3E-5F3F-4B97-99B7-FF25587AD020
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local
regulations and that it is properly installed.
WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system
directly to the vehicle brake system.
Pre-towing tips
GUID-9340413B-CD96-4DA1-9954-2F5798FB03D4
. Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an
abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition;
check for improper tongue load, overload,
worn suspension or other possible causes
of either condition.
. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
. Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity
low.
. Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
the back half. Also make sure the load is
balanced side to side.
9-22 Technical and consumer information
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
. Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,
vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation,
and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you
attach a trailer to the vehicle.
. Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
install any mirrors required for towing before
driving the vehicle.
. Determine the overall height of the vehicle
and trailer so the required clearance is
known.
Trailer towingGUID-74EA1701-DBB8-4BC7-AA72-370122A2DB72
tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
stopping and backing up in an area which is free
from traffic. Steering stability, and braking
performance will be somewhat different than
under normal driving conditions.
. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
. Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadver-
tently becoming unlatched.
. Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
. Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed. Some states or provinces have
specific speed limits for vehicles that are
Black plate (360,1)
towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.
. When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want the
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
back up slowly. If possible, have someone
guide you when you are backing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not
recommended; however, if you must do so:
CAUTION
If you move the shift selector lever to
the P (Park) position before blocking
the wheels and applying the parking
brake, transmission damage could oc-
cur.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly
release the brake pedal until the blocks
absorb the vehicle load.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.
To drive away:
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are
clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
. When going down a hill, shift into a lower
gear and use the engine braking effect.
When going up a long grade, downshift the
transmission to a lower gear and reduce
speed to reduce chances of engine over-
loading and/or overheating.
. If the engine coolant rises to an extremely
high temperature when the air conditioning
system is on, turn off the air conditioner.
Coolant heat can be additionally vented by
opening the windows, switching the fan
control to high and setting the temperature
control to the HOT position.
. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
circumstances.
. Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km).
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
. Have your vehicle serviced more often than
at intervals specified in the recommended
maintenance schedule in the NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide.
. When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
be closer to the inside of the turn than your
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
make a larger than normal turning radius
during the turn.
. Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
changes in crosswinds that could affect
vehicle handling. If swaying does occur,
firmly grip the steering wheel, steer straight
ahead, and immediately (but gradually)
reduce vehicle speed. This combination will
help stabilize the vehicle. Never increase
speed.
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.
This combination will help stabilize the
vehicle.
. Do not correct trailer sway by steering or
applying the brakes.
Black plate (361,1)
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply
the brakes and pull to the side of the road in
a safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is
balanced as described earlier in this section.
. Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires
considerably more distance than normal
passing. Remember the length of the trailer
must also pass the other vehicle before you
can safely change lanes.
. Down shift the transmission to a lower gear
for engine braking when driving down steep
or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle
without applying the brakes.
. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too
long or too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced
braking efficiency.
. Increase your following distance to allow for
greater stopping distances while towing a
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
. Do not use cruise control while towing a
trailer.
. Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles
that are towing trailers. Obey the local
speed limits.
Technical and consumer information 9-23

. Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness
connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after
50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every
break.
. When stopped in traffic for long periods of
time in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P
(Park) position.
. When launching a boat, don’t allow the
water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or
rear bumper.
. Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or
the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, the transmission
fluid should be changed more frequently.
For additional information, see the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
earlier in this manual.
9-24 Technical and consumer information
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (362,1)
FLAT TOWING
GUID-F394455A-C898-4202-848D-0A9978906EF4 NISSAN”in the “6. In case of emer-
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the gency” section of this manual.
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a
Continuously Variable Transmission
vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a
(CVT)
motor home. GUID-F352AEB5-C025-400E-9D86-4285636C7FC3
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
Do not tow an AWD vehicle with any of the
CAUTION wheels on the ground.
. Failure to follow these guidelines Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models:
GUID-D73A39BF-43C8-459F-9C24-47B7F579C407
can result in severe transmission To tow a vehicle equipped with a Continuously
damage. Variable Transmission (CVT), an appropriate
. Whenever flat towing your vehicle, vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed
always tow forward, never back- vehicle’s driving wheels. Always follow the dolly
ward. manufacturer’s recommendations when using
their product.
. DO NOT tow any continuously vari-
able transmission vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground (flat
towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE
internal transmission parts due to
lack of transmission lubrication.
. DO NOT tow an All-Wheel Drive
(AWD) vehicle with any of the
wheels on the ground. Doing so
may cause serious and expensive
damage to the powertrain.
. For emergency towing procedures
refer to “Towing recommended by

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
GUID-2E89586F-1185-4678-8E25-B17ACB25CA9C
DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
TREADWEARGUID-64C17F15-56C0-4908-8B5F-F468F2F4F522
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road char-
acteristics and climate.
TRACTION AA, A, B AND C
GUID-FFF7629A-E8C2-4FBB-97B6-CB998B2902F5
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on spe-
cified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (363,1)
traction performance.
WARNING
WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
The traction grade assigned to this tire
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
is based on straight-ahead braking
speed, under-inflation, or excessive
traction tests, and does not include
loading, either separately or in combi-
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
nation, can cause heat build-up and
or peak traction characteristics.
possible tire failure.
TEMPERATURE A, B AND C
GUID-4F10E116-4E8F-4764-8F27-16B98FF51AB7
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and
C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Technical and consumer information 9-25

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
GUID-245AA062-44BF-416A-97F4-D459EF2AC9AE
Your NISSAN is covered by the following
emission warranties.
For US:
. Emission Defects Warranty
. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of these warranties may be found with
other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-
formation Booklet which comes with your
NISSAN. If you did not receive a Warranty
Information Booklet, or it has become lost, you
may obtain a replacement by writing to:
. Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada:
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN. If you
did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet,
or it has become lost, you may obtain a
replacement by writing to:
. Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario,
L4W 4Z5
9-26 Technical and consumer information
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
GUID-F1870D5E-CDB8-4A06-B98B-79F8686B10E3
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
come involved in individual problems be-
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Ad-
ministrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,
SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1.
Black plate (364,1)
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada in addition to
notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may request that NISSAN
conduct a recall campaign. However,
Transport Canada cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or NISSAN.
You may contact Transport Canada’s De-
fect Investigations and Recalls Division toll
free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also
report safety defects online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.
Additional information concerning motor
vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-
port Canada’s Road Safety Information
Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-
ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns
please contact our Consumer Information
Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (365,1)
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
GUID-3B40933D-04EA-4271-9050-E3FEA1D4C2D0
A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive (AWD) condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
should never be tested using a two wheel blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is
dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used “ready”.
by some states for emissions testing), or similar Contact a NISSAN dealer to set “ready condi-
equipment. Make sure you inform test facility tion” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
personnel that your vehicle is equipped with
AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer.
Using the wrong test equipment may result in
transmission damage or unexpected vehicle
movement which could result in serious vehicle
damage or personal injury.
Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be
required to be in what is called the “ready
condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
test of the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when
it is driven through certain driving patterns.
Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained
by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or
the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be
reset to a “not ready condition”. Before taking
the I/M test, check the vehicle’s inspection/
maintenance test readiness condition. Place the
ignition switch in the ON position without
starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and
then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test
Technical and consumer information 9-27

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
GUID-D562961D-9AFE-4754-8C59-8C01CE2FEDDB
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
. Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g. name,
gender, age and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
9-28 Technical and consumer information
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will
only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or
permitted by law.
Black plate (366,1)
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
GUID-01ECFC68-80F1-4930-A150-93111F5483D4
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this
model year and prior can be purchased. A
genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the
factory trained technicians working at a NISSAN
dealer. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can
also be purchased.
In the USA:
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals contact:
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals contact:
1-800-247-5321
In Canada:
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN
Service Manual or Owner’s Manual for this
model year and prior please contact a NISSAN
dealer. For the phone number and location of a
NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN
Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a
bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.
 Black plate (367,1)

MEMO

Technical and consumer information 9-29

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (368,1)

MEMO

9-30 Technical and consumer information

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (369,1)

10 Index
A Audio system................................................................
... 4-30 C
Steering wheel audio controls..........................
... 4-64
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ............................
... 5-27 Autolight system..........................................................
... 2-34
Advanced air bag system .........................................
... 1-45 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ....... ... 9-2
Automatic Car phone or CB radio .............................................
... 4-66
Aiming control, Headlights........................................
... 2-37 Air conditioner.......................................................
... 4-27
Air bag system Cargo cover..................................................................
... 2-46
Door locks.................................................................
... 3-6 Cargo light....................................................................
... 2-55
Advanced air bag system ..................................
... 1-45 Average speed (MPH or km/h) ...............................
... 2-26
Front passenger air bag and status light....... ... 1-46 Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst................... ... 5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover ...................................
... 5-5 CD/CF/USB memory care and cleaning .............. ... 4-64
Front-seat mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag system ............................
... 1-49 Ceiling light...................................................................
... 2-54
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and B Child restraints.............................................................
... 1-22
rollover supplemental air bag system ............. ... 1-49 Booster seats........................................................
... 1-36
Back door (See lift gate) ..........................................
... 3-21 LATCH system ......................................................
... 1-24
Air bag warning labels...............................................
... 1-52
Battery............................................................................
... 8-13 Precautions on child restraints ......................... ... 1-22
Air bag warning light......................................
... 1-52, 2-16
Battery replacement, Intelligent Key................ ... 8-23 Child safety...................................................................
... 1-20
Air cleaner housing filter ...........................................
... 8-16
Battery replacement, Keyfob .............................
... 8-22 Child safety rear door lock .........................................
... 3-6
Air conditioner
Battery saver system...........................................
... 2-36 Chimes, Audible reminders ......................................
... 2-18
Air conditioner operation....................................
... 4-24
Keyfob battery replacement...............................
... 8-22 Circuit breaker, Fusible link ......................................
... 8-20
Air conditioner service ........................................
... 4-29
Before starting the engine ........................................
... 5-12 Cleaning exterior and interior............................
... 7-2, 7-4
Air conditioner specification label.................... ... 9-10
Belts (See drive belts)...............................................
... 8-15 Clock ......................................................
... 2-27, 4-42, 4-49
Air conditioning system refrigerant and
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ................ ... 4-67 Clock (models with navigation system)................... ... 4-8
lubricant recommendations....................... ... 4-29, 9-6
Booster seats...............................................................
... 1-36 Coat hooks ...................................................................
... 2-47
Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle
Brake Cold weather driving..................................................
... 5-30
security system)...........................................................
... 2-30
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..................... ... 5-27 Compact Disc (CD) player (See
Alcohol, drugs and driving..........................................
... 5-7
Brake fluid..............................................................
... 8-11 audio system).......................................
... 4-44, 4-52, 4-59
All-wheel drive (AWD)...............................................
... 5-22
Brake system.........................................................
... 5-27 Compass .........................................................................
... 2-8
All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light...................... ... 2-12
Parking brake operation .....................................
... 5-18 Console box .................................................................
... 2-44
Antenna..........................................................................
... 4-65
Warning light.........................................................
... 2-13 Continuously Variable Transmission
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ............................
... 5-27
Break-in schedule .......................................................
... 5-20 (CVT) fluid.....................................................................
... 8-11
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light..... ... 2-12
Brightness control Control panel buttons — color screen with
Appearance care
Display ON/OFF button ........................................
... 4-5 navigation system..........................................................
... 4-3
Exterior appearance care ......................................
... 7-2
Instrument panel......................................................
... 2-7 Controls, Steering wheel audio controls............... ... 4-64
Interior appearance care .......................................
... 7-4
TM Bulb check/instrument panel ...................................
... 2-12 Coolant
Around view monitor..............................................
... 4-14 Bulb replacement........................................................
... 8-25
Audible reminders .......................................................
... 2-18 Capacities and
Audio operation precautions ....................................
... 4-30 recommended fuel/lubricants...............................
... 9-2
Audio setup ....................................................................
... 4-6 Changing engine coolant......................................
... 8-8
Checking engine coolant level.............................
... 8-8

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (370,1)

Corrosion protection ....................................................

... 7-6 Changing engine coolant......................................
... 8-8 FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) player.... ... 4-41
Cover, Cargo cover ....................................................
... 2-46 Changing engine oil and filter..............................
... 8-9 FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc
Cruise control...............................................................
... 5-19 Checking engine coolant level.............................
... 8-8 (CD) player .......................................................
... 4-48, 4-57
Cup holders..................................................................
... 2-42 Checking engine oil level......................................
... 8-9 Fog light switch ...........................................................
... 2-38
CVT, Driving with CVT (Continuously Coolant temperature gauge .................................
... 2-6 Front manual seat adjustment....................................
... 1-3
Variable Transmission) ...................................
... 5-11, 5-13 Engine block heater.............................................
... 5-32 Front passenger air bag and status light.............. ... 1-46
Engine compartment check locations................ ... 8-6 Front power seat adjustment .....................................
... 1-3
D Engine cooling system...........................................
... 8-7 Front seat, Front seat adjustment.............................
... 1-3
Engine oil...................................................................
... 8-9 Front-seat active head restraints ..............................
... 1-9
Daytime running light system...................................
... 2-37 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation........... ... 9-5 Fuel
Defroster switch, Rear window and outside Engine oil viscosity..................................................
... 9-5 Capacities and
mirror defroster switch...............................................
... 2-33 Engine serial number..............................................
... 9-9 recommended fuel/lubricants...............................
... 9-2
Dimensions and weights .............................................
... 9-8 Engine specifications .............................................
... 9-7 Fuel economy........................................................
... 5-21
Drive belts.....................................................................
... 8-15 If your vehicle overheats.....................................
... 6-11 Fuel octane rating ...................................................
... 9-3
Driving Starting the engine ..............................................
... 5-13 Fuel recommendation.............................................
... 9-3
All-wheel drive (AWD)........................................
... 5-22 Event Data Recorders (EDR)...................................
... 9-28 Fuel-filler cap.........................................................
... 3-22
Cold weather driving...........................................
... 5-30 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ................................
... 5-2 Fuel-filler door.......................................................
... 3-22
Distance (miles or km)........................................
... 2-26 Gauge ........................................................................
... 2-6
Driving with CVT (Continuously F Loose fuel cap warning ......................................
... 3-24
Variable Transmission) .............................
... 5-11, 5-13 Fuses..............................................................................
... 8-19
On-pavement and off-road driving ..................... ... 5-6 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ................. ... 9-9 Fusible links..................................................................
... 8-20
Precautions when starting and driving .............. ... 5-2 Filter
Safety precautions ..................................................
... 5-7 Air cleaner housing filter ....................................
... 8-16 G
Changing engine oil and filter..............................
... 8-9
E Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch)..... ... 2-38 Garage door opener, HomeLink®
Flat tire.............................................................................
... 6-2 Universal Transceiver..................................................
... 2-56
Economy, Fuel..............................................................
... 5-21 Flat towing ....................................................................
... 9-24 Gas cap.........................................................................
... 3-22
Elapsed time.................................................................
... 2-27 Floor mat cleaning ........................................................
... 7-5 Gauge ..............................................................................
... 2-4
Electric power steering system ...............................
... 5-26 Fluid Engine coolant temperature gauge .................... ... 2-6
Electric power steering warning light ....................... 2-13 Brake fluid..............................................................
... 8-11 Fuel gauge ................................................................
... 2-6
Emission control information label..........................
... 9-10 Capacities and Tachometer ...............................................................
... 2-5
Emission control system warranty...........................
... 9-26 recommended fuel/lubricants...............................
... 9-2 Trip computer ........................................................
... 2-25
Engine Continuously Variable Transmission General maintenance ...................................................
... 8-2
Before starting the engine .................................
... 5-12 (CVT) fluid..............................................................
... 8-11 Glove box......................................................................
... 2-44
Break-in schedule ................................................
... 5-20 Engine coolant .........................................................
... 8-7
Capacities and Engine oil...................................................................
... 8-9
recommended fuel/lubricants...............................
... 9-2 Window washer fluid ..........................................
... 8-12

10-2

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (371,1)

H Remote keyless operation..................................

... 3-16 Cargo light.............................................................
... 2-55
Warning signals....................................................
... 3-14 Ceiling light............................................................
... 2-54
Hands-Free Phone System, Bluetooth® ............... ... 4-67 Interior light replacement...........................................
... 8-27 Fog light switch ....................................................
... 2-38
Hazard warning flasher switch.................................
... 2-38 Interior lights.................................................................
... 2-53 Headlight switch...................................................
... 2-36
®
Head restraints ..............................................................
... 1-6 iPod connecting ........................................................
... 4-45 Headlights bulb replacement ............................
... 8-25
Headlights iPod® player operation...................................
... 4-54, 4-62 Indicator lights.......................................................
... 2-17
Aiming control.......................................................
... 2-37 ISOFIX child restraint.................................................
... 1-24 Interior lights..........................................................
... 2-53
Bulb replacement.................................................
... 8-25 Map lights ..............................................................
... 2-53
Headlight switch...................................................
... 2-36 J Replacement..........................................................
... 8-25
Xenon headlights..................................................
... 2-34 Vanity mirror lights ...............................................
... 2-55
Heated seats................................................................
... 2-39 Jump starting..................................................................
... 6-9 Warning/indicator lights and
Heater audible reminders.................................................
... 2-12
Engine block heater.............................................
... 5-32 K Xenon headlights..................................................
... 2-34
Heater and air conditioner operation .............. ... 4-24 Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement ..... ... 8-27
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver ...........................
... 2-56 Keyless entry Loading information (See vehicle
Hood release................................................................
... 3-20 (See remote keyless entry system) .................... ... 3-7 loading information) ....................................................
... 9-12
Hook With Intelligent Key system (See Intelligent Lock
Coat hooks ............................................................
... 2-47 Key system) ...........................................................
... 3-16 Automatic door locks .............................................
... 3-6
Luggage hook .......................................................
... 2-47 Keys..................................................................................
... 3-2 Door locks.................................................................
... 3-4
Utility hook .............................................................
... 2-48 For Intelligent Key system..................................
... 3-10 Lift gate lock..........................................................
... 3-21
Horn................................................................................
... 2-39 Power door lock ......................................................
... 3-4
How to use the back button ......................................
... 4-5 L Low fuel warning light................................................
... 2-14
How to use the setup button.....................................
... 4-6 Low tire pressure warning light...............................
... 2-14
Labels Low tire pressure warning system
Air bag warning labels........................................
... 1-52 (See tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)) .... ... 5-3
I Luggage floor box.......................................................
... 2-45
Air conditioner specification label.................... ... 9-10
Ignition switch..............................................................
... 5-10 Emission control information label................... ... 9-10 Luggage hooks ............................................................
... 2-47
Key positions.........................................................
... 5-12 Engine serial number..............................................
... 9-9 Luggage side box .......................................................
... 2-45
Immobilizer system......................................................
... 2-30 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........... ... 9-9
Indicator lights..............................................................
... 2-17 Tire and Loading information label ....... ... 8-32, 9-10 M
Inside mirror..................................................................
... 3-25 Vehicle identification number (VIN) .................... ... 9-8
Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ..........................
... 9-27 LATCH system .............................................................
... 1-24 Maintenance
Instrument brightness control ....................................
... 2-7 License plate, Installing front license plate .......... ... 9-11 Battery.....................................................................
... 8-13
Instrument panel............................................................
... 2-3 Lift gate..........................................................................
... 3-21 General maintenance .............................................
... 8-2
Intelligent Key system ................................................
... 3-10 Light Indicators for maintenance ................................
... 2-24
Key operating range ............................................
... 3-12 Air bag warning light...........................................
... 1-52 Inside the vehicle ....................................................
... 8-3
Key operation ........................................................
... 3-13 Bulb replacement.................................................
... 8-25 Maintenance precautions ......................................
... 8-5

10-3

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (372,1)

Maintenance requirements....................................
... 8-2 Outside mirrors............................................................
... 3-27 R
Outside the vehicle.................................................
... 8-2 Overdrive OFF switch................................................
... 5-16
Seat belt maintenance........................................
... 1-19 Overheat, If your vehicle overheats ........................
... 6-11 Radio ..............................................................................
... 4-30
Malfunction indicator light (MIL)..............................
... 2-17 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Car phone or CB radio ......................................
... 4-66
Manual air conditioner................................................
... 4-24 order information .........................................................
... 9-28 FM-AM radio with Compact Disc
Manual front seat adjustment.....................................
... 1-3 (CD) player ............................................................
... 4-41
Map lights .....................................................................
... 2-53 P Steering wheel audio controls............................. 4-64
Master warning light...................................................
... 2-15 Range (distance to empty) .......................................
... 2-27
Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system) ................. ... 3-4 Panic alarm ..........................................................
... 3-8, 3-17 Rapid air pressure loss................................................
... 5-6
Meter, Trip computer..................................................
... 2-25 Parking Readiness for inspection/maintenance
Meters and gauges.......................................................
... 2-4 Brake break-in.......................................................
... 5-27 (I/M) test........................................................................
... 9-27
Instrument brightness control ..............................
... 2-7 Parking brake operation .....................................
... 5-18 Rear center seat belt .................................................
... 1-16
Mirror Parking on hills .....................................................
... 5-25 Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock........... ... 3-6
Inside mirror...........................................................
... 3-25 Phone Rear seats.......................................................................
... 1-6
Outside mirrors.....................................................
... 3-27 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ......... ... 4-67 Rear window and outside mirror
Mirror, Vanity mirror ....................................................
... 3-28 Car phone or CB radio ......................................
... 4-66 defroster switch...........................................................
... 2-33
Monitor, Rearview monitor ..........................................
... 4-9 Power Rear window wiper and washer switch ................ ... 2-32
Moonroof .......................................................................
... 2-51 Electric power steering system ........................
... 5-26 Rearview monitor...........................................................
... 4-9
Front seat adjustment ............................................
... 1-3 Recorders, Event data ...............................................
... 9-28
N Power door lock ......................................................
... 3-4 Registering your vehicle in another country........... ... 9-8
Power outlet ..........................................................
... 2-41 Remote keyless entry function, For Intelligent
Navigation setup............................................................
... 4-7 Power windows ....................................................
... 2-49 Key system....................................................................
... 3-16
New vehicle break-in..................................................
... 5-20 Precautions Remote keyless entry system.....................................
... 3-7
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System..................... ... 2-30 Audio operation ....................................................
... 4-30 Reporting safety defects ...........................................
... 9-26
Braking precautions.............................................
... 5-27 Rollover............................................................................
... 5-5
O Child restraints......................................................
... 1-22 Roof
Cruise control........................................................
... 5-19 Moonroof ................................................................
... 2-52
Off-road recovery..........................................................
... 5-6 Driving safety............................................................
... 5-7 Roof rack................................................................
... 2-48
Oil Maintenance .............................................................
... 8-5
Capacities and On-pavement and off-road driving ..................... ... 5-6 S
recommended fuel/lubricants...............................
... 9-2 Seat belt usage ....................................................
... 1-10
Changing engine oil and filter..............................
... 8-9 Supplemental restraint system..........................
... 1-39 Safety
Checking engine oil level......................................
... 8-9 When starting and driving ....................................
... 5-2 Child seat belts ....................................................
... 1-20
Engine oil...................................................................
... 8-9 Push starting ................................................................
... 6-10 Towing safety.........................................................
... 9-20
Engine oil viscosity..................................................
... 9-5 Satellite radio operation ................................
... 4-51, 4-58
Operation, Indicators for operation ........................
... 2-22 Seat adjustment
Outside air temperature ............................................
... 2-20 Folding front passenger’s seat ............................
... 1-5
10-4

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (373,1)

Front manual seat adjustment..............................

... 1-3 Small light indicator light...........................................
... 2-18 Sport mode switch ..............................................
... 5-16
Front power seat adjustment ...............................
... 1-3 Sonar system ...............................................................
... 5-21 Turn signal switch ................................................
... 2-38
Front seats................................................................
... 1-3 Spare tire..............................................................
... 8-40, 9-7 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch..... ... 2-41
Seat belt(s) Spark plugs ..................................................................
... 8-15 System setup .................................................................
... 4-7
Child safety............................................................
... 1-20 Sport mode switch .....................................................
... 5-16
Infants......................................................................
... 1-21 Starting T
Injured persons .....................................................
... 1-13 Before starting the engine .................................
... 5-12
Larger children......................................................
... 1-21 Jump starting............................................................
... 6-9 Tachometer .....................................................................
... 2-5
Precautions on seat belt usage........................ ... 1-10 Precautions when starting and driving .............. ... 5-2 Temperature gauge, Engine coolant
Pregnant women ..................................................
... 1-13 Push starting .........................................................
... 6-10 temperature gauge........................................................
... 2-6
Rear center seat belt ..........................................
... 1-16 Starting the engine ..............................................
... 5-13 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),
Seat belt cleaning...................................................
... 7-6 Status light, Front passenger air bag .................... ... 1-46 Engine start...................................................................
... 2-30
Seat belt extenders..............................................
... 1-19 Steering Three-way catalyst........................................................
... 5-3
Seat belt hooks ....................................................
... 1-16 Electric power steering system ........................ ... 5-26 Tilting steering wheel .................................................
... 3-24
Seat belt maintenance........................................
... 1-19 Steering wheel switch for audio controls ...... ... 4-64 Tire pressure, Low tire pressure warning light .... ... 2-14
Seat belt warning light........................................
... 2-16 Tilting steering wheel ..........................................
... 3-24 Tires
Seat belts...............................................................
... 1-10 Storage ..........................................................................
... 2-42 Flat tire.......................................................................
... 6-2
Seat belts with pretensioners ...........................
... 1-51 Sun visors .....................................................................
... 3-25 Low tire pressure warning system...................... ... 5-3
Shoulder belt height adjustment ...................... ... 1-15 Sunglasses holder ......................................................
... 2-43 Tire and Loading information label ....... ... 8-32, 9-10
Small children........................................................
... 1-21 Supplemental air bag warning labels..................... ... 1-52 Tire chains..............................................................
... 8-37
Three-point type ...................................................
... 1-13 Supplemental air bag warning light............ ... 1-52, 2-16 Tire dressing.............................................................
... 7-4
Seat(s) Supplemental restraint system.................................
... 1-39 Tire pressure .........................................................
... 8-31
Heated seats.........................................................
... 2-39 Precautions on supplemental Tire pressure monitoring
Seats ..........................................................................
... 1-2 restraint system.....................................................
... 1-39 system (TPMS) ...............................................
... 5-3, 6-2
Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Switch Tire rotation............................................................
... 8-38
System), Engine start.................................................
... 2-30 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) lock switch................ ... 5-23 Types of tires.........................................................
... 8-36
Security system, Vehicle security system ............. ... 2-29 Audio control steering wheel switch............... ... 4-64 Uniform tire quality grading ...............................
... 9-25
Selector lever, Shift lock release ............................
... 5-17 Autolight switch....................................................
... 2-34 Wheel/tire size.........................................................
... 9-7
Servicing air conditioner............................................
... 4-29 Fog light switch ....................................................
... 2-38 Wheels and tires..................................................
... 8-31
Settings..........................................................................
... 2-27 Hazard warning flasher switch............................. 2-38 Tonneau cover (see cargo cover) ...........................
... 2-46
Shift lock release Headlight aiming control ....................................
... 2-37 Touch screen..................................................................
... 4-3
Transmission..........................................................
... 5-17 Headlight switch...................................................
... 2-36 Towing
SHIFT “P” warning......................................................
... 2-22 Ignition switch.......................................................
... 5-10 Flat towing .............................................................
... 9-24
Shifting Overdrive OFF switch.........................................
... 5-16 Tow truck towing..................................................
... 6-12
CVT (Continuously Power door lock switch.........................................
... 3-5 Towing safety.........................................................
... 9-20
Variable Transmission) .............................
... 5-11, 5-13 Rear window and outside mirror Trailer towing.........................................................
... 9-16
Shoulder belt height adjustment .............................
... 1-15 defroster switch....................................................
... 2-33 TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system................. ... 5-3

10-5

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (374,1)

TPMS, Tire pressure warning system...................... ... 6-2 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system.......... ... 5-29 Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels .........................
... 7-3
Traffic setup....................................................................
... 4-9 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) warning light...... ... 2-16 Window washer fluid .................................................
... 8-12
Trailer towing................................................................
... 9-16 Ventilators......................................................................
... 4-23 Window(s)
Transceiver, HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.... ... 2-56 Voice command (Bluetooth Hands-Free ®
Cleaning ....................................................................
... 7-3
Transmission Phone System) ............................................................
... 4-73 Power windows ....................................................
... 2-49
Continuously Variable Transmission Windshield wiper and washer switch.................... ... 2-31
(CVT) fluid..............................................................
... 8-11 W Wiper
Driving with CVT (Continuously Rear window wiper and washer switch ......... ... 2-32
Variable Transmission) .............................
... 5-11, 5-13 Warning Rear window wiper blade ..................................
... 8-18
Transmission selector lever lock release........ ... 5-17 Hazard warning flasher switch............................. 2-38 Windshield wiper and washer switch............. ... 2-31
Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system) .... ... 3-7 Lights.......................................................................
... 2-12 Wiper blades.........................................................
... 8-17
Transmitter, With Intelligent Key system Tire pressure monitoring
(See Intelligent Key system).....................................
... 3-16 system (TPMS) ...............................................
... 5-3, 6-2 X
Traveling or registering your vehicle in Warning/indicator lights and
another country..............................................................
... 9-8 audible reminders.................................................
... 2-11 Xenon headlights.........................................................
... 2-34
Trip computer ...............................................................
... 2-25 Warning labels, Air bag warning labels................. ... 1-52 XM setup.........................................................................
... 4-7
Turn signal switch .......................................................
... 2-38 Warning light
Air bag warning light................................
... 1-52, 2-16
U All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light............... ... 2-12
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
Underbody cleaning .....................................................
... 7-3 warning light ..........................................................
... 2-12
Uniform tire quality grading ......................................
... 9-25 AWD warning light ..............................................
... 5-24
USB memory operation .................................
... 4-53, 4-61 Brake warning light..............................................
... 2-13
Utility hook ....................................................................
... 2-48 Electric power steering warning light ............. ... 2-13
Low fuel warning light.........................................
... 2-14
V Low tire pressure warning light........................ ... 2-14
Seat belt warning light........................................
... 2-16
Vanity mirror..................................................................
... 3-28 Warranty, Emission control system warranty ....... ... 9-26
Vanity mirror lights ......................................................
... 2-55 Washer switch
Vehicle Rear window wiper and washer switch ......... ... 2-32
Dimensions and weights .......................................
... 9-8 Windshield wiper and washer switch............. ... 2-31
Identification number (VIN) ...................................
... 9-8 Washing...........................................................................
... 7-2
Information display ...............................................
... 2-20 Waxing.............................................................................
... 7-2
Loading information .............................................
... 9-12 Weights (See dimensions and weights)................. ... 9-8
Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .................. ... 6-14 Wheel/tire size...............................................................
... 9-7
Security system ....................................................
... 2-29 Wheels and tires.........................................................
... 8-31
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch..... ... 2-41 Care of wheels ........................................................
... 7-3

10-6

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]

 Black plate (375,1)

MEMO

10-7

[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]


11 Epilogue
GAS STATION INFORMATION
S35-D-110201-D18CE73C-47CA-4965-9D6A-594E194C1200
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
S35-D-110201-8353293D-A4BD-46C0-9633-FAB1DBA2F0B6
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index)
number (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
. Using a fuel other than that speci-
fied could adversely affect the emis-
sion control systems, and may also
affect warranty coverage.
. Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, since this
will damage the three way catalyst.
. Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run
on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can
damage the fuel system compo-
nents and is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
For additional information, see “Capacities and
recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Techni-
cal and consumer information” section.
[ Edit: 2011/ 6/ 22 Model: S35-D ]
Black plate (377,1)
ENGINES35-D-110201-942C3F30-2B84-4860-ADA6-9725D0B054EC
OIL RECOMMENDATION:
. Engine oil with API Certification Mark
. Viscosity SAE 5W-30
See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubri-
cants” in the “9. Technical and consumer
information” section for engine oil and oil filter
recommendation.
COLD TIRE PRESSURES:
S35-D-110201-F5A875D1-931B-459F-A004-D1F2497D37E7
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For
additional information, see “Wheels and tires”
in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section.
NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE-
DURES RECOMMENDATION:
GUID-C20D5137-E921-4C3D-8F6D-828773466D4B
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of
vehicle use, follow the recommendations out-
lined in the “Break-in schedule” in the “5.
Starting and driving” section of this Owner’s
Manual. Follow these recommendations for the
future reliability and economy of your new
vehicle.